JP2023018801A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a start lever provided in a slot machine is operated, a lottery of winning combinations is held inside and reels visible through display windows start rotating. When stop switches are operated, the reels corresponding to the respective stop switches are stopped. In the slot machine, a main control device manages a normal section and an advantageous section. The advantageous section is composed of a chance mode and an informing mode. When a front door is opened, a normal open sound is output if a setting value at that time is one of 1 to 6, and a special open sound is output when a setting value at that time is 7.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 134

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

A slot machine is an example of a gaming machine that rotates and then stops a plurality of reels. In the slot machine, a plurality of symbols are provided on the outer peripheral portion of each reel, and a part of the symbols provided to each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. Then, when the player inserts medals, an effective line is set, and after that, the player operates the start lever to play a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") combination, a small combination, or a small combination inside the slot machine. A lottery for a combination such as a replay is performed and each reel starts to rotate, and by operating a stop switch after each reel starts to rotate, the reels are sequentially stopped and one game ends. When all the reels stop rotating and the combination of the winning combination and the corresponding symbols on the active line stops, the player wins, and the player is given the privilege of paying out medals, the privilege of changing the game state, etc. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

In recent years, as a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the BB state that shifts to when a BB prize is established, an assist that informs the operation order of the stop switch for establishing a predetermined prize when a predetermined winning combination is won. Some have a time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state.

JP-A-2002-355364

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.

The above problem is not limited to the slot machine as exemplified above, but also applies to other game machines that cyclically display a plurality of patterns and then terminate the cyclical display based on the operation of the stop operation means. It is a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.

In the invention according to claim 1, numerical information storage means for storing numerical information; success/failure determination means for performing winning/failure determination with a winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means; A gaming machine comprising privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on winning, wherein when a specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed, and the specific operation is performed. a first specifying operation for setting the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to a changeable state, a second specifying operation for selecting numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and the changeable state; and a third specifying operation for ending the third specifying operation. detecting that a first non-operation signal indicating that the operation means is not operated is switched to a first operation signal indicating that the first operation means has been operated; After detecting that the signal has been switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal, a signal from the second detection means for detecting whether or not the second operation means is operated is detected as the second operation means being operated. and detecting that the second operation signal indicating that the second operation means has been switched to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not operated.

It is possible to improve the game interest.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to one embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is closed; 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. Rear view of the front door. The front view of a housing|casing. The figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through a display window; Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. A block diagram of a slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing; The flowchart which shows a lottery process. The figure which shows an example of the lottery table in a three-card game. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a two-card game. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; Flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing rotation start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 6 is a flowchart showing migration preparation processing; Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game section. 4 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in a normal section; A flowchart showing a game section process in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode. 6 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing a slide table used in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing a slide table used in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. 9 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing effect determination processing in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing effect execution processing in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process in the display control device; (a) A diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo-game flag storage area in the third embodiment, (b) A diagram showing the configuration of the header. 4 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 3; FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is closed according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing; 4 is a flowchart showing menu processing; 4 is a flowchart showing standby processing; 4 is a flowchart showing start command waiting processing. 4 is a flowchart showing effect determination processing. 10 is a flowchart showing pressing effect processing; 4 is a flowchart showing result display processing; Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode in the fifth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. 4 is a flowchart showing section command processing in the notification mode; 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in the notification mode; 4 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and chance mode; 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in a normal section; 4 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section; 4 is a flowchart showing all reel stop completion command processing in a normal section. 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in chance mode. The figure which shows an example of the display mode displayed on an auxiliary|assistant display part. The figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through a display window; Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. The figure which shows an example of a lottery table. 4 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in a normal section; A flowchart showing a game section process in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. Explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning combination and the navigation rate. 10 is a flowchart showing winning combination information creation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing operation navigation processing; The flowchart which shows promotion determination processing. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. The figure which shows an example of a lottery table. 14 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in a chance mode according to the seventh embodiment; Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode. 4 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in chance mode. The flowchart which shows the lottery result command process in chance mode. 4 is a flowchart showing a confrontation effect process; 4 is a flowchart showing effect determination processing. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. 4 is a flowchart showing first effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second effect determination processing; Flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. 5 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in the notification mode; The flowchart which shows the lottery result command process in alerting|reporting mode. Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game section in the eighth embodiment. Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode. 4 is a flowchart showing navigation counter update processing; The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. 4 is a flowchart showing navigation determination processing; The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. A block diagram relating to an assist effect in the ninth embodiment. (a) A diagram showing a channel configuration, (b) a diagram showing a configuration of a layer for CH4. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the volume of the BGM and the volume of the winning sound. The flowchart which shows production|presentation control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing liquid crystal control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing winning sound instruction processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the output time of winning sound and the volume recovery time of BGM; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM output processing. 4 is a flowchart showing volume value setting processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in volume values in each layer of the CH4 layer; Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the ending movie in 10th Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing ED determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing ED processing; 4 is a flowchart showing error confirmation processing; 4 is a flowchart showing restart processing; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing winning probability setting processing in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a first sensor buffer; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ON edge confirmation processing; 6 is a flowchart showing change end processing; 4 is a flowchart showing setting key OFF waiting processing; 4 is a flowchart showing front door command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change command processing; 4 is a flowchart showing change end command processing. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a series of operations performed when setting the winning probability, the set value, and the notification sound to be notified.

(First embodiment)

An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of, for example, 480 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse). controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=480 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a "cherry" symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), a "bell" symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), and " Red 7" symbol (e.g., 16th on the left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 15th on the left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (e.g., 14th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols, such as the 11th symbol on the left reel 32L) and the "White 7" symbol (eg, the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of 5 combination lines are set so as to connect positions where these 9 symbols can be visually recognized, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in crossing in the diagonal direction. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), as a horizontal combination line, an upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A connecting middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. Further, as a combination line in the diagonal direction, a right-downward line L4 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, and the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M. A rightward rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R is set. Then, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the activated line, as a result of establishment of a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or the game state is shifted. It is designed to grant benefits that

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as the active line. The four combined lines of the upper line L1, the lower line L3, the downward-sloping line L4, and the upward-sloping line L5 are never regarded as valid lines.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination of symbols and a benefit given when winning.

BB1 winning and BB2 winning are examples of state transition winning in which only game state transition is performed.

When the "red 7" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, BB1 wins. When the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the BB2 win is achieved. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state.

A replay win is given as a win with a replay privilege that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals.

When the "replay" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the replay wins.

The small prizes for which medals are paid out include a watermelon prize, a cherry prize, a bell prize, and a compensation prize.

When the "watermelon" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, three medals are paid out as a watermelon winning prize. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a cherry win.

When the "Bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on any combination line, nine medals are paid out as a bell prize. More specifically, in addition to the case where the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the middle line L2, the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the upper line L1. When a combination of different symbols stops on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell prize. Combinations of patterns that look like winning bells include, for example, a combination of a "red 7" pattern, a "star" pattern, and a "star" pattern, and a combination of a "BAR" pattern, a "cherry" pattern, and a "BAR" pattern. be. In addition, although the details of the combination of winning symbols are omitted, one medal is paid out when the compensating combination winning is established.

In the following description, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB2 pattern combination is a combination of BB2 winning patterns, that is, a combination of "Red 7" pattern, "Red 7" pattern and "White 7" pattern. Also, the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to each winning are also called winning symbols. For example, the BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at once, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61, and a payout display section for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning. A number display section 62 is also provided. In addition, a section indicator 66 indicating a game section is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 62 . Although the display units 60 to 62 and section display 66 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, credit insertion detection sensors 56a to 58a for individually detecting the operation of each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting the operation of the settlement switch 59, and a reset detection for detecting the operation of the reset switch 72. Various sensors such as a sensor 72a and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected. The data is output to the CPU 102 via.

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a section display 66, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected to the input/output port 104. connected through

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, and includes a substrate integrated with CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these. After receiving a signal from the main control device 101 , the display control device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. The various display units 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flow charts of FIGS. 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing , a state information storage area 106c for storing game states, and a section information storage area 106d for storing game sections.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36. FIG.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In power failure processing, the value of the stack pointer of CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stepping motors, which are the respective spinning drum drive motors, are driven, and in order to stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding stepping motors are driven. Stepping motor control processing such as applying a brake to the motor is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 9) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S111, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62 and display corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S112, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step S113, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11 .

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not replay winning has been established in the previous game. When the replay winning has been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . That is, when a replay win is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If the replay winning has not been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing. If it has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state, and an abnormality occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed. If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S206. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S207, an effective line setting process for setting the middle line L1 as an effective line is performed, and in step S208, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, lottery processing in step S209, rotation initialization processing in step S210, waiting processing for 4.1 seconds in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, game section processing in step S214, and step S215. BB state processing is executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S209 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance. , which probability of winning the internal process is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 13 is a lottery table selected in the "setting 3" three-card game, and FIG. 14 is a lottery table selected in the "setting 3" two-card game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=5, in step S306, the middle right and left bell winning flags indicating that the bell, the compensation combination 2, and the compensation combination 4 are won are set in the winning flag storage area 106a. do.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 has been won or the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 has been won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is not the corresponding selection flag. It is reset after the game is finished (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in a state where the BB1 winning flag or BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set. Do not set flags. Therefore, for example, if BB2 is won in a two-card game and a three-card game is played with the BB2 winning flag carried over, BB1 is not won.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, in a three-card game, when the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the left and right bell, the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/9.0, and the probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50. The odds of that happening are about 1/12. In the three-card game, the event of winning the one-card role and the event of winning the BB2 do not occur.

In a two-card game, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 14 is used to determine the winning combination, the probability of winning the replay is about 1/7.3, left center right bell, left right center bell, middle left right bell. , The probability of winning the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/16000. The probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50. is about 1/1.9, and the probability of winning BB2 is about 1/4.0. In the two-card game, the event of winning BB1 does not occur.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and section lottery processing relating to the transition of the game section is performed. In step S<b>310 , a lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps the various results performed in the lottery process, specifically, the results of the win/loss determination of the winning combination and the lottery results in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command is transmitted, the lottery process is terminated.

When the lottery process ends, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, rotation initialization process is performed in step S210. The RAM 106 is provided with a motor control storage area for storing information used for drive control of the stepping motor, and the rotation initialization process performs a process of initializing the motor control storage area. In step S211, a 4.1-second elapsed waiting process is performed. In the 4.1-second elapsed waiting process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel started spinning in the previous game. If not, it waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and the 4.1-second elapse waiting process ends. Since the 4.1-second elapsed waiting process is performed, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game (hereinafter also referred to as "this game") in which a privilege such as medal payout is given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops in one game round, a pseudo game is provided. Games may be played. In the following, in order to facilitate understanding, the reel control processing in the case where no pseudo game is performed, that is, when only the main game is performed will be described.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo-game determination process for determining whether or not to perform a pseudo-game is performed. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the process proceeds to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. That is, in the processing in step S607, only the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained, and the drive control of the stepping motor is not performed. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing described above based on the obtained rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the rotation start process, acceleration is started in the order of the left reel 32L→middle reel 32M→right reel 32R.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. If the stop information is not set, the process advances to step S404 to perform stop information setting processing for setting the stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. It should be noted that, in step S404, the stop information for the reel stop control in this game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is only set, and even if a pseudo game is performed, the reel stop in the pseudo game Stop information for control (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-game stop information") is not set. At step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and command transmission processing 1 is performed at step S406.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo-game rotation start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotation in the pseudo-game. In step S702, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game is to be played is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the pseudo-game rotation start command is cleared at step S703, and the rotation start command is set at step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate in this game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo-game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not there is a reel being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. . In subsequent step S409, command transmission processing 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S901. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902 and a stop-permitted command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated at a constant speed in this game by receiving the stop enable command. Further, in step S902, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44, the players are notified that a stop command can be generated in the game. After that, the command transmission process 2 ends.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S410 to perform the stop control process.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S1001. When a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 1009, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is acquired. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1106 and a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 grasps which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command and which reel is to be stopped. Also, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command is issued is extinguished to inform the player that the stop command cannot be issued in the game. In the following step S1107, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S1107, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S1108, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set, and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, stop position determination processing is terminated after performing stop information change processing in step S1110.

Here, the stop information change process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information change process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, when any of the left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, middle-left-right bell, middle-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is won (see FIG. 13), a stop command is issued. Stop information change processing is performed to change the winning mode established by the order of operation of the generated stop switches 42-44.

For example, when the left, middle, and right bells are won, if the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in the operation order, the bell prize is established, so that the stop is made in another operation order. The stop information is changed so that if the switches 42 to 44 are operated, the compensation combination 1 winning prize or the compensation combination 4 winning prize is established. The same applies to the left-right middle bell, middle left-right bell, middle right-left bell, right middle-left bell, and right-left middle bell. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order corresponding to the name of the winning combination, the bell wins. is established, the stop information is changed so that when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the compensation combination winning corresponding to the winning combination is established. In the following description, the left-center-right bell, left-right center-bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell are also collectively referred to as "push order" or "push order bell".

Incidentally, in the slot machine 10, when a replay is won by the stop information setting process and the stop information change process, the replay win is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the correct operation order, the bell prize is established regardless of the operation timing, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the incorrect operation timing, the operation timing is established. Regardless, the compensation role winning prize is established. In the case of winning the one-piece combination, the compensating combination winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the watermelon is won, when the cherry is won, when the BB1 is won, and when the BB2 is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 must be operated aiming at the winning pattern, that is, at a predetermined timing. corresponding prize will be established.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S1008 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the stopping of the reels is not performed in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop pattern number. stop.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012 and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. When all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S1014 to determine whether or not an instruction monitor, which will be described later, is being displayed. If the instruction monitor is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, this process is terminated after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S1016 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, first, a payout determination process is performed. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If the winning has not been established, the payout determination process is terminated as it is, and if the winning has been established, the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. determine whether or not there is When the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the number of payouts corresponding to the condition device are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106, and the payout determination process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is transmitted so that the display control device 81 can grasp the conditional device that won in the current game round.

When the winning result command is transmitted, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay winning has been established based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. When the regame win is not established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when the regame win is established, the regame setting processing is performed and the medal payout processing is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process S204 described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed.

Next, the game section processing of step S214 will be described later, and the BB state processing of step S215 will be described.

In the BB state processing, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the BB state. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is set. If none of the BB winning flags is set, a state command is transmitted to the display control device 81, and the BB state processing ends. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and is set in the state information storage area 106c. Sends the configured flags and the corresponding status commands.

When any of the BB winning flags is set, it is determined whether or not the corresponding BB winning has been established based on the conditions set in the previous payout determination process. When the corresponding BB winning has not been established, a state command is transmitted and the BB state processing is terminated. When the corresponding BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if the BB1 winning has been established, the BB1 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c. When the BB2 winning has been established, the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c. After that, the status command is sent and the BB status processing is terminated.

When the current gaming state is the BB state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining BB game number counter, and it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining BB game number counter has become zero. If the value of the remaining BB game number counter is not 0, the BB state processing is terminated after transmitting the state command. When the value of the remaining BB game number counter becomes 0, it means that the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied, so the BB setting flag is cleared. After that, the status command is sent and the BB status processing is terminated.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the game state becomes the BB state until 30 games are played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only 3-card games are possible, and a compensating combination win is established in which a 1-coin combination is always won and 1 medal is paid out. Therefore, when the player shifts to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player reduces the owned medals by 60 (=(3−1)×30) until the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only a two-card game is possible, and a compensating combination win is established in which a one-coin combination is always won and one medal is paid out. Therefore, when the player shifts to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player reduces the owned medals by 30 (=(2−1)×30) until the BB state ends.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages two types of game states, a normal state and a BB state, and two types of game sections, a normal section and an advantageous section. there is

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the transition of the game section.

A normal section is a game section in which a transition lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous section. In the normal section, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell is won. Therefore, in the normal section, a reduction of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game played in the case of a 2-card game, and approximately 0.91 medals are expected to be lost in the case of a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected. If the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won, the game section shifts to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified when the pressing order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section in that the operation order can be notified. The advantageous section consists of two game modes, a chance mode and a notification mode. When winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. When 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section, and when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. More specifically, the case where the difference number of medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400 is the case where the increased number of medals possessed by the player in the advantageous section reaches 2400 without becoming 0. This is a case in which the number of medals to be owned reaches 2400 from the reference point when the number of possessed medals of the player decreases the most.

The chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the notification mode. The chance mode ends when the transfer lottery is won and when the game is played a predetermined number of times under the chance mode. When the chance mode ends, the system shifts to the notification mode. In the chance mode, similarly to the normal section, when the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. Therefore, in the chance mode, a decrease of about 0.95 medals is expected for each game played in a two-card game, and a decrease of about 0.91 medals is expected in each game played in a three-card game. A decrease in medals is expected.

The notification mode is a game mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 capable of establishing a bell winning prize when winning the bell in the order of pressing is notified in the case of a three-card game. Therefore, in the notification mode, it is expected that about 0.95 medals will be reduced for each game played in the case of a two-card game, while about 3.5 medals will be lost in the case of a three-card game. An increase in the number of medals is expected. The notification mode ends when the number of net increase in medals reaches a predetermined number under the notification mode. When the notification mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the normal section shifts.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 has a game property of increasing owned medals by playing a three-card game in the notification mode.

Various processes performed by the main controller 101 when managing game sections will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 25 and subsequent figures. For easy understanding, various processes performed by the main controller 101 in each game section will be individually described.

First, the processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether or not a winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether or not the winning flag has been set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the event of winning BB2 does not occur in the three-card game. Therefore, when the set winning flag is only the BB2 winning flag, it is determined that the winning flag is not set in the current game, and when the winning flag other than the BB2 winning flag is set. , it is determined that the winning flag has been set in the current game. If the winning flag has been set in the current game, the transition flag is set at step S1304, the section indicator 66 is turned ON at step S1305, and this processing ends. If the current game is a two-card game, if the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag is set but not set in the current game, the processing is terminated as it is. do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery has been won in the current game. In such a case, the advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. At step S1403, the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an advantage flag, and at step S1404, 0 is set to the interval game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In the subsequent step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In step S1407, 0 is set to the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d, and in step S1408, 0 is set to the difference number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, a section command is transmitted in step S1409, and this processing ends. . Here, the section command is various information related to the game section at the end of the game (that is, the game section and game mode of the next game, the number of games played in the advantageous section if it is an advantageous section, and the game played in the game mode number of times, etc.) is transmitted to the display control device 81, and in step S1409, the game interval flag and game mode flag set in the interval information storage area 106d, and the values of various counters. Send an interval command.

As described above, when winning any combination in the three-card game in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode in the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", if the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag are not carried over, a failure occurs only with a probability of about 1/13, and the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag occurs. If the flag is carried over, the deviation will occur only with a probability of about 1/6.4. Therefore, the normal section ends after a few games if three cards are played. It should be noted that when a two-card game is played, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur regardless of whether the winning combination is successful or not.

Next, processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be described.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the chance mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the winning combination is determined in the lottery process (step S309, see FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. Since watermelon and cherry are set as rare combinations in the slot machine 10, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the watermelon winning flag or the cherry winning flag is set. If the rare combination is won, the process advances to step S1503, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, determination is made based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is appropriate. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transfer lottery is won, the process is terminated after setting a transfer flag in step S1505, and if the transfer lottery is not won, the process is terminated as it is without setting the transfer flag. If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare role is not won, the process is terminated as it is without performing the transition lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1601, end determination processing is performed.

In the end determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, 1 is added to the value of the interval game number counter in step S1701, and it is determined whether or not the value of the interval game number counter has reached 1500 in step S1702. . If the value of the section game number counter is not 1500, the process proceeds to step S1706 to determine whether or not a replay win has been established. If the replay win has not been established, the process advances to step S1707 to perform difference number adjustment processing for changing the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference number adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the subtraction result is added to the difference number counter. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more. If the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, the value of the difference number counter is changed to 0, and then the difference number adjustment processing is terminated. End the adjustment process. The reason why the difference number adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is established is that the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in this game is 0, so it is necessary to perform the difference number adjustment process. because there is no

If it is determined in step S1706 that a replay win has been established, and if the difference number adjustment process is performed in step S1707, it is checked in step S1708 whether or not the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400. judge. If the value of the difference number counter is 2400 or less, the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the value of the section game number counter is 1500, or if it is determined that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400 in step S1708, the advantage shown in steps S1703 to S1705 will be determined. Section end processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the advantageous section end processing, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1703, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1704. In step S1705, an initialization process is executed upon completion of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the value of the counter for the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Returning to the description of the game section process, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing has been performed in the end determination processing of step S1601, so the section command is transmitted in step S1610. Afterwards, this processing is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S1604, and it is determined in step S1605 whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. Change the existing game mode flag to a notification flag. In step S1609, 120 is set in the net increase number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. After that, in step S1610, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag has not been set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S1607 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S1610, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S1608, and the process proceeds to step S1609. 120 is set in the net increase number counter. After that, in step S1610, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the current game is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, the interval command is transmitted in step S1610 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

As described above, even if the transition lottery is not won, the chance mode shifts to the notification mode by playing a three-card game corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. A value of 700 is set in the transition game number counter when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, the event that the value of the section game number counter becomes 1500 in the process of determining the end of the game section process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) does not occur if the three-card game is played. In addition, since the expected value of increase/decrease in the number of medals in the chance mode is -0.91 (3-card game) or -0.95 (2-card game), the value of the difference number counter in the end determination process of the game section process does not exceed 2400 (step S1708, see FIG. 21). That is, in the present slot machine 10, when a 3-card game is played, the event of ending the advantageous section in the chance mode and shifting to the normal section does not occur.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the winning combination is determined in the lottery process (step S309, see FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1802 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S1803 to perform an additional lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the addition lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, you will win one of the additional numbers of 30, 50, 100, or 300 with a probability of about 1/5. With a probability of 1, one of the additional numbers of 10, 20, 30, and 50 will be won. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the addition lottery is won, the addition flag is set in step S1805, and the addition command is transmitted in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the add-on lottery and the add-on number to be added to the value of the net increase number counter. In step S1807, the value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the net increase number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the additional lottery, the processing ends without setting the additional flag. If the current game is not the 3-card game but the 2-card game, or if the rare role is not won, this process is terminated without conducting the above-mentioned extra lottery.

Here, specific processing performed in the notification mode in the reel control processing will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S401, pseudo-game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo-game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode in step S501, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is terminated as it is. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the addition flag is set. When the add-on flag is set, that is, when the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and this process ends. If the add-on flag is not set, that is, if the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is performed to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game in step S505. In the pseudo-game lottery, the winning flag that is set, and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the role, the success or failure determination is performed. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery is won, and if the pseudo-game lottery is not won, this processing is terminated as it is. When the pseudo-game lottery is won, a pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the notification mode, the pseudo-game flag is set in the case of winning the additional lottery and the case of winning the pseudo-game lottery, and the pseudo-game is performed in the game round.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In the notification mode, the appearance of the young character walking on the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of remaining payouts until the notification mode ends is displayed on the upper right portion of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In FIG. 31(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is hidden. Then, when the "red 7" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. In addition, it is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 that 100 sheets will be added. When the pseudo-game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), the left reel 32L starts spinning. At this time, the auxiliary display section 65 ends the notification of the pseudo-game, displays the young character walking on the road, and displays that the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184. , and it is notified that the pseudo-game has shifted to the main game.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In FIG. 32(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is hidden. Then, when the "red 7" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R do not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. In addition to the notification, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the additional charge will not be added. When the pseudo-game ends, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the left reel 32L starts spinning. At this time, in the auxiliary display section 65, when the pressing order bell is won, the notification that it is a pseudo game is completed, and the operation order that can establish the bell winning and the remaining payout until the end of the notification mode. It is displayed that the number remains 84, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. When the middle left/right bell is won, the operation order of "213" is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 as shown in FIG. 32(d).

As described above, in the present slot machine 10, when playing a pseudo game, the game progresses in the order of pseudo game→real game in one game round. Therefore, below, the reel control processing in the pseudo-game will be described in order.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S402, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the process proceeds to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. In step S403 of the first time, since the stop information is not set, the process advances to step S404 to perform stop information setting processing for setting the stop information. That is, in the present slot machine 10, the stop information for the present game is set after performing the rotation start processing for the pseudo game, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. Thereafter, in step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S705 and a pseudo-game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process is terminated. Display control device 81, by receiving the pseudo-game rotation start command, to start the auxiliary effect for the pseudo-game shown in FIG. 31 (b) and the like.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not there is a reel being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

Here, the instruction monitor is a display unit that notifies the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell winning, and is managed by the main controller 101 . In the present slot machine 10, the payout number display unit 62 has a function as an instruction monitor. For example, if a bell win can be established, the number-of-payouts display unit 62 displays "1". When the middle, right, left bell is won, "2" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, and when the right, left, middle bell is won, "3" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, When the left and right center bell is won, "4" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, and when the middle left and right bell is won, "5" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, When the right-middle-left bell is won, "6" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. - 特許庁

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the push order bell is won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, this process is terminated as it is without displaying the instruction monitor. That is, in the pseudo-game, even if the winning order of the bell is won, the instruction monitor does not display the operation order that enables the winning of the bell. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, command transmission process 2 is performed in step S409.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S901. When the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S903 and a pseudo-stop-enabled command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 grasps that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated at a constant speed in the pseudo game by receiving the pseudo stop enable command. Further, in step S903, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the respective stop switches 42 to 44, the players are notified that a pseudo stop command can be generated in the pseudo game. After that, the command transmission process 2 ends.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S410 to perform the stop control process.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the cancel operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated in the pseudo game has been operated, that is, whether or not a pseudo stop command has been generated. If a pseudo stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S1001. If a pseudo-stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 1009, and stop position determination processing is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reaching symbol is obtained. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, it proceeds to step S1104 and refers to the pseudo-game stop information. In the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, a slip table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the winning of the additional lottery, and a slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning It is stored, and in step S1104, reference is made to the slide table corresponding to the execution trigger of the pseudo-game. Here, the slide table is a table that defines how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are to be slid (rotated) from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated before the pseudo stop is to be made. In other words, the slide table is capable of deriving the relationship between the arrival symbol that reaches the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually makes a pseudo stop at the base position. stop data group.

FIG. 33 is a slide table referred to in a pseudo-game based on the additional lottery winning. Symbols with numbers having a sliding number of 0 are symbols that actually come to a pseudo stop in the lower row. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated while the 15th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L stops as it is without slipping, and the 16th "red 7 ” The pattern stops in the middle row. In addition, symbols with sliding numbers other than 0 mean that the reels slide as many times as the number of symbols described. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated while the 11th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower stage, the left reel 32L slides by 4 symbols, and the 15th "replay" symbol is displayed. The symbol 16 "red 7" is pseudo-stopped in the middle row as the pseudo-stop is made in the lower row. In this way, in the slide table, the number of slides when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R reach the lower stages are set for each symbol number. In the slide table shown in FIG. 33, regardless of the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is pseudo-stopped in the middle row.

FIG. 34 is a slide table referred to in a pseudo-game based on pseudo-game lottery winning. In this sliding table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle, while the 16th "red 7" symbol of the right reel 32R is displayed. The red 7" symbol will stop at the lower stage instead of the middle stage.

Returning to the description of the stop position determination process, a pseudo stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S1105. By receiving the pseudo-stop command, the display control device 81 grasps which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo-stop command and which reel is to be pseudo-stopped. In addition, in step S1106, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the pseudo stop command is generated, the players are informed that the pseudo stop command cannot be generated in the pseudo game. In step S1107, based on the pseudo-game stop information referred to, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is acquired. After that, in step S1108, the acquired number of slips is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped in the base position is determined. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set, and when the pseudo-game flag is set, the process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012 and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42-44 is being operated, the process stands by. When all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process proceeds to step S1014 to determine whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in the pseudo game, this process is terminated after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S412, and transition preparation processing is performed to shift to the main game.

In the migration preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, an operation waiting timer is set (about 3.0 seconds in this embodiment) in step S1201. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the value of the operation wait timer has reached zero. The subtraction of the value of the operation wait timer is performed in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. If the value of the operation waiting timer has not reached 0, the process returns to step S1202. When it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated in step S1202, and when it is determined that the value of the operation waiting timer has become 0 in step S1203, a flag after the pseudo game is set in step S1204, and this processing exit.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the transition preparation process is completed, the process returns to step S402 to perform the rotation start process.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. As described above, when the pseudo-game is performed, since the post-pseudo-game flag is set in the transition preparation process, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the process proceeds to step S604, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the winning of the bell is displayed on the instruction monitor. Further, in step S604, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation order command, the display control device 81 displays the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the operation order is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 with a slight delay from the timing at which the operation order is displayed on the instruction monitor.

When the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604, and when it is determined in step S603 that the pressing order bell has not been won, the process advances to step S605 to acquire the delay time. The RAM 106 of the main controller 101 is provided with a delay timer for determining the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is pseudo-stopped. A value (ie, a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in the delay timer. The subtraction of the value of the delay timer is performed in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. In step S606, it waits until the value of the delay timer becomes 0, and when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S607 to start accelerating the reels according to the value of the repetition number counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. When the post-pseudo-game flag is set, the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared at step S611, the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared at step S612, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information is set. In step S403 after performing a pseudo game, since the stop information has already been set, a negative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. At step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and command transmission processing 1 is performed at step S406. In the command transmission process 1 after the pseudo game is played, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . Upon receiving the rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effect for this game shown in FIG. 31(d) and the like.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the push order bell is won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning at step S804 is displayed on the instruction monitor, and this process is terminated. Further, in step S804, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. However, after the pseudo-game is performed, since the operation order has already been displayed on the instruction monitor in the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), the display content of the instruction monitor changes by performing the process of step S804. never do. In other words, the process of step S804 can be said to be a process for displaying the instruction monitor in game rounds in which no pseudo-game is performed.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 are the same as those described in the reel control process in this game, so description thereof will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, this process is terminated as it is.

The present slot machine 10 has a configuration in which it is possible to cancel the pseudo game and shift to the main game. Therefore, hereinafter, such a configuration will be specifically described based on the flowchart of FIG. 21 .

When it is determined that the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1003 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is 3, that is, whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the instruction monitor display process described above is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo-game end command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 grasps that the pseudo-game has been canceled by receiving the pseudo-game end command. After that, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007, and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 30 msec in step S1007 is to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary effect for the pseudo-game to the auxiliary effect for the main game.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when the pseudo-game is cancelled.

In the notification mode, the appearance of the young character walking on the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of remaining payouts until the notification mode ends is displayed on the upper right portion of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In FIG. 35(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is hidden. If the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, as shown in FIG. Move to this game. At this time, in the auxiliary display section 65, the notification of the fact that it is a pseudo-game ends without notifying the result of the pseudo-game, whether or not it has been added in more detail, and the appearance of the young character walking on the road. , and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. However, if the additional lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184 and displayed.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation counter is not 3, that is, when at least one reel is pseudo-stopped and a cancel operation is performed, the cancel operation is performed. After setting a cancel operation flag indicating that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to quasi-stop the spinning reels. Thereafter, in step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, it means that the remaining one reel is rotating. Therefore, the process returns to step S1001, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, and the process proceeds to step S1002. . In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag is set. Thereafter, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and stop position determination processing is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. When the value of the reel rotation number counter becomes 0, the processing from step S1011 is performed after clearing the cancel operation flag.

As described above, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the main game is started as it is without quasi-stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is in a pseudo-stop state, the main game is started after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1901, the end determination process described above is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S1901, so the section command was transmitted in step S1908. Afterwards, this processing is terminated.

When the current game section is an advantageous section, in step S1903, a net increase number update process for updating the value of the net increase number counter is performed. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter, and the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is added to the subtraction result. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase number counter has become zero. If the value of the net increase number counter is not 0, the processing ends after transmitting the interval command in step S1908. When the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S1905 to S1907 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S1908 to end this processing. In the advantageous section end processing, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1905, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1906. In step S1907, an initialization process is executed upon completion of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Here, the gaming properties of the slot machine 10 will be described.

In this slot machine 10, a 2-card game and a 3-card game are possible. However, when a two-card game is played in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur even if a winning combination is won. Further, when a two-card game is played in the advantageous section, if the game mode at that time is the notification mode, even if the winning order of the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. If the game mode is the chance mode, the transition lottery is not performed. In addition, in the two-card game, while the mode game number counter that triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, the section game number counter that triggers the transition to the normal section is updated (end determination processing , see FIG. 29). Furthermore, in a two-card game, the probability of winning BB2 is about 1/4.0, and if BB2 wins, it is necessary to reduce the owned medals by 30 over 30 games. Therefore, when the 2-card game and the 3-card game are compared, the 3-card game is more advantageous for the player.

In the 3-card game, BB1 is won with a probability of about 1/12, and when BB1 is won, it is necessary to reduce the owned medals by 60 over 30 games. However, when a three-card game is played with the BB2 win flag carried over, the event of winning BB1 does not occur, and the event of winning BB2 does not occur either. Therefore, playing a three-card game with the BB2 winning flag carried over is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, in the following, the game performance when the 3-card game is played with the BB2 winning flag carried over will be described.

In the normal section, when winning some combination in the 3-card game, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/1.2 that a player wins some role, and a probability of about 1/6.4 is that a player loses. Therefore, the normal section can be completed in one game by playing the three-card game.

When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the chance mode is started and 700 is set as the transition game number (see FIG. 26).

In the chance mode, when a rare role is won, a lottery for transition to the notification mode is performed. When the transfer lottery is won, the chance mode is transferred to the notification mode. Also, even if the transfer lottery is not won, if 700 three-card games are played under the chance mode, the game shifts to the notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see FIG. 28). That is, in the slot machine 10, when the normal section is shifted to the chance mode, 700 times has a function as the so-called peak number of times. The advantageous section ends when 1500 games are played and when the difference number reaches 2400 regardless of the game mode at that time. When the notification mode is entered based on reaching the ceiling 700 times, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 800 times. In the notification mode, since the operation order is always notified when the pressing order bell is won, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 3.5 each time one game is played. Assuming that 800 games can be played in the notification mode, an increase of about 2700 medals can be expected. Therefore, even in the case of shifting to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling, it can be expected that the difference number reaches 2400 and the advantageous section ends before 1500 games are played.

When the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode, 120 is set in the net increase number counter (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. In addition, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the net increase number is to be increased (see FIG. 30). At this time, when winning the extra lottery based on winning the watermelon, any one of 30, 50, 100, 300 is added, and when winning the extra lottery based on the winning of the cherry, 10, 20, 30, 50 is added. is added. Then, when the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the notification mode and the advantageous section are finished and the normal section is started (see FIG. 36).

When winning the extra lottery, a pseudo-game flag is set and a pseudo-game is performed in the game. In the pseudo-game based on the extra lottery win, the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, and the number added to the net increase number counter is notified. In addition, even if the additional lottery is not won, when the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game flag is set, and the pseudo-game is performed in the game. In the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning, the "red 7" pattern of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, while the "red 7" pattern of the right reel 32R is pseudo on the middle line L2. It is notified that the net increase number counter will not be added without stopping. These pseudo-games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 . When the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not pseudo-stopped, and the game proceeds as it is, and at least one When the settlement switch 59 is operated while the reels are quasi-stopped, the main game is started after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are quasi-stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A pseudo game is executed when winning the extra lottery. In the pseudo-game, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, and the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Then, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using reels, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, when the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of the pseudo-game, the pseudo-game can be terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game to suppress the desire to play when the pseudo-game is started. Become.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is terminated as it is without pseudo-stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game cannot be grasped unless the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game. It is possible to encourage

When the pseudo-game is executed, this game is executed after the pseudo-game is finished. With such a configuration, when the pseudo game can be finished as it is without the reels 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stopping, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop at the stage of starting the next game. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of events that are not Further, in such a configuration, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are quasi-stopped or the rotation is restarted. It is possible to proceed to the determination as to whether or not a stop command has been issued, without any delay. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the main game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a state in which at least one reel is quasi-stopped, the quasi-game is terminated after all spinning reels are quasi-stopped. With such a configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop switches 42-44 in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the stop switches 42-44 by operating the settlement switch 59. It is possible to end the pseudo-game without doing.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of the pseudo-game, the subsequent processing is changed depending on the value of the reel rotation counter. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the end mode of the pseudo game according to the situation in which the settlement switch 59 is operated, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest. For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, it is possible to make a configuration in which all rotating reels are always pseudo-stopped. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a concern that the significance of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game will be lost. This concern becomes more conspicuous in the case of a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the result of stopping symbols in a pseudo-game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. However, if the subsequent processing is changed depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concern.

A pseudo-game is performed when winning the extra lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the pseudo-game a game for notifying that the net increase in the number of coins will increase, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the pseudo-game, when the combination of ``red 7'' symbols is quasi-stopped on the middle line L2, it is reported that the net increase number is increased, and the combination of ``red 7'' symbols is not quasi-stopped on the middle line L2. In this case, the configuration is such that the increase in the net increase in the number of sheets is not notified. By adopting such a configuration, the player who wants to receive the notification of the net increase in the number of coins is urged to operate the stop switches 42 to 44, while the player who does not need to receive the notification of the increase in the net increase in the number of coins is made to operate the settlement switch 59. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the stop result of the symbols in the pseudo-game does not directly contribute to the increase in the number of net increase. In this game, you cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts unless you win a prize, but in the pseudo-game, the increase in the number of net additions has already been confirmed by the extra lottery, so the combination of "Red 7" symbols The player will not be disadvantaged even if the ball does not stop on the middle line L2. If the combination of "red 7" symbols does not stop on the medium line L2, it is only not notified that the net increase number will increase. Thus, by making the pseudo-game unrelated to the player's direct profit, it becomes possible to position the pseudo-game as one of the effects in which the player can actively participate, and the operation of the settlement switch 59 This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A pseudo game is performed in the game when winning the extra lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a pseudo-game is played in a game different from the game won in the extra lottery. However, in the case of such a configuration, if the player forgets that the player has won a rare role in the game before the pseudo-game is started, the player recognizes the pseudo-game as a so-called fake. There is a concern that the stop switches 42 to 44 may not be operated aiming at the "Red 7" symbol. In addition, if the player wins the rare role in the final game of the notification mode and ends the notification mode without winning the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the player may have suspicions that the additional lottery itself was not performed. is also of concern. On the other hand, if a pseudo-game is performed in the game won in the extra lottery, the flow of the game becomes pseudo-game → main game, so it is possible to solve the above concerns. be.

A pseudo game is played if the pseudo game lottery is won even if the extra lottery is not won. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the number of net additions and an opportunity not to be notified of an increase in the number of net additions in the pseudo-game, and to improve the game interest. .

When playing a pseudo game, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that one game has ended when the pseudo-game ends. In addition, even if the pseudo-game shifts to the main game without stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the player will not be able to distinguish between the pseudo-game and the main game. It is possible to avoid.

When a pseudo game is performed in a game in which the winning order of the bell is won, the operating order in which the winning of the bell can be established is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the above operation order in the pseudo game. In addition, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped and before acceleration of the pseudo-stopped reels is started, the operation order is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the above-described operation order in this game, and the bell winning cannot be established.

In game rounds in which no pseudo-game is executed, the operation sequence capable of establishing a bell prize is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R reach a constant speed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the above-described operation order in the game different between the game times in which the pseudo-game is executed and the game times in which the pseudo-game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the operation order is notified before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the timing of notification of the operation order in this game is changed depending on whether or not the pseudo game is executed. By doing so, it is possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo-game ends, the delay time is set based on the random numbers obtained for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the acceleration of the reels is started after waiting for the delay time. With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the starting timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when shifting to the main game, and in the pseudo game, the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is on the middle line L2. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, the symbols "red 7" are not aligned. As a result, it is possible to avoid the fact that the stop roll of the pseudo-game will become the eye-pushing assist in the subsequent main game.

When notifying the order of operations that can establish a bell prize, in addition to notifying on the auxiliary display unit 65 controlled by the display control device 81, the instruction monitor controlled by the main controller 101 notifies. and Since it is determined by the main control unit 101 whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated can be determined before informing the operation sequence. It is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event that determines whether

It is configured to determine that the pseudo-game cancel operation is performed when the settlement switch 59 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally performing a cancel operation. For example, when the start lever 41 is operated after the start of the pseudo-game, it is possible to determine that the cancel operation has been performed. However, in the case of such a configuration, when the player repeatedly hits the start lever 41 when generating the start command, the operation of the start lever 41 after the second time is determined to be a cancel operation, and the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo game. This is because an event may occur in which the pseudo-game ends in spite of this.

When the pseudo game is executed, the stop information for the game is set after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the main game as compared with the configuration in which the stop information for the main game is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

The pseudo-game stop information is configured to be set after the pseudo-stop command is generated. With such a configuration, even if the stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo-game, the time required to determine whether or not the pseudo-stop command has occurred in the pseudo-game is shortened. It becomes possible to plan

On the other hand, if the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, there is a possibility that the time between the pseudo-stop command and the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped. can be considered. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo-game based on an additional lottery winning, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is simulated in the middle stage. In the case of a pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning, the 16th "red 7" pattern of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42-44. , the 16th "red 7" pattern of the right reel 32R is stopped not in the middle stage but in the lower stage. In this way, the stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated. Even so, it is possible to suppress the delay in the time from the generation of the pseudo stop command to the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel.

In the pseudo-game, it is configured such that after slipping up to 19 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the pseudo-stop is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time to set the pseudo-game stop information after the pseudo-stop command is generated, and the time to determine the stop position of the reel based on the pseudo-game stop information. Become. Furthermore, in this game, since the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after the stop command is generated, it is difficult to set the stop information after the stop command is generated. It is necessary to set stop information before determining whether or not a command has occurred. On the other hand, in the pseudo-game, since the above restrictions are not provided, it is possible to ensure the above-mentioned time by adopting a configuration that allows a pseudo-stop after slipping up to 19 symbols.

(Second embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, the number of coins to be added is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of coins to be added may be notified in the present game. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S2001, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106. FIG. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. The drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003 to subtract 1 from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S2002. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S2005 to perform stop information setting processing for setting stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S2007, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process advances to step S2009 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor in step S2103, and this processing ends. Further, in step S2103, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2010. Thereafter, stop control processing is performed in step S2011, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been issued, wait until a stop command is issued. When a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 2202, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, in step S2301, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the reference point position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is obtained. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S2303, a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In addition, in step S2303, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been issued, the players are notified that the stop command cannot be issued in the game. In the subsequent step S2304, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S2304, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S2305, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position is determined. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been generated for at least one reel, stop position determination processing is terminated after performing stop information change processing in step S2307. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, if a stop command has been issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S2203 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S2201. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop pattern number. stop.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S2205, and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S2206, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. When all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S2207 to transmit an operation end command to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, this processing is terminated after waiting for 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the addition notification effect for notifying the number of additions will be described.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing performed at the start stage of a game round.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if not received, this processing ends. When a lottery result command is received, it progresses to step S2402 and it is determined whether the present game mode is information mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2404, and a lottery for effect execution is performed. In the effect execution lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the type of the won rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, in the effect execution lottery, if the watermelon is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/10, and if the cherry is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/2. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the lottery for effect execution is won. When the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S2406, and this processing is terminated. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S2407 to determine whether or not the addition command has been received. The add-on command is a command transmitted from the main controller 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is transmitted before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. In such a case, an effect flag is set in step S2406, and this processing ends. If no add-on command has been received, the process ends. When the display control device 81 receives the add-on command, the display control device 81 stores the add-on count indicated by the add-on command in the add-on count counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an effect execution process performed during execution of this game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, the process ends. If the effect flag is set, it means that the additional notification effect is executed, so the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If the stop command has not been received, the system waits until the stop command is received, and if the stop command is received, the value of the stop operation number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set in step S2503. Add 1. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3. If not, in step S2505, a notification sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. and returns to step S2502. When the value of the number-of-stopped-operations counter has reached 3, this process ends after the addition notification process is performed in step S2506.

In the addition notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, it is determined in step S2601 whether or not the addition command has been received, that is, whether or not the addition lottery has been won in the current game round. In the case of the game round in which the additional lottery was won, the CPU waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2602. When the all-reel stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2603 to output a notification sound from the speaker 64 according to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter. After that, in step S2604, it waits until an operation end command is received. When the operation end command is received, the process advances to step S2605 to display on the auxiliary display section 65 the number of additional sheets won in the additional lottery. After that, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the add-on command has not been received, that is, if the add-on lottery has not been won in the current game round, the process proceeds to step S2608 to notify whether or not to output a notification sound. Perform a sound run lottery. In the notification sound execution lottery, the winner is determined based on the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is about one-third. In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the notification sound execution lottery has been won. If the information sound execution lottery is won, the CPU waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2610. When the all-reels stop completion command is received, the process proceeds to step S2611, and the speaker 64 outputs a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter. After that, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this processing ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, and the production flag is cleared in step S2607. End this process.

Here, the action of the additional notification effect will be described.

The addition notification performance is performed when winning the addition lottery and when winning the performance execution lottery.

When the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs the first notification sound (for example, the sound of “do”), and outputs two When a stop command based on the generation of the eye stop command is received, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. Then, when a stop command based on the generation of the third stop command is received, after receiving an all reel stop completion command indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, a third notification is made. After receiving an operation end command indicating that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operating state by outputting a sound (for example, the sound of "mi"), the number of additional sheets won in the additional lottery is subsidized. Displayed on the display unit 65 .

When the display control device 81 has not won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs the first notification sound (for example, the sound of “do”), and outputs two When receiving a stop command based on the generation of the eye stop command, it outputs a second notification sound (for example, a “re” sound). When a stop command based on the generation of the third stop command is received, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position when the notification sound execution lottery is won. After receiving the command, a third notification sound (e.g., "mi" sound) is output, and if the notification sound execution lottery is not won, after receiving the all reel stop completion command, a third notification sound (e.g., " "mi" sound) is not output.

As described above, in the addition notification effect, if the addition lottery is won, the flow is the first notification sound output → the second notification sound output → the third notification sound output → the addition number notification, and the addition lottery is won If not, the flow is first notification sound output→second notification sound output→third notification sound output, or first notification sound output→second notification sound output. Here, the probability of winning the additional lottery is, for example, in the case of setting 3, about 1/5 if the watermelon wins, and about 1/3 if the cherry win. The probability of winning the effect execution lottery is about 1/10 if the watermelon is won, and about 1/2 if the cherry is won. Therefore, in the case of watermelon winning, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification performance is started, the expectation degree of notification of the additional number of coins exceeds 66%. In the case of a cherry winning, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification performance is started, the expectation degree of notification of the additional number of coins is rendered to exceed 40%. Since the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is about 1/3, when the third notification sound output is output, the degree of expectation that the additional number will be notified will be further increased than the above ratio. becomes. Since the third notification sound is output after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, the player continues to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command until he/she feels comfortable. can be terminated after

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the stop control process, when the stop pattern number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, whether or not the next stop command is generated in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. It is configured to determine whether or not With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop switches without waiting for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop switches 42 to 44 is improved, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if it is configured to determine whether or not the next stop command is generated without waiting for the reel to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a situation where the reel is not stopped. New problems such as storage may arise. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol numbers of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined, a waiting process of waiting for 100 msec is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to stop the swinging of the reels while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Certainly, when it is determined that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, before determining whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, that is, step S2203 and It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed between step S2204. However, in the case of such a configuration, as the waiting time in the standby process, not only the time when the swinging of the reel converges, but also the time required until the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel becomes the stop symbol number (that is, reel sliding time) must also be considered. Since the slot machine 10 can slide a maximum of four symbols, it is necessary to secure about 179 msec (=1.49×24×5) as a standby time in addition to the time for the swinging of the reels to converge. If the reels are stopped with the sliding number of 3 symbols or less instead of 4 symbols, the waiting time of about 36 msec (=1.49×24×1) or more becomes useless time, and the game is slowed down. It leads to getting lost. On the other hand, when it is configured to perform standby processing after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns. Become.

A standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after it is determined that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started even in the case of the configuration in which the standby process is performed, and the next game round can be started. It is possible to improve the operability when For example, without providing the process S2206 for determining whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, if the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed after the determination. However, in the case of such a configuration, depending on whether the timing at which the player finishes operating all the stop switches 42 to 44 is after the end of the waiting process or during the waiting process. , the time required until the next game round can be started will change. Then, if the time required until the next game round can be started changes, even if the player performs a medal insertion operation to start the next game round, an event occurs in which the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability at the time of starting the next game round is lowered.

A standby process of waiting for 100 msec is configured to be performed before the medal payout process is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which a privilege such as medal payout is awarded in a situation where the swinging of the reels has not stopped. Furthermore, by performing the standby process before the payout determination process performed in the medal payout process, the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process is increased while suppressing the processing configuration from becoming complicated. becomes possible. For example, if it is determined in the payout determination process that a minor winning combination has been established, the waiting process is not performed or waits for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, and if a minor winning combination has been established in the payout determination process. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed to wait for a predetermined period of time when it is determined that the device is not ready. With such a configuration, the waiting time changes depending on the presence or absence of payout of medals, etc., so it is possible to suppress the delay until the next game cycle can be started. However, such a configuration complicates the processing configuration, and when the above processing program is applied to other slot machines in which the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small winning combination is different, it is necessary to appropriately change the processing time. This is because the versatility is reduced due to the occurrence of such problems.

A push order bell is provided as a lottery role, and a stop command can be generated continuously without waiting for the reels to stop, in a configuration that is advantageous to the player when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the notified operation order. It was configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally making a mistake in the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. That is, in a structure in which it is advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the player may unintentionally make a mistake in the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 . Such an event occurs when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, but, for example, the stop switch to be operated second in a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop command is not stopped. This is because the stop switch operated thirdly is determined to be the second stop command operation without validating the operation.

If the operation order is being displayed on the instruction monitor, the standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after the operation order is hidden. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the waiting process while promptly ending the notification of the operation order by the instruction monitor. This is because the waiting time in the standby process can be shortened by the time required for the processes in steps S2208 and S2209.

In the case of determining whether or not the next stop command is generated without waiting for the reel to stop, for example, while the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, for example, the second stop New problems may occur, such as the reel corresponding to the command not being stopped, or the operation of at least one stop switch not being completed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Then, when the above-described problem occurs, a problem arises in the control performed on the display control device 81 side. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are determined on the side of the main controller 101, the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. In addition to determining whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. Then, when the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81, and all the stop switches 42 to 44 are is in an unoperated state, an operation end command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . With such a configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control according to the stoppage of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can issue the operation end command. By receiving this information, it becomes possible to perform control according to the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42-44. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The main controller 101 is configured to transmit the operation end command after transmitting the all reel stop completion command. With such a configuration, the display control device 81 performs control according to the stoppage of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and then responds to the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to control. Furthermore, the maximum time required from the determination of the stop position of the reel for which the stop command is generated until the reel actually reaches the stop position is about 179 msec, which is about 179 msec at the maximum due to the slip of four symbols. I can grasp it. On the other hand, the time required until all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main controller 101 side. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the operation end command is transmitted after the all reels stop completion command is transmitted, for example, the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the display control device 81 output the all reels stop completion command. It is possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on reception and the timing.

When it is determined that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated before determining whether or not It is configured to transmit a reel stop completion command. By adopting such a configuration, the difference between the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the reception of the all reel stop completion command is reduced. becomes possible. Further, when it is determined that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, an operation end command is transmitted before determining whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference between the timing when all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the reception of the operation end command. becomes possible.

The additional notification effect progresses when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and when the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the display control device displays the additional notification effect. 81 is controlled. In such a configuration, depending on which of the stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 occurs first, the details of the effects prepared with great effort are determined. There is concern about the possibility that one cannot be executed. In order to eliminate such concern, for example, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or when all the stop switches 42 to 44 are completely operated, a third notification sound is generated. is output, and an additional notification is executed when the other occurs. However, in such a configuration, the command type received from the main controller 101 does not correspond to the processing content to be executed, so the processing configuration related to the additional notification effect becomes complicated and the storage capacity increases. A new problem may arise.

On the other hand, from the main control device 101, an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position is transmitted, and it indicates that the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended. By transmitting the operation end command, the display control device 81 can recognize that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all reels stop completion command, and can receive the operation end command. , it can be grasped that the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed. Further, since the main control device 101 transmits the operation end command after transmitting the all reels stop completion command, the display control device 81 controls to output the third notification sound based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command. Then, based on the subsequent reception of the operation end command, control may be performed to execute the additional notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

In the additional notification effect, the third notification sound is output from the speaker 64 based on the reception of the all-reels stop completion command, and the additional notification is executed by the auxiliary display part 65 based on the reception of the operation end command. In this way, by making the device for executing the effect based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command and the device for executing the effect based on the reception of the operation end command different, the all reels stop completion command is received until the operation end command is received is short, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound.

(Third Embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 20, a command for pseudo-game and a command for this game are separately prepared, and a command according to the presence or absence of a pseudo-game flag is displayed by the display control device 81. Although it was configured to send to, this configuration will be changed. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-game flag storage area provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. FIG. The pseudo-game flag storage area consists of 1 byte. In each bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area, the highest 7th bit and the 5th to 0th bits are blank, and the 6th bit has a function as a pseudo-game flag storage bit. . When the main control device 101 sets the pseudo-game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "1", and the pseudo-game flag is cleared (step S611, 17 or step S1004, see FIG. 21), "0" is set to the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area. Therefore, when each bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is arranged from the upper side and the numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number is converted into a hexadecimal number, it becomes 40H (01000000) when the pseudo-game flag is set, When the pseudo-game flag is not set, it becomes 00H (00000000).

Next, command transmission processing 1 in this embodiment will be described. The command transmission process 1 is a process (step S406, see FIG. 15) performed in the reel control process, and is a process of transmitting a rotation start command or a pseudo game rotation start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701.

Here, the structure of the command will be briefly explained. A command is composed of a header indicating the command type, a body indicating specific contents, and a footer indicating the last information of the command. The header consists of 1 byte, as shown in FIG. 44(b). The function of each bit of the header is as follows. The 7th bit, which is the most significant, has a function as a header identification bit and always stores "1". The 6th bit has a function as a pseudo-game identification bit indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game, the 5th bit is blank, and the 4th to 0th bits indicate the command type. It has a function as a command type storage bit. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, ie, 10000110, and is pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 .

When the rotation start header information is obtained in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702, and pseudo-game determination information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area also has a function as pseudo-game determination information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., if it is during the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S2702 becomes C6H (11000110), and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if it is during the main game , the addition result in step S2702 is 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2705, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this process ends. It should be noted that, in the command transmission process 1, since the body information is not set to the rotation start command (pseudo-game rotation start command), the header and footer indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo-game rotation start command) It is transmitted to the display control device 81 .

Next, command transmission processing 2 in this embodiment will be described. The command transmission process 2 is a process (step S409, see FIG. 15) performed in the reel control process, and is a process of transmitting a stop enable command or a pseudo stop enable command to the display control device 81. FIG.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, stop enable header information is acquired in step S2801. The stop-enabled header information is 87H, ie, 10000111, and is pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 . In step S2802, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to 87H, which is the stop-enabled header information. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., if it is during the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S2802 becomes C7H (11000111), and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if the game is in progress , the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2805, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this process ends. In the command transmission process 2, since body information is not set in the stop-allowed command (pseudo-stop-allowed command), the header and footer indicating the stop-allowed command (pseudo-stop-allowed command) are displayed. Send to device 81 .

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1103, and the pseudo-stop command or stop command is sent to the display control device 81 according to the determination result. sent (see FIG. 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, although it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S2903, regardless of the determination result, the pseudo stop command or stop command in step S2905 Command transmission processing 3 is performed for transmission.

In command transmission processing 3, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, stop header information is acquired in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, ie, 10001000, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 in advance. In step S3002, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to 88H, which is stop header information. As a result, when the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., when it is in the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S3002 becomes C8H (11001000), and when the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., in the case of this game , the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this processing ends. In command transmission processing 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel on which the stop command or pseudo stop command is generated is transmitted as the body information. More specifically, when the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as the body information, and when the reel is the middle reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as the body information, and the reel is the right reel 32R. In this case, 03H is transmitted as body information. These body information are pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 . As a result of the above, in the command transmission process 3, as a stop command (pseudo stop command), a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating a stop reel (pseudo stop reel), and a footer. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Different commands are sent in the case of a pseudo game and in the case of a real game. With such a configuration, it is possible for the display control device 81 to grasp which one is the pseudo game or the main game.

As a result of the above, the display control device 81 can be made to perform control such as a pseudo-game and an auxiliary performance corresponding to the main game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, if the command to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game and the command to be transmitted in the case of the main game are stored in the ROM 105 in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. It will be done. In addition, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-game when sending a command, there is a concern that the processing configuration will become complicated in addition to the increase in the amount of data accompanying the addition of the determination process. It will happen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the command transmission process 1 or the like, by adding the header information such as the rotation start header information and the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area, it is transmitted to the display control device 81 It was configured to create a header that By adopting such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. Further, in such a configuration, since the generated header includes whether or not it is a pseudo-game, the process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo-game becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

The header contains information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 . That is, as a configuration for the display control device 81 to grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game, it is possible to transmit 00H or 40H in the body instead of the header instead of performing the calculation as in this embodiment. is. However, in such a configuration, since the command to be transmitted increases by 1 byte, the command becomes redundant.

A header identification bit, a pseudo-game identification bit, and a command type storage bit are provided in the header, and the header can be accommodated in one byte. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to allow the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header while suppressing command redundancy.

In the header, the pseudo-game identification bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game in a bit that was previously unused, and a command to be sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 becomes redundant. In addition, by adding the pseudo-game determination information to create the header information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not the header is a pseudo-game without changing the conventional header structure. becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the development man-hours of the slot machine 10 .

The pseudo-game flag storage area is composed of 1 byte, which is the same byte as the header, and the bits other than the 6th bit are blank. With such a configuration, when adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, it is possible to avoid changing the value of other bits such as the command type storage bit.

It is configured to create a header using the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area. With this configuration, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area has a function as information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and a function as information used when creating a header. and can be given. As a result, since it is not necessary to provide a storage area for storing the pseudo-game determination information in the RAM 106, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo game is performed, but the configuration may be such that only the main game is performed without performing the pseudo game. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to this embodiment.

A production switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45 . The effect switch 67 is operated when a pressing effect, which will be described later, is executed, and when a menu screen is called up in a situation in which no game is being played, and the character "PUSH" is displayed on its upper surface. ing. The selection switch 68 is composed of four switches, ie, an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch for designating up, down, left, and right directions. manipulated. The production switch 67 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are arranged as shown in FIG. , is connected to the display control device 81 .

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S3101, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106. FIG. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. The drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

If the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103 to subtract 1 from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S3102. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S3105 to perform stop information setting processing for setting stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S3107, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In step S3108, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process advances to step S3109 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, it is determined in step S3201 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S3202 to determine whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor in step S3203, and this processing is terminated. Further, in step S3203, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3110. Thereafter, stop control processing is performed in step S3111, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, wait until a stop command is issued. When a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 3302, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is obtained. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S3403, a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In addition, in step S3403, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command is issued, the players are informed that the stop command cannot be issued in the game. In the following step S3404, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S3404, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S3405, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position is determined. In step S3406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been generated for at least one reel, stop information change processing is performed in step S3407, and then stop position determination processing is terminated. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, if a stop command has been issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S3303 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S3301 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop pattern number. stop.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S3305, and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S3306, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. If all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S3307 to transmit an operation end command to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the processing ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Next, among various types of processing performed by the display control device 81, processing related to the present invention will be described. Briefly describing the processing configuration of the display control device 81, the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. The timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is performed approximately every 10 msec. The display control device 81 also receives various commands such as a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 to grasp the progress of the game and the like, and starts corresponding processing.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not an operation end command has been received, and if an operation end command has not been received, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation end command is received, it means that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 have not been operated, that is, the operation of issuing the stop command to all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended. do. In such a case, the process advances to step S3502 to set 18000 to the standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 . Note that the value of the standby timer is decremented by one in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing. The start waiting process is a process performed in the main process, and is executed based on the reception of the operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set. If the production flag is not set, the process advances to step S3603 to determine whether or not the production switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S3604, and it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting timer has become zero. If the standby timer value is not 0, the process advances to step S3605 to determine whether or not the number of bets is 0. Although detailed description is omitted, the main controller 101 sends a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control device 81 in the medal insertion process performed when medals are inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated. send to. The display control device 81 determines whether or not the bet number is 0 based on the bet number indicated by the received bet number command or the bet number command is not received. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, selection menu execution processing is performed. In this slot machine 10, game history, payout table, sound volume adjustment, game history clear, and menu end are displayed on the menu screen as selection menus. In the selection menu execution processing, when the selection switch 68 is operated, processing is performed to highlight the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68, and when the effect switch 67 is operated, the highlighted selection menu is displayed. Do what you want to do. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated in a situation where the end of the menu has been selected, that is, whether or not the end operation of the menu has been performed. If the menu end operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S3704 to determine whether or not the number of bets is zero. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3702 to continue the selection menu execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that the menu termination operation has been performed, menu termination processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and the like displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 are hidden and the normal screen is displayed. In the subsequent step S3706, 18000 is set to the standby timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. If it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, it means that the player has performed an operation (betting medals or virtual medals) to start the next game round while the menu screen or the like is being displayed. . In such a case, the process advances to step S3707 to perform the above-described menu end processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of a start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the standby timer has become 0, standby processing is performed in step S3607.

In the waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, a customer waiting effect is started in step S3801. In the customer waiting effect, a predetermined demo movie (attract effect) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In place of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the power saving mode is in progress while shifting to the power saving mode. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65 is lowered and the power saving mode is entered without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the production switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 is not operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the number of bets is 0, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. When it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3804, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3805. After that, the process moves to step S3701 of menu processing. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3806, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3807. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of a start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process, when it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, a start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start instruction waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not a start instruction command has been received. The start instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and is transmitted when it is determined that the start instruction is generated in step S206 (see FIG. 11) of the normal processing. be done. If the start instruction command has not been received, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the number of bets is 0, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, the standby timer is set to 18000 in step S3903, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. A representative example of a situation in which the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when the player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that the start instruction command has been received, it means that the game round has started, so that the process proceeds to step S3904 during game processing. Although the detailed explanation of the in-game processing is omitted, in the in-game processing, for example, when the pressing order bell is won in the notification mode, the operation order that can establish the bell prize is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. etc. are processed.

As described above, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated while the game is not being played, and when the value of the standby timer becomes 0, Start waiting for customers.

In this slot machine 10, when an additional lottery is won in an information mode, the number of additional coins is notified by performing a depressing performance for the player to operate the performance switch 67 after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. Therefore, the processing performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a pressing effect will be described below.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing performed in the above-described in-game processing. The effect determination process is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if not received, this processing ends. When a lottery result command is received, it progresses to step S4002 and it is determined whether the present game mode is information mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination is not won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the rare combination is won, the process advances to step S4004 to perform a lottery for effect execution. In the effect execution lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the type of the won rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, in the effect execution lottery, if the watermelon is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/10, and if the cherry is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/2. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not the lottery for effect execution is won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S4006, and this process is terminated. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4007, and it is determined whether or not the addition command has been received. The add-on command is a command transmitted from the main controller 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is transmitted before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. In such a case, an effect flag is set in step S4006, and this processing ends. If no add-on command has been received, the processing ends. When the display control device 81 receives the add-on command, the display control device 81 stores the add-on count indicated by the add-on command in the add-on count counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

When all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 transmits an operation end command to the display control device 81 .

When the operation end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the effect flag is set in step S3303 of the operation end command process shown in FIG. 55, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the effect switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and pressing display for prompting the player to operate the effect switch 67 is started. In the following step S3305, 1000 is set to the first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. Note that the value of the first timer is decremented by one in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. If the first timer is set to 1000, the operation end command process is terminated.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, when the effect flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 and the pressing effect process is performed in step S3602.

In the pressing effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, it is determined at step S4101 whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 is operated, the process proceeds to step S4102 to set the result flag. Here, the result flag is a flag for starting the display of the result of informing the number of extra coins if winning the extra lottery and notifying that the extra lottery will not be won if the winning the extra lottery is not won.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing result display processing performed in timer interrupt processing of the display control device 81 .

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, the result flag is cleared in step S4202, and the display flag is set in step S4203. In step S4204, the display counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. The ROM of the display control device 81 stores in advance the result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery is not won. there is The result display image data consists of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200. In step S4205, the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is The associated image data is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . When the image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S4206 to determine whether or not the on-display flag has been set. If neither the result flag nor the display flag are set, it means that the result is not being displayed, so the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the display flag is set, it means that the result display is being executed. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter has reached 200. If the value of the display counter has not reached 200, the processing ends. When the value of the display counter reaches 200, it means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, that is, the result display has been executed to the end. , a completion flag is set in step S4211. In step S4212, 300 is set to the second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. Note that the value of the second timer is decremented by one in the timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer becomes 0 after approximately 3 seconds. If the second timer is set to 300, the result display process is terminated.

As described above, when the result flag is set in the pressing effect process, the result display process is activated in the timer interrupt process at approximately 10 msec intervals, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. It should be noted that when the result display is executed to the end, the auxiliary display section 65 continues to display the final image data of the result display image data until the transition to any of the above-described menu processing, standby processing, and start command waiting processing. is displayed (see FIG. 56).

Returning to the description of the pressing effect processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer has become 0. If the value of the first timer has not become 0, the value of the first timer is set to 0. Wait until When the value of the first timer becomes 0, it means that about 10 seconds have passed since the pressing display was started. In such a case, the process advances to step S4104 to determine whether or not the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is set, it means that the result display has been executed to the end. Therefore, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing is executed. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag has not been set, it means that the result is being displayed, so the process proceeds to step S4107 and waits until the value of the second timer becomes zero. More specifically, in step S4107, the value of the display counter is 20 and the value of the second timer becomes zero. When the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing ends.

Here, a specific description will be given of the subsequent flow when the pressing display is performed.

When the pressing display is performed, the pressing display is continued on the auxiliary display section 65 until the production switch 67 is operated. Then, when the effect switch 67 is operated in the state where the pressing display is being performed, the result display is started. It takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end.

Here, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds from the start of the pressed display, the final display of the result will be completed within about 10 seconds from the start of the pressed display. can run up to Therefore, in such a case, since the completion flag is also set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, the pressing effect process is terminated immediately and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. Become. At this time, the value of the second timer is not referenced. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds from the start of the pressed display, the menu screen is displayed after about 10 seconds from the start of the pressed display. The operation of the effect switch 67 (hereinafter also referred to as "menu start operation") becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds to about 10 seconds after the start of the press display, the timing is about 10 seconds after the start of the press display in the middle of the result display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and after the value of the second timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting processing. It will be done. That is, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds to about 10 seconds after the start of the pressing display, the effect switch 67 is pressed after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display was completed. After about 5 seconds have passed since the operation, the menu start operation becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated after about 10 seconds or more have passed since the start of the pressing display, the completion flag will not be set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0 (result display is not started), the result display is executed to the end, and after the value of the second timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. That is, if the production switch 67 is operated after about 10 seconds or more have passed since the start of the pressing display, the production switch 67 will be operated after 3 seconds have passed since the result display has been executed to the end. After about 5 seconds have elapsed from , the menu entry operation becomes effective.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a conventional slot machine, menu processing is not executed after a game in which an auxiliary effect progressing triggered by the operation of the effect switch, such as the above-described pressing effect, is executed, that is, the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. there was something In such a configuration, when a menu screen is desired to be displayed, it is necessary to continue the game until a game in which the pressing effect is not executed occurs, which causes the player to feel frustrated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the menu processing is executed even after the game in which the pressing effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances that the menu screen can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the press display is started, the menu start operation is enabled when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the menu starts when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, becomes 0. The configuration is such that there is a case where the operation is valid. With such a configuration, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective can be changed according to the start timing of result display, that is, the operation timing of the effect switch 67 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated when the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch 67 is operated.

Certainly, the configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after the game in which the pressing effect is executed can be configured to enable the menu start operation after a certain period of time, such as 3 seconds, has elapsed after the result display has been executed to the end, for example. is. However, with such a configuration, it is conceivable that the player would be irritated by having to wait three seconds. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to configure the menu start operation to be effective immediately after the result display is completed to the end. A new problem arises in that there is an opportunity for the screen to be displayed. When the result display is executed to the end, when the player operates the effect switch 67 again in anticipation of further development of the effect such as the so-called reversal effect, the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 are switched from the pressing effect to the menu screen. This is because

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, unless the effect switch 67 is operated at the timing of about 8 seconds after the pressing display is started, the result A grace period can be provided from the time the display is completed to the time the menu start operation becomes effective. Due to the presence of such grace time, it is possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a timing unintended by the player. This may lead to the player's frustration that he or she must wait for the grace period, but the length of the grace period changes depending on the operation timing of the effect switch 67 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to operate the effect switch 67 while having an inquisitive mind, such as whether the menu start operation is already effective this time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration.

As a result, the slot machine 10 can preferably solve the above concerns, and reduces the chances of the player feeling frustrated when the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch 67 is operated. It becomes possible to

When the value of the first timer becomes 0, if the completion flag indicating that the result display has been executed to the end is set, the menu start operation is enabled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the menu start operation from becoming effective during the result display.

The configuration is such that 1000 is set to the value of the first timer. When the press display is started, the time required from the time when the player recognizes the press display to the time when the effect switch 67 is actually operated is 5 seconds, even if the operation is performed while hoping that the number of additional coins will be notified. It is assumed that it is common to fit within Since it takes about 2 seconds to display the result to the end, by setting the value of the first timer to 1000, there is an opportunity to display the menu screen at a timing not intended by the player. can be reduced. Further, in such a configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated before about 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the pressing display, the menu start operation becomes effective after about 10 seconds. While prompting the user to operate , it is possible to reduce the chance that the time between the pressing display and the result display will be delayed.

The configuration is such that 300 is set to the value of the second timer. If the result display is not executed to the end at the timing when about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the pressing display, it is possible that the player has not operated the effect switch 67 due to leaving the seat or the like. In such a case, the menu screen is displayed at a timing not intended by the player by configuring the menu start operation to be effective after about 3 seconds have passed since the result display is executed to the end. can be reduced.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the notification mode is terminated based on the number of net increases, but the notification mode may be terminated based on the number of games played. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

First, processing performed by main controller 101 will be described.

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the normal section is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the normal section, when winning some combination in the 3-card game, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/1.2 that a player wins some role, and a probability of about 1/6.4 is that a player loses. Therefore, the normal section can be completed in one game by playing the three-card game. When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the chance mode is started, and 700 is set as the transition game number (see FIG. 26).

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the chance mode differs from that of the first embodiment in the game section processing.

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4301, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S4301, so the section command was transmitted in step S4311. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a 3-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4304, and it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set in step S4305. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. Change the existing game mode flag to a notification flag. In the following step S4309, 50 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S4310, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S4311, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S4307 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the transition game number counter value, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, 50 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S4310, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S4311, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4303 that the current game is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, the interval command is transmitted in step S4311 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S4403 to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win watermelon, you will win any of the additional games 50, 100, or 300 with a probability of about 1/5, and if you win cherry, you will win about 1/3. 50 additional games will be won with a probability of . In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is won, the process advances to step S4405 to perform a post-notification lottery as to whether or not the number of games to be added is to be notified in a game after the current game. In the post-notification lottery, the success/failure determination is performed based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success/failure of the combination. If the post-notification lottery is not won, an add-on flag is set in step S4407, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S4408. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the add-on lottery and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the number-of-transfer-games counter. In step S4409, the value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the post-notification lottery is won, the post-notification command is transmitted at step S4410 without setting the addition flag. Here, the post-notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the post-notification lottery and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the counter for the number of transition games. . In step S4409, the value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the additional lottery, the processing is terminated as it is. Also, if the current game is not the 3-coin game but the 2-coin game, or if the rare combination is not won, this process is terminated without performing the above-mentioned extra lottery.

As described above, when winning the addition lottery, the addition command or the post-notification command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . When the add-on flag is set and the add-on command is transmitted, the number of add-on games is reported in the pseudo game as described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). Further, when the post-notification command is transmitted without setting the add-on command, the number of add-on games is notified in the resurrection effect to be described later. In addition, when the pseudo-game lottery is won in the situation where the post-notification command is transmitted (see FIG. 16), the number of additional games is notified by the resurrection effect instead of the pseudo-game.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S4501, so the section command was transmitted in step S4508. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4503, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S4504. Determine whether or not When the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S4508 to end this processing. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S4505, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S4506. In step S4507, an initialization process is executed upon completion of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S4509 to determine whether or not the finish flag is set. If the finish flag is not set, it is determined in step S4510 whether or not the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50. The number of remaining games in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process advances to step S4511 to determine whether or not the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. When the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, a completion flag is set at step S4512, and 1500 is set to the transition game number counter at step S4513. When 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section, and when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. Therefore, when the transition game number counter is set to 1500 under the condition that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous section and the notification mode are terminated when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400. It will happen. In step S 4514 , a finish command is transmitted to the display control device 81 to indicate that the end of the race is confirmed with the number of difference 2400 . After that, in step S4508, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

When it is determined in step S4509 that the finish flag is set, when it is determined in step S4510 that the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 50 or less, and in step S4511 the value of the difference number counter is 2200 or less. If it is determined that the interval command is transmitted in step S4508, the process ends.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effects on the auxiliary display section 65 when the notification mode (advantageous section) passes through the normal section to the chance mode (advantageous section). Therefore, hereinafter, various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be described in line with the flow of the game.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing section command processing in the notification mode. The section command process is a process that is started when a section command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started after the game ends.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game interval storage area for storing information on the game interval indicated by the interval command. The game interval storage area is composed of a first area for storing information indicated by the interval command received in the current game and a second area for storing information indicated by the interval command received in the previous game. In step S4601, when information indicating the chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating the notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. do. In step S4602, a start flag is set. At step S4603, the display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and at step S4604, the post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. After that, in step S4605, shift notification processing is performed, and this processing ends. By performing the shift notification process, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode will start from the next game and that the number of games that can be played under the notification mode is 50 games. There is and is displayed.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing start command processing in the notification mode. When determining that a start command has been issued (step S206, see FIG. 11), main controller 101 transmits a start command to display control device 81 . The start command process is a process that is activated when a start command transmitted from main controller 101 is received, and is activated at the start of the game.

In step S4701, it is determined whether or not the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, it means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By carrying out such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, as shown in FIG. be done. Although detailed description is omitted, the control for informing the operating order when the winning order of pressing the bell is won is performed in the lottery result command process started when the lottery result command is received (step S310, FIG. 12). reference).

Next, the processing performed by the display control device 81 when the finish command is not received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 to receive a finish command. determine whether or not If the completion command has not been received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the displayed game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1 in step S4611. If the value of the display game number counter is not 1, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not the value of the display game number counter is 0, and if the value of the display game number counter is not 0. , the processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the display game number counter has become 1, it means that the next game will be the last game in the notification mode at least in the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, an end flag is set in step S4612, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the display game number counter has become 0, it means that the post-notification lottery has been won in any of the games until the value of the display game number counter becomes 0. do. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode ends, the main controller 101 transmits not the section command indicating the notification mode but the section command indicating the normal section (see FIG. 65). In such a case, the revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the post-notification game number counter is set in the display game number counter in step S4615. When a post-notification command indicating that the player has won the post-notification lottery is received, the number of additional games indicated by the post-notification command is added to the post-notification game number counter. Thereafter, in step S4616, the post-notification game number counter is set to 0, and this processing ends.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is checked in step S4704 if the end flag is set. judge. If the end flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S4707 to determine whether or not the revival flag has been set. If the revival flag is not set, the process advances to step S4710 to determine whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the display game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4712, and this process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of remaining games with a subtraction of 1 each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game will be the last game in the notification mode at least in the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In such a case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4706, and this process ends. By carrying out such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, as shown in FIG. is displayed. The lottery result command is received after the start command is received, but when the lottery result command indicating that the winning order of the bell is won is received, in addition to the display of the end screen, the bell prize is established. The order of operations that can be performed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . For example, when receiving a lottery result command indicating that the middle left and right bells have been won, as shown in FIG. The operation order of “213” is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag has been set, it means that the post-notification lottery has been won, that is, there is an unannounced number of additional games. In such a case, the resurrection flag is cleared in step S4708, resurrection effect processing is performed in step S4709, and this processing ends. By performing the revival effect processing, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed, and then the normal screen in the notification mode shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, when the completion command is not received in the notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of the game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display section 65 becomes 0. Then, when the post-notification lottery is won, the revival performance is performed at the start of the next game after the end screen is displayed to notify the continuation of the notification mode.

Next, processing performed by the display control device 81 when a finish command is received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 to receive a finish command. determine whether or not When the finish command is received, it means that the end of the race with the difference number of 2400 is confirmed. In such a case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and 1500 is set in the display game number counter in step S4608. After that, in step S4609, ending notification processing is performed, and this processing ends. By performing the ending notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the ending video will start from the next game.

In the section command processing in the game after the completion command is received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined whether or not the value of the display game number counter has become 1 in step S4611. do. As described above, in the section command processing when the finish command is received, 1500 is set in the displayed game number counter in step S4608. Therefore, it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter is not 1 in the section command processing in the game after the completion command is received. For the same reason, in step S4613 proceeding from step S4611, it is determined that the value of the display game number counter is not 0, and this processing is terminated.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in step S4710. If the ending flag is set, the ending execution process is performed in step S4711, and then this process ends. In the ending execution process, a process of displaying a predetermined ending image on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed.

As described above, when it is confirmed that the notification mode ends with the difference number of 2400, a predetermined ending image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the next game until the notification mode and the advantageous section are finished.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when the notification mode is shifted to the normal section will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the notification mode is stored in the second area of the game interval storage area and the information indicating the normal interval is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the normal section, the process advances to step S4802 to set the continuous game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 to 1. After that, this process is terminated. If the current game is not a transition game to the normal section, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in step S4803, and this processing ends.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, it means that a predetermined ending image has been displayed in the notification mode. In such a case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4903. After that, a continuation flag is set in step S4904, and this processing ends. By performing the above process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode is terminated and the number of won medals at the time of termination of the notification mode.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag has not been set, the process advances to step S4905 to determine whether or not the continuation flag has been set. If the continuation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4907 after setting the continuation flag in step S4906.If the continuation flag is set, the process proceeds directly to step S4907. In step S4907, processing for continuously displaying the end screen is performed. After that, this process is terminated. Note that in step S4907, processing for changing and displaying the number of medals obtained is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends with the number of difference 2400, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the first game of the normal section until the end of the normal section. When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, an end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 from the last game in the notification mode until the normal section ends.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. The lottery result command process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not any combination has been won in the current game. If any winning combination is won in this game, it means that the lottery for transition to the chance mode has been won, ie, the transition to the chance mode will be made from the next game, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if no hand has been won in the current game, that is, if the normal section continues in the next game, the flow advances to step S5002 to determine whether or not the value of the continued game number counter is smaller than 6. . If the value of the continuous game number counter is smaller than 6, a suggestive jewel selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggestive jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting state of the slot machine 10 and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . By the way, in the suggestive orb selection lottery, in the case of setting 1 or setting 2, 40% of blue orbs are selected, 30% of yellow orbs are selected, 20% of green orbs are selected, and 10 Select a red orb with a percentage percentage. In the case of setting 3 or 4, 20% of blue orbs are selected, 30% of yellow orbs are selected, 30% of green orbs are selected, and 20% of red orbs are selected. do. In the case of setting 5 or 6, 10% of blue orbs are selected, 20% of yellow orbs are selected, 30% of green orbs are selected, and 40% of red orbs are selected. do. Note that the selection rate may be different for each of the settings 1 to 6. FIG. In step S5004, a process of displaying the selection result of the suggestive jewel selection lottery on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the number-of-continued-games counter is equal to or greater than 6, the process proceeds to step S5005 to display on the auxiliary display section 65 the fixed orb indicating the setting state of the slot machine 10. conduct. After that, this process is terminated. For example, when the slot machine 10 with setting 6 performs the process of displaying the confirmed jewel, the end screen and the jewel indicated as 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 73(f). Is displayed.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing all reel stop completion command processing in the normal section. The all reels stop completion command process is a process that is started when an all reels stop completion command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started at the end of the game.

In the all-reel stop completion command process, the suggestive orb displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5101, and this process ends.

As described above, in the normal section, if the chance mode is not entered, the suggestive gems are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the 1st to 5th games, and after the 6th game. If so, the confirmed jewels are displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Here, the probability of not shifting to the chance mode, that is, the probability of occurrence of failure is about 1/6.4. Therefore, a player who wants to guess the setting from the state of appearance of the suggestive orb or a player who wants to grasp the setting state from the confirmed orb must play the game so that the number of games in the normal section increases.

Next, processing performed by the display control device 81 when the normal section is shifted to the chance mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a game for transition to the chance mode. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and the information indicating the chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game is a game to transition to the chance mode, the process proceeds to step S4802, and 1 is set to the number-of-continued-games counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. After that, this process is terminated. If the current game is not a transition game to the chance mode, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in step S4803, and this processing ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, it is determined in step S5201 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, it means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In such a case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5203. After that, in step S5204, processing for displaying the value of the continuous game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the young character walking on the road far away and the number of games in the chance mode, as shown in FIG. 73(g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, then in step S5205 processing is performed to display the value of the continuous game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of games by adding one each time a game is played.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the notification mode ends when the difference number is 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game of the game in which the difference number has reached 2400, that is, the first game in the normal section, and the notification mode ends when the transition game number is completed. In this case, the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode. In this way, by making the game in which the end screen is displayed differ depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the satisfied end condition. becomes.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends with the number of difference of 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game after the number of difference of 2400 has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of games under the condition that the notification mode has not ended. Certainly, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the next game when the difference number is 2394 or more. However, in the case of such a configuration, when the winning order bell is not won, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated in the notified operation order despite winning the pressing order bell, etc. Even though the end screen is displayed, the number of difference sheets does not reach 2400 and the notification mode is not terminated. This is because, when the event occurs, the end screen is continuously displayed until the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends.

When the number of remaining games is larger than 50 and the difference number is larger than 2200, the value of the transition game number counter is changed so that the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game from various points of view.

First, in the case of a configuration in which the advantage interval simply ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, some of the players may say that when the advantage interval (notification mode) ends when the difference number of sheets 2400 is actually reached, such an upper limit There are those who think that they would have been able to obtain more medals if there were no limit on the number of medals, and lose their desire to play the game. This is because it is rare for the difference number to reach 2400 when the number of remaining games becomes 0. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, in which the value of the transition game number counter is changed when the number of remaining games is larger than 50 and the number of difference is larger than 2200, the game is played in the notification mode to the player with the target of reaching 2200 as the number of difference. can be performed. In addition, since the expected value of the medal increase per game in the notification mode is about 3.5, if the number of remaining games is 57 or less and the difference is greater than 2200, the additional lottery is won. be equal to This is because the expected value of the number of games required to increase the number of medals by 200 is 58. As a result of the above, even in the case of setting an upper limit to the difference number in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play, and to improve the interest in the game. It becomes possible.

Next, when the notification mode is terminated with the difference number as a condition, the termination time of the notification mode changes depending on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., as described above. Therefore, in a configuration in which the termination condition of the notification mode is defined by the number of games, it is difficult to execute the ending effect over a plurality of games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the number of difference is greater than 2200, the fact that the number of difference reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends is made in advance. can be confirmed. Therefore, the number of games from when the value of the transition game number counter is changed until the difference number reaches 2400 can be secured as the number of games for displaying the ending image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the ending effect in a suitable form. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous section can be completed by the ending performance, and to play the game while making the player immersed in a sense of superiority until the difference number actually reaches 2400.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the ending effect is executed, the end screen is displayed in the first game of the normal section, so the player can enjoy the ending effect until the next game is started, and immerse himself in the afterglow. The next game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends by completing the number of transition games, the final game in the notification mode is not deviated due to the lottery result of the winning combination or the like. Therefore, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of games even though the notification mode has not ended.

When the post-notification lottery is won, the revival performance is performed in the next game in which the end screen is displayed, and the number of additional games is notified. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it is possible to operate the start lever 41 to issue a start command for the next game while expecting the continuation of the notification mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to plan

Now, let us consider a case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the notification mode is finished, as in the case where the notification mode is finished with the number of difference 2400. FIG. In such a configuration, since the game section of the game in which the end screen is displayed is already the normal section, even if the player wins the rare role in the game, the additional lottery will not be performed, and the event that the notification mode will be revived will not occur. It cannot be generated (see Figures 25 and 26). On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, since the game is in the notification mode, if a rare role is won, an additional lottery and a post-notification lottery can be performed to perform a resurrection effect. . Therefore, it becomes possible to carry out the resurrection effect in a suitable form, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. Then, after the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the final game of the notification mode, the continuation of the notification mode can be notified by the resurrection effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to amplify the satisfaction that the notification mode continues. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the resurrection effect is performed. However, it is common for players to play games continuously, and in the notification mode in which virtual medals are stored, it is not necessary to directly insert medals, so the interval between games is generally shortened. target. Therefore, if the end screen is displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, there is a possibility that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen. Events such as realizing that the previous game was the last game in the notification mode may occur. This not only leads to a waste of the prepared end screen, but also leads to a loss of satisfaction with the continuation of the notification mode. On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 that displays the end screen at the start of the final game, it is possible to solve the above concerns.

In the first game of the normal section, the end screen is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to play the first game in the normal section while enjoying the afterglow of the notification mode. In addition, in such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous section and that the resurrection effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide new game features using the conventionally prepared end screens, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not performed in the normal section, the player wants to play the game under the chance mode rather than in the normal section. There was a concern that the user would shy away from playing the slot machine in which they were staying. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is decided that it is not an advantageous section and that the resurrection effect is not performed. In such a configuration, a player who has played a game in the notification mode issues a command to start the next game in anticipation of a resurrection effect when the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode. It will happen. Therefore, when the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to cause the player who has played the game in the notification mode to play the first game in the normal section. Even if the player ends the game at such timing, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, it is possible to start the game of the second game in the normal section while making another player different from the above player expect that the resurrection effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the slot machine 10 from decreasing.

Until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode, the end screen is continuously displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects executed in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When a winning combination is won in a three-card game, the normal section is shifted to a chance mode, and a loss occurs only at a probability of about 1/6.4. Thus, by adopting a configuration in which the probability of shifting to the chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the player stays in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, and it is possible to reduce the chances that the player ends the game with the end screen displayed.

Even if the probability of shifting to the chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting as described above, an event of staying in the normal section without shifting from the normal section to the chance mode may occur. If the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is concern that the game in the normal section will become monotonous. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to display the suggestive orb or the confirmed orb when the normal section does not shift to the chance mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think about guessing the setting based on the state of appearance of the suggestive orb, or to make the player want the normal section to continue until the confirmed orb is displayed. As a result, not only is it possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, but it is also possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal section. becomes possible.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the displayed suggestive orb is hidden. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to confirm the suggestive orb and the confirmed orb without actually playing the game, and it is possible to allow the player who wants to guess the setting to play the game in the normal section. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine 10 from deteriorating due to the normal section.

From the 6th game onwards in the normal section, the configuration is such that the finalized jewel describing the setting state of the slot machine 10 is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play even when the normal section does not shift to the chance mode. This is because, if the setting state can be grasped through the fixed orb, it becomes a significant factor for determining whether or not to continue the game thereafter.

When shifting to the chance mode, the number of games in the chance mode is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the maximum number of games required before switching to the notification mode, the remaining number of games that can be played in the advantageous section, etc., and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. . On the other hand, the number of games played in the normal section is irrelevant to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the chance mode. Thus, the number of games that will not be updated until the chance mode is entered must be displayed. This leads to the player thinking that playing the game in the normal section is meaningless and thus reducing his or her desire to play the game. However, in a configuration such as the slot machine 10, in which the end screen is continuously displayed in each game in the normal section, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the display of the number of games in the chance mode, thereby reducing the appearance of discomfort. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

When the end screen is displayed, it is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the number of medals obtained at the present time. Then, when the end screen is displayed continuously, that is, when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the displayed number of acquired medals is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of medals the player has won in the advantageous section even when the end screen is displayed in the normal section. In addition, since processing for updating the number of medals to be displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Sixth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the bell win is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Although the probability of winning the bell in the pressing order is set so that the probability is equal, the winning probability of the bell in the pressing order may be set so that the probability of winning the bell prize differs depending on the stop switch 42 to 44 that is operated first. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), a “BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), and “ White star" symbol (for example, 16th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "Blue star" symbol (for example, 12th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol ( For example, the 11th on the left reel 32L), the “white 7” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), the “red 7” symbol (for example, the 6th on the left reel 32L), the “red star” symbol (for example, the left There are 10 types of reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 74, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of 5 combination lines are set so as to connect positions where these 9 symbols can be visually recognized, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in crossing in the diagonal direction. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(a), as a horizontal combination line, an upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A connecting middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. Further, as a combination line in the diagonal direction, a right-downward line L4 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, and the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M. A rightward rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R is set. Then, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the activated line, as a result of establishment of a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or the game state is shifted. It is designed to grant benefits that

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 75(b), only the upward right line L5 is set as the activated line. The four combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, and the downward-sloping line L4 are never regarded as valid lines.

76 to 78 are diagrams showing the correspondence between the name of the conditional device, the winning symbol combination, and the benefit given when winning.

BB is a conditional device that provides the privilege of game state transition when a prize is established.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, a BB win is awarded. When the BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state.

There are replay 1 to replay 11 as conditional devices for giving a replay privilege when winning is established.

Part of the winning mode will be explained. When the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R and the symbol stop on the active line, the replay 1 prize is won. When the replay 1 win is established, the "replay" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped on the middle line L2.

When the "watermelon" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, the replay 7 wins, and the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32M. When any one of the "red 7", "BAR", "red star", and "blue star" symbols on the reel 32R stops on the active line, replay 8 wins. When the replay 8 win is established, the "watermelon" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the line L4 descending to the right. That is, in the present embodiment, when the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any combination line, the privilege of replaying is awarded instead of the privilege of paying out medals.

Any one of the ``white 7'', ``BAR'', ``red star'' and ``blue star'' symbols on the left reel 32L and the ``replay'' symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. , one of the ``white 7'', ``BAR'', ``red star'', and ``blue star'' symbols on the left reel 32L, and the ``watermelon'' symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If the game stops at 2, then 9 replays will be won. When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, replay 10 Win a prize. When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the replay 11 wins. In this embodiment, the stop roll when re-game 9 winning to re-play 11 winning is established is a chance roll.

There are small wins 1 to 32 as conditional devices that give the privilege of paying out medals when winning is established.

The small winning combination 1 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the upper line L1 when a prize is established. The small winning combination 2 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the right downward line L4 when a prize is established. The small winning combination 3 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the middle line L2 when a prize is established. The small winning combination 4 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the upward right line L4 when a prize is established. The small winning combination 5 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the lower line L3 when a prize is established. The small combination 6 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in a small mountain shape (lower, middle, lower) when a prize is established. When the 1st minor win to the 6th minor win are established, 8 medals are paid out.

Small winning combination 7 to small winning combination 27, small winning combination 31, and small winning combination 32 function as supplementary combinations in the present embodiment, and one medal is paid out when winning is established.

The small winning combination 28 to the small winning combination 30 function as cherry winning in the present embodiment, and three medals are paid out when winning is established.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a lottery table selected during a BB non-inside where the BB win flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. FIG. 79 shows not only the corresponding relationship between the winning combination, the index value IV, and the point value PV, but also the conditional devices that make up the winning combination and the winning flag that is set when the combination is won in the lottery. , and a group number, which will be described later, are also shown.

In this embodiment, it is possible to start the game only with a three-card game, and when the lottery table shown in FIG. It is as follows. The probability of winning the first replay is about 1/9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is about 1/94, the probability of winning the third replay is about 1/6600, The probability of winning the first watermelon is about 1/160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is about 1/200, the probability of winning the first chance is about 1/410, and the probability of winning the second chance. The probability of winning is about 1/820, and the probability of winning the third chance is about 1/820. Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left right middle bell 1, left right middle bell 2, middle left right bell 1, middle left right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle The probability of winning the left bell 2, the right left middle bell 1, and the right left middle bell 2 is about 1/33. The probability of winning the first special bell, the second special bell, the third special bell, and the fourth special bell is about 1/16, respectively. The probability of winning a common bell is about 1/54, the probability of winning a strong bell is about 1/2200, the probability of winning a single role is about 1/260, and the probability of winning a weak cherry. is about 1/82, the probability of winning the strong cherry is about 1/300, the probability of winning the double BB is about 1/4.8, and the probability of winning the single BB is about 1/16000. is. During the BB non-internal period, the event of winning the replay during the internal period does not occur, and the event of not winning any combination does not occur either.

Although illustration is omitted, the lottery tables selected inside the BB that carry over the BB winning flag are the lottery table for the non-inside BB, the point value PV for replay during the inside (IV=4), and the single is different from the point value PV of BB (IV=32). Specifically, 4 is set as the point value PV for the internal replay, and 0 is set as the point value PV for the single BB. Therefore, within the BB, the double replay is won with a probability of about 1/16000, and the single BB is not won. Since the odds of winning other hands are the same as when not inside the BB, the event of losing does not occur even during the inside of the BB.

Here, the relationship between the winning combination lottery result and the reel stop result will be described.

In the present embodiment, a conditional device that constitutes a winning combination and pattern arrangements of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that some sort of winning will be established without fail if a combination other than single BB is won. . For example, when the second watermelon is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, winning of either replay 7 or 8 is established, and the privilege of replay is provided. Similarly, when a strong cherry is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small wins 28-30 is won and three medals are paid out. When single BB is won, the BB symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 can be stopped on the line L5, the BB prize is established, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at other timing, the BB prize is established. Without doing so, the BB winning flag is carried over.

In addition, when BB and minor wins are won, the main controller 101 sets and changes the stop information so that minor wins are preferentially established, and when BB and replay wins, The stop information is set and changed so that the replay winning prize is preferentially established. For this reason, for example, when a double BB is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, any one of the small wins 7-27, 31, 32 is won and one medal is awarded. Payment is made. If the first replay is won under the conditions inside the BB, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the regames 1, 2, and 4 is won, and the replay is established. A game privilege is given. The same applies to the case where another role is won under the circumstances inside the BB. Granted. As described above, no loss event occurs within the BB, so in the present embodiment, the BB prize cannot be established except for the game round in which the single BB is won. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the establishment of the BB winning is avoided by performing the 3-card game after the 2-card game is performed and the inside of the BB2 is set inside, but in the present embodiment, the above procedure is performed. Establishment of the BB prize can be avoided without stepping on it.

When the left-center-right bell 1 is won, if the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in the order of operation, a small win 1 win is established and 8 medals are paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, one of the small wins 7, 10, 15 and 18 is established and one medal is paid out. Left middle right bell 2, left right middle bell 1, left right middle bell 2, middle left right bell 1, middle left right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle The same applies to the case where Bell 1 and Right Left Middle Bell 2 are won, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the name of the winning combination, one of the minor combinations 1 to 6 is won. When the winning of the condition device is established and 8 medals are paid out, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the conditions other than the minor wins 1 to 6 among the winning condition devices Winning of the device is established and one medal is paid out. When the first special bell is won, if the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in the order of operation, 3 small prizes are won and 8 medals are paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of , one of the small wins 7 to 14 and 27 is established and one medal is paid out. When the second special bell is won, if the middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44→left stop switch 42 is operated in the order of operation, 4 small prizes are won and 8 medals are paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of , one of the small wins 7 to 14 and 27 is established and one medal is paid out. When the third special bell is won, if the right stop switch 44→left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43 is operated in the order of operations, 5 small wins are won and 8 medals are paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of , one of the small wins 7 to 10 and 23 to 27 is established and one medal is paid out. When the fourth special bell is won, if the right stop switch 44→middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42 is operated in the order of operation, 6 small wins are won and 8 medals are paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of , one of the small wins 7 to 10 and 23 to 27 is established and one medal is paid out. In the following, left-center-right bell 1, left-center right bell 2, left-right center bell 1, left-right center bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right center left bell 2, right left center bell 1, right left center bell 2, 1st special bell to 4th special bell are collectively referred to as "push order" or "push order bell". In addition, winning small wins 1 to 6 is a stop result in which the "bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on any combination line or mountain shape. Therefore, hereinafter, the 1st to 6th small wins are also collectively referred to as "bell wins".

A game section in the present embodiment will be described.

The game section in this embodiment consists of two types of game sections, a normal section and an advantage section, and the advantage section consists of two types of game modes, a chance mode and an information mode. (see FIG. 24). However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to play only with a three-card game, the point that the notification mode ends with the number of games played under the notification mode rather than the net increase number, and the fact that the pushing order bell is won in the notification mode This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the navigation rate for notifying the operation sequence that can establish a bell prize can change depending on the situation. Therefore, hereinafter, the various processes performed by the main controller 101 when managing the game section will be described with reference to the flowcharts from FIG. 80 onwards. For easy understanding, various processes performed by the main controller 101 in each game section will be individually described.

First, the processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5301, it is determined whether or not a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether or not a winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S5302 to determine whether or not the winning flag indicates that a small winning combination or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the winning combination numbers 1 to 31 (see FIG. 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning flag indicates that a small winning combination or replay has been won, the shift flag is set in step S5303, the section display 66 is turned on in step S5304, and this processing ends. . When the winning flag is not set, or when the winning flag indicates that the small combination and the replay are not won, that is, when the single BB is won, this processing is finished as it is.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery has been won in the current game. In such a case, the advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S5402 to S5410 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, that is, whether or not the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the process advances to step S5403 to clear the shift flag. In step S5404, the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an advantage flag, and in step S5405, 0 is set to the interval game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In subsequent step S5406, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S5407, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In step S5408, 0 is set to the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d, and in step S5409, 0 is set to the difference number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. After that, in step S5410, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends. Here, the section command is various information related to the game section at the end of the game (that is, the game section and game mode of the next game, the number of games played in the advantageous section if it is an advantageous section, and the game played in the game mode number of times, etc.) is transmitted to the display control device 81, and in step S5410, the game interval flag and game mode flag set in the interval information storage area 106d, and the values of various counters. Send interval command.

If it is determined in step S5402 that the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 instead of the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, the transition flag is cleared in step S5411. After that, in step S5410, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends. That is, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section, even if the transfer lottery is won, the result is invalidated and the game does not shift to the chance mode.

If it is determined in step S5401 that the transition flag has not been set, a section command is transmitted in step S5410, and this processing ends.

As described above, when a winning combination other than single BB is won in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 79, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", the probability of winning the single BB while the BB is not inside is about 1/16000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal section will end after almost one game. Also, when the player is inside the BB, the win is always won in a combination other than the single BB. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal section ends in one game.

Next, processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be described.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the chance mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not a rare combination is won. In this embodiment, the first watermelon, the second watermelon, the first chance, the second chance, the third chance, the strong bell, the weak cherry, and the strong cherry are set as rare roles. It is determined whether or not any of the numbers 5 to 9, 27, 29 and 30 (see FIG. 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the rare combination is won, the process advances to step S5502 to perform a lottery for transition to the notification mode or not. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, determination is made based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is appropriate. In step S5503, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transition lottery is won, the process is terminated after setting a transition flag in step S5504, and if the transition lottery is not won, the process is terminated as it is without setting the transition flag. If the player does not win the rare role, the processing is terminated without performing the transition lottery.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5601, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S5602, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S5601, so the section command was transmitted in step S5611. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S5603 to determine whether or not the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S5604, and it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set in step S5605. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. The existing game mode flag is changed to the notification flag A. In the following step S5609, 100 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S5610, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S5611, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S5605 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S5607 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S5611, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag A in step S5608. In the following step S5609, 100 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S5610, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S5611, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S5603 that the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 instead of the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, the transition flag is cleared in step S5612, and then the interval command is transmitted in step S5611. , the process ends.

As described above, from the chance mode, when the game is played by first operating the left stop switch 42, when the transition lottery is won, and when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. , to the notification mode A. When the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is first operated and the game is played, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated and the information mode A is not shifted. When the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is first operated to play a game, the value of the mode game number counter is not updated, so the game is played the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. Even if it does, it will not shift to the notification mode A.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be described.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the winning order of pressing the bell is won. If the pressing order bell has not been won, the process advances to step S5702 to determine whether or not the rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S5703 to perform an additional lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. In the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, one of the additional games of 10, 30, and 50 will be won with a probability of about 1/8. In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the addition lottery is won, an addition flag is set at step S5705, and an addition command is transmitted at step S5706. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the add-on lottery and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the number-of-transfer-games counter. In step S5707, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the addition lottery, the processing is terminated without setting the addition flag. If the player has not won the rare combination, the processing is terminated as it is without performing the additional lottery.

If it is determined in step S5701 that the pressing order bell is won, the process advances to step S5708 to perform navigation determination processing as to whether or not to navigate the operation order that can establish the bell winning. In the navigation determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute navigation based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85, left-center right bell 1, left-center right bell 2, left-right middle bell 1, left-right middle bell 2, middle left-right bell 1, middle left-right bell 2, middle right-left bell 1, If any of the middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, right left middle bell 2 is won, it is determined that navigation will be performed at a rate of 33% in the notification mode A. do. More specifically, since there are 1980 random numbers for each winning combination (see FIG. 79), 660 random numbers are set as random numbers for determining navigation, and the remaining 1320 are set. is set as a random value that is determined not to navigate. If any one of the first special bell, the second special bell, the third special bell, and the fourth special bell is won, it is determined that navigation is performed at a rate of 100% in the notification mode A. In step S5709, it is determined whether or not to navigate the order of operations that can establish a bell prize. If navigation is to be performed, the navigation flag is set in step S5710, and then this process is terminated. When not navigating, a prediction flag is set in step S5711, a prediction command is transmitted in step S5711, and this processing ends. Here, the expected command is a command sent to the display control device 81 so as to let the player know not to navigate the operation sequence that can establish the bell winning.

As described above, in the notification mode A, when the winning order of pressing the bell is won, there are cases where navigation is performed for the operation order that can establish the bell winning prize, and there are cases where navigation is not performed. Therefore, the processing performed by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 when actually navigating the operation order will be described below.

Main controller 101 performs a process of displaying on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can establish a bell prize in the rotation start process (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display process (see FIG. 19). At this time, in the first embodiment, it is determined (S603, S802) whether or not the winning order bell has been won, and the instruction monitor is displayed. Instead, it determines whether or not the navigation flag is set, and if the navigation flag is set, it performs processing for displaying an instruction monitor.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the winning combination information creating process. The winning combination information creation process is a process for creating winning combination information indicating the result of winning combination judgment among various information constituting the lottery result command. The winning combination information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is transmitted (see FIG. 12).

In step S5801, it is determined whether or not the winning order of pressing the bell is won. If the pressing order bell is not won, the winning combination number is set as the winning combination information in step S5802, and this processing is terminated. If the push order bell is won, the process advances to step S5803 to determine whether or not the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, it means that the current game mode is the notification mode and that it is determined to navigate the operation order that can establish the bell winning. In such a case, the winning combination number is set as the winning combination information in step S5802, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, either the current game mode is the normal section or the chance mode, or the current game mode is the notification mode, but the operation order that can establish the bell winning must be navigated. means decided. In such a case, the group number is set as the winning combination information in step S5804, and this process is terminated. Specifically, left center right bell 1, left center right bell 2, left and right center bell 1, left and right center bell 2, center left and right bell 1, center left and right bell 2, center right left bell 1, center right left bell 2, right center left If any one of bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2 is won, the group number "1" is set as the winning combination information, and the first special bell, the second If any one of the special bell, the third special bell and the fourth special bell is won, the group number "2" is set as the winning combination information. When setting the group number, the winning combination number is not set as the winning combination information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can be grasped that one of the group numbers and the corresponding pushing order bells has been won, but which pushing order bell has been won. unable to comprehend. In the following, left center right bell 1, left center right bell 2, left and right center bell 1, left and right center bell 2, center left and right bell 1, center left and right bell 2, center right left bell 1, center right left bell 2, right center left Bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2 are also collectively referred to as "push order group 1". Also, the first special bell, the second special bell, the third special bell, and the fourth special bell are collectively referred to as "push order group 2".

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing operation navigation processing performed by the display control device 81 . The operation navigation process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S5901, it is determined whether or not a winning combination number has been received. If the winning combination number has been received, it is determined in step S5903 whether or not the winning combination is the bell in the pressing order. When the winning combination number indicating that the winning combination is the bell in the order of pressing is received, it means that the main control unit 101 side has decided to navigate the operation order that can establish the winning of the bell. In such a case, in step S5903, a process of displaying an operation sequence that can establish a bell prize on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5901 that the winning combination number has not been received, it means that the group number has been received. In such a case, the flow advances to step S5904 to determine whether or not the predicted command has been received. If the prediction command has not been received yet, it means that the current game section is the normal section or the chance mode, so this processing is terminated as it is. If the expected command has already been received, a process of displaying "???" on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed in step S5905, and this process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display portion 65, it is possible to notify that the winning order of pressing the bell has been won, although the order of operations for establishing the winning of the bell is not navigated. In addition, the display of "???" in the present embodiment has a function as a promotion suggestion that the navigation rate will be increased in subsequent games.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the game round in which the pseudo-game is performed, the display of the operation order and the display of "???" are performed when the pseudo-game is finished and the main game is started.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing promotion determination processing performed by main controller 101 . The promotion determination process is a process performed after the end of the reel control process (S212, see FIG. 11), that is, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped.

In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated as it is. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether or not the navigation flag is set in step S6002. If the navigation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6004 after clearing the navigation flag in step S6003. If the navigation flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the prediction flag has been set, and if the prediction flag has not been set, this processing ends.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S6005, and it is determined in step S6006 whether or not the bell win has been established. If the bell winning has not been established, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the bell winning has been established, a promotion lottery is performed in step S6007 as to whether or not the navigation rate is to be increased. In the promotion lottery, the promotion lottery is performed based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when judging the success or failure of the role. In step S6008, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery has been won, and if the promotion lottery has not been won, this processing ends. If the promotion lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S6009, and it is determined whether or not the set game mode flag is the notification flag A. When the notification flag A is set, the process proceeds to step S6010, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to the notification flag B, in subsequent game rounds, as shown in FIG. If you win Group 2, it will be determined that you will navigate at a rate of 100%.

If it is determined in step S6009 that the notification flag A is not set, the process advances to step S6011 to change the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d to the notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to the notification flag C, in subsequent game rounds, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined that navigation will be performed at a rate of 100% if the winning order bell is won.

When the game mode flag is changed in step S6010 or step S6011, a promotion command is transmitted in step S6012, and this processing ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that he or she has won the promotion lottery. When receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 executes an effect suggesting that the player has won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, when the notification mode is A, the daytime image is displayed as the background image, when the notification mode is B, the evening image is displayed as the background image, and when the notification mode is C, the nighttime image is displayed as the background image. is displayed. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, the display control device 81 executes a process of switching to a background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game and thereafter.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6101, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S6102, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S6101, so the section command was transmitted in step S6108. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S6103, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S6104. Determine whether or not If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S6108, and then this processing ends.

When the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S6105 to S6107 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S6108 to end this processing. . In the advantageous section end processing, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S6105, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S6106. In step S6107, an initialization process associated with the end of the advantageous section is executed. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Here, the gaming properties of the slot machine 10 will be described.

Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left right middle bell 1, left right middle bell 2, middle left right bell 1, middle left right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right The probability of winning middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2 is about 1/33. The probability of winning the first special bell, the second special bell, the third special bell, and the fourth special bell forming the pushing order group 2 is about 1/16.

When the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a reference, the probability of winning the bell prize based on the order of pressing the bell is as follows. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of left, middle, right, the winning combination that establishes the bell prize is the left, middle, right bell 1 and the left, middle, right bell 2, so the probability of establishment of the bell prize is about 17. becomes 1/1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of left and right center, the winning combination for establishing the bell prize is the left and right center bell 1 and the left and right center bell 2, so the probability of establishing the bell prize is about 1/17. becomes. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of middle left and right, the winning combination that establishes the bell prize is the middle left and right bell 1, the middle left and right bell 2, and the first special bell. It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of middle, right, left, the winning combination that establishes the bell prize is the middle right, left bell 1, the middle right, left bell 2, and the second special bell. It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of right, left, middle, the winning combination for establishing the bell prize is the right left middle bell 1, the right left middle bell 2, and the third special bell. It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of right, middle, left, the winning combination that establishes the bell prize is the right middle left bell 1, the right middle left bell 2, and the 4th special bell. The establishment probability is about 1/8.1.

As described above, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right-center operation order, that is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The probability of winning a bell prize is lower than when operated. As a result, the expected value of medal payout per game in the normal section and the chance mode is about 1.9 medals when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of left-center-right or left-right-center. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order, the number of sheets is about 2.3.

In such a configuration, considering only the expected value of medal payout per game, it is advantageous for the player to operate the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first. However, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, so the normal section does not shift to the advantageous section. Also, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, even if the transfer lottery is won, the result is invalidated, so the chance mode is not shifted to the notification mode. In addition, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, the mode game number counter which triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, while the transition to the normal section is triggered. The interval game number counter is updated as follows. Therefore, when considering the transition of the game section, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first. Therefore, in the following, the playability when the left stop switch 42 is operated first will be described.

In the normal section, when winning a combination other than single BB, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 79, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", the probability of winning the single BB while the BB is not inside is about 1/16000. Therefore, the normal section ends after almost one game. In addition, when it is in the middle of the BB, the normal section ends in one game because a winning combination other than the single BB is always won.

When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the chance mode is started and 700 is set as the transition game number (see FIG. 81).

In the chance mode, when a rare role is won, a lottery for transition to the notification mode is performed. When the transfer lottery is won, the chance mode is transferred to the notification mode. Also, even if the transition lottery is not won, if the game is played 700 times under the chance mode, the game shifts to the notification mode (see FIG. 83).

When the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode, 100 is set in the shift game number counter (see FIG. 83). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, 100 games can be played under the notification mode. In addition, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-transition-games counter (see FIG. 84). Then, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the notification mode and the advantageous section are terminated, and the normal section is entered (see FIG. 89).

The notification mode is started from the notification mode A. In the notification mode A, when the bell is won in the pressing order, the operation order that can establish the bell prize at a rate of 33% in the case of the pressing order group 1 is reported, and in the case of the pressing order group 2, the rate is 100%. (See FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of medal payout per game in the notification mode A is about 4.4, and in the notification mode A, an increase of about 1.4 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the operation order is not notified in spite of winning the pressing order bell under the notification mode A, "???" , Also called “promoting production”). If a bell prize can be established in such a game round, a promotion lottery is held. Then, when the promotion lottery is won, the notification mode A is shifted to the notification mode B (see FIG. 88).

In the notification mode B, when the bell is won in the pressing order, the operation order that can establish the bell winning at a rate of 66% in the pressing order group 1 is reported, and in the pressing order group 2, the rate is 100%. (See FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of payout of medals per game in notification mode B is about 5.1, and in notification mode B, an increase of about 2.1 medals can be expected for each game played.

When the operation order is not notified in spite of winning the pressing order bell under the notification mode B, promotion performance is performed in the same manner as in the notification mode A. - 特許庁If a bell prize can be established in such a game round, a promotion lottery is held. Then, when the promotion lottery is won, the notification mode B is shifted to the notification mode C (see FIG. 88).

In notification mode C, when the pressing order bell is won, the operation order that can establish the bell winning at a rate of 100% is notified (see FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of payout of medals per game in notification mode C is about 5.8, and in notification mode C, an increase of about 2.8 medals can be expected for each game played.

As described above, in the notification mode, the expected value of medal payout per game changes depending on which of the notification modes A to C the player stays in. For this reason, a player who expects to obtain more medals, when shifting to the notification mode, needs to win a rare role to increase the number of games, and establish a bell prize in a game in which promotion effects are performed. be.

Here, as described above, the winning probability of the bell with the pressing order that can establish the bell winning in the operation order of left, middle, right or left, right, is the same as that of the bell with the pressing order that can establish the bell winning in the other operation order. lower than the odds of winning. For this reason, in a game in which a promotion effect is performed, it is conceivable that the probability of winning a bell prize increases if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in FIG. 79, in the pressing order group 1, the same point value PV is set for the six operation orders, so the winning probabilities for each operation order are equal. The reason why the probability of winning the bell is low is due to the pushing order group 2, in which the bell prize can be established in another operation order. be. Then, in notification mode A and notification mode B, when the pressing order group 2 is won, the operation order that can establish the bell winning at a rate of 100% is notified. Therefore, in a game in which promotion effects are performed, the probability of winning a bell prize is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A configuration in which the winning probability of the bell winning in the order of pressing the bell that can establish the bell prize in the operation order of left, middle, right or left, right, and middle is lower than the winning probability of the bell in the pressing order that can establish the bell prize in the other operation order. and By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to vary the establishment probability of winning a bell depending on the operation sequence of operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, in a configuration in which the probability of winning a bell prize differs depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, there is a concern that the amount of knowledge about the slot machine 10 may cause a difference in profit between the players. In a situation where the operation order is not notified, the player who knows the above fact first operates the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44, and the player who does not know the above fact first operates the left stop switch 42. This is because it is assumed that there will be a difference in the establishment probability of winning a bell.

Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, in the notification mode A and the notification mode B, when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell that can establish a bell prize in the operation order of middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left middle. The operation order is notified at a higher frequency than when the bell is won in the order of pushing the bell, which can establish the winning of the bell in the order of right, left, right, and middle operations. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the former pressing order bell and the latter pressing order bell winning probability in the situation where the operation order is not notified, and the bell prize winning. It is possible to reduce the difference in establishment frequency. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in profit between the players due to the amount of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and the players can enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the notification mode A and the notification mode B, when the pressing order bell is won, it is determined whether or not the operation order is notified so that the frequency of establishment of winning the bell does not differ depending on the operation order under the condition that the operation order is not notified. bottom. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference in profit between the players due to the amount of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and the players can enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

In addition to the middle left and right bells, a first special bell is provided as a winning combination capable of establishing a bell prize in the middle left and right operation order. Similarly, a second special bell is provided in addition to the center right and left bells, a third special bell is provided in addition to the right and left center bells, and a fourth special bell is provided in addition to the right center left bells. By adopting such a configuration, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the establishment frequency of the bell winning is set to the first to fourth special It is possible to vary the winning probability of the bell. As a result, it is possible to relatively easily realize a configuration in which the frequency of establishment of bell winnings differs depending on the order of operations.

Among the bells to press, left-center-right bell 1, left-center right bell 2, left-right center bell 1, left-right center bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-left-middle Bell 1, right-left center bell 2, right-middle-left bell 1, right-middle-left bell 2 form a pressing order group 1, and the first special bell that can establish a bell prize in the middle left-right operation order, middle right left The 2nd special bell can establish a bell winning operation in the order of operation, the 3rd special bell can establish a bell winning operation in the right, left, middle operation order, and the bell winning operation can be established in the right, middle, left operation order. The fourth special bell formed the pushing order group 2. In the notification mode, the frequency of determining to notify the operation order is different between when the pressing order group 1 is won and when the pressing order group 2 is won. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order in the notification mode. As a result, when the pressing order bell is won, it is possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a notification mode in which the operation order is notified and when the operation order is not notified.

Indeed, as the pressing order bell, six types of left-center right bell, left-right middle bell, middle left-right bell, middle right-left bell, right-left middle bell, and right-middle left bell are provided, and the winning probability of the left-center right bell and left-right middle bell is lower than the middle left/right bell, the middle right left bell, the right left middle bell, and the right middle left bell. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which navigation determination processing is performed so that the probability of winning a prize becomes equal. However, in such a configuration, the lower limit of the navigation rate is restricted by the point value PV of the left-center-right bell and the left-right-center bell. A detailed example will be described later in (78), but if we take the point values in group 1 in FIG. is. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is necessary to set the actual navigation rate and point value PV after considering both the desired navigation rate and the winning probability of each role, and trial and error requires a large amount of development man-hours. There is concern that it may become a thing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment in which control is performed according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order, if the winning probability of each winning combination belonging to group 1 is equal or approximately equal, the navigation rate can be set arbitrarily. can be set to Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns, and a relatively simple configuration can be used for a notification mode in which the operation order is notified or not when the operation order is not notified when the winning order bell is won. can be realized by

In the notification mode, when the pressing order group 1 is won, the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability, and when the pressing order group 2 is won, the operation order is always notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difference in profit between the players due to the amount of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and when the winning order bell is won, the operation order may or may not be notified. In some cases, it is possible to provide a certain notification mode.

The winning probabilities of the winning combinations belonging to the pushing order group 1 are made equal. With such a configuration, the bell prize can be established in the operation order of middle left/right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. be able to. Then, when the operation order is always notified when the pressing order group 2 is won, when the operation order is not notified under the notification mode, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in any order. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the establishment probability of winning a bell is the same.

In notification mode A, notification mode B, and notification mode C having different navigation rates, the navigation rate is different when winning in push order group 1, while the navigation rate is equal when winning in push order group 2. - 特許庁By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the navigation rate while avoiding the difference in profit between the players due to the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10 .

When the operation order is not notified under the notification mode, a promotion effect is performed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, it is possible to play the game while expecting the shift to the notification mode B or the notification mode C, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It is possible to plan

A promotion lottery is performed when a bell prize is established in a game cycle in which a promotion performance is performed. In such a configuration, there is a difference in the execution frequency of the promotion lottery and thus the probability of winning the promotion lottery between a player who knows that the frequency of establishing a bell prize differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the fact. becomes. This not only creates profit disparities among players, but can also lead to the latter player's desire to play. However, with the present slot machine 10 in which the probability of winning a bell prize is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, it is possible to preferably solve the above concern.

In the normal section, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, it does not shift to the advantageous section, and in the chance mode, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the notification mode is entered. It is configured not to migrate. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first, and to differentiate the increase/decrease of medals between the notification mode and the non-report mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the main controller 101 transmits a lottery result command in the state of winning the pressing order bell, if the operation order is to be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as the winning combination information, and if the operation order is not to be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted. A group number is transmitted as role information. It is possible to configure the display control device 81 not to grasp which of the push order bells is won when the operation order is not notified in a situation where the push order bell is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acquisition of a winning combination from the display control device 81 side.

A first special bell that can establish a bell prize in the operation order of middle, right, left, a second special bell that can establish a bell prize in the operation order of middle, right, left, and a bell prize in the operation order of right, left, middle. A pressing order group 2 is formed by the third special bell that allows the player to win a prize and the fourth special bell that allows the player to win a bell prize in the right, middle, left operation order. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acquisition of the winning combination from the display control device 81 side. For example, even if only the first special bell is set as the pushing order group 2 and the point value PV of the first special bell is set to 16720 (=4180×2), The order of operation is not notified under the notification mode while the establishment frequency of the bell winning is different between when the stop switch 42 is operated first and when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. In this case, it is possible to equalize the frequency of establishment of the bell prize depending on the order of operation. However, in such a configuration, the pressing order group 2 and the winning of the first special bell univocally correspond to each other. is transmitted, the fraudulent person will perceive that the first special bell has been won. On the other hand, in the present embodiment in which four types of special bells form the pressing order group 2, it is not possible to grasp which special bell has been won, so the frequency of fraudsters winning bell prizes is reduced. It is possible to Also, by setting the odds of winning the first to fourth special bells to be equal, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which a fraudulent player wins a bell prize.

(Seventh embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, when an additional lottery is won in the notification mode, it is configured to notify that the additional lottery has been won in the game. It may be configured to notify that the winning of the additional lottery is performed after the execution. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the chance mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S6201, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S6202 to determine whether or not a confrontation flag, which will be described later, is set. If the confrontation flag is not set, the process advances to step S6203 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination is won, the process advances to step S6204, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, determination is made based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is appropriate. In step S6205, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transition lottery is not won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the transition lottery is won, the process advances to step S6206 to perform a confrontation game number lottery. In the confrontation game number lottery, one of the values 3 to 5 is acquired based on the winning flag that is set and the random number acquired when judging whether the winning combination is correct or not. In step S6207, the transition game number counter is set to the value acquired by the confrontation game number lottery, and in step S6208, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. In step S6209, a confrontation flag is set. After that, in step S6210, a confrontation command is transmitted, and this process ends. Here, the confrontation command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 to execute the confrontation effect. In step S6210, information including the number of confrontation games obtained by lottery for the number of confrontation games is transmitted.

If the current game is not the 3-card game but the 2-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, this process is terminated without performing the transition lottery. In addition, even if it is determined in step S6202 that the confrontation flag is set, it means that the lottery for the number of confrontation games has been executed, that is, the transition lottery has been won, so this process is terminated as it is. do.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S6302, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S6301, so the section command was transmitted in step S6310. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S6303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a 3-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S6304, and it is determined whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S6305. judge. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S6310, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the confrontation flag is cleared in step S6306, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S6307. to a notification flag. In subsequent step S6308, 50 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S6309, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S6310, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S6303 that the current game is not a three-card game but a two-card game, the interval command is transmitted in step S6310 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

As described above, when the shift lottery is won in the chance mode, the system shifts to the notification mode after playing the 3-card game the number of times (any one of 3 to 5) acquired in the confrontation game number lottery. It should be noted that if the transition lottery is not won in the chance mode, 700 is set in the transition game number counter when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section (S1406, see FIG. 26). When a sheet game is performed, the system shifts to the notification mode.

In the present embodiment, when the transition lottery is won in the chance mode, the confrontation effect is performed while the 3-card game is played the number of times acquired in the confrontation game number lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "the number of confrontation games"). It is designed to be The confrontation production is a production in which the main character of the slot machine 10 and an enemy character engage in a predetermined confrontation, and is a production in which, when the main character wins, a privilege such as transition to a notification mode is given. . Below, various processes performed by the display control device 81 in executing the confrontation effect in the chance mode will be described.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing confrontation command processing in the chance mode. The battle command process is a process that is activated when a battle command transmitted from main controller 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not a defeat flag, which will be described later, is set. If the defeat flag has been set, the process advances to step S6403 after clearing the defeat flag in step S6402.If the defeat flag has not been set, the process advances directly to step S6403. In step S6403, a victory flag is set. In step S6404, the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is set in the notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. In step S6405, 0 is set to the effect game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. After that, this process is terminated.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing lottery result command processing in the chance mode. The lottery result command process is a process that is started when a lottery result command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started at the start stage of the game. In the game cycle in which both the confrontation command and the lottery result command are received, the lottery result command processing is started after the confrontation command processing is completed, because the confrontation command is received before the lottery result command is received. Become.

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-card game, and if it is a 2-card game instead of a 3-card game, the processing is terminated as it is. If it is a 3-card game, it is determined in step S6502 whether or not the victory flag is set. If the victory flag is set, it means that the battle command has been received. Therefore, after performing the battle effect processing in step S6503, this processing ends.

In the confrontation effect process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter in step S6601. In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the notification game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the notification game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6603, a corresponding effect corresponding to the value of the effect game number counter is started, and this processing ends. The ROM of the display control device 81 stores the start animation data of the confrontation effect for the first game, the interim animation data of the confrontation effect for the second and subsequent games when no conclusion can be reached, and the animation data for the victory effect in which the main character wins. , and moving image data for defeat effects in which the main character is defeated are stored in advance. In step S6603, when the value of the number-of-effects game counter is 1, the control for outputting the confrontation effect start moving image data to the auxiliary display section 65 is started, and when the value of the number-of-effects-games counter is any one of 2-4. , the control for outputting the video data during the confrontation production to the auxiliary display section 65 is started. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the number-of-effect games counter matches the value of the number-of-notice-games counter, the process advances to step S6604 to determine whether or not the victory flag is set. When the victory flag is set, the process advances to step S6605 to start the control of outputting the moving image data for the victory effect to the auxiliary display section 65, thereby starting the victory effect. After that, the victory flag is cleared in step S6606, and this processing ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result command processing, if it is determined in step S6502 that the victory flag has not been set, it is determined in step S6504 whether or not the defeat flag has been set. If the defeat flag is not set, effect determination processing is performed in step S6505, and this processing ends.

In the effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 96, it is determined in step S6701 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare role is not won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the rare role is won, a confrontation effect lottery is executed in step S6702 as to whether or not the confrontation effect is to be executed. In the confrontation effect lottery, the winner is determined based on the winning combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . In step S6703, it is determined whether or not the confrontation effect lottery has been won. If the confrontation effect lottery is not won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the confrontation effect lottery is won, the process advances to step S6704 to perform the confrontation game number lottery. In the confrontation game number lottery, one of the values 3 to 5 is acquired based on the winning combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . In step S6705, the value obtained by lottery for the number of confrontation games is set in the announcement game number counter, and in step S6706, 0 is set in the effect game number counter. In step S6707, a defeat flag is set. After that, in step S6708, the above-described confrontation effect processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the confrontation effect processing in step S6708, since the value of the effect game number counter is updated to 1, control for outputting the confrontation effect start moving image data to the auxiliary display section 65 is performed.

As described above, the display control device 81 independently determines whether or not to execute the confrontation effect in a situation in which the victory flag is not set, ie in a situation in which the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not won. Then, when it is decided to execute the confrontation presentation, a defeat flag is set.

When the defeat flag is set, in the lottery result command process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 94, an affirmative determination is made in step S6504, and the showdown effect process is performed in step S6503.

In the confrontation effect process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter in step S6601. In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the notification game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the notification game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6603, a corresponding effect corresponding to the value of the effect game number counter is started, and this processing ends. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the number-of-effect games counter matches the value of the number-of-notice-games counter, the process advances to step S6604 to determine whether or not the victory flag is set. When the defeat flag is set, the process advances to step S6607 to start the control of outputting the moving image data for the defeat effect to the auxiliary display section 65, thereby starting the defeat effect. After that, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6608, and this processing ends.

When the battle command is received in a state where the defeat flag is set, that is, when the lottery for shifting to the information mode is won during the defeat confrontation performance, the battle command processing shown in FIG. 93 is activated. In the confrontation command process, the defeat flag is cleared at step S6402, and the victory flag is set at step S6403. Then, in step S6404, the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is set in the notification game counter, and in step S6405, 0 is set in the effect game counter. As a result, in the auxiliary display section 65, the defeat showdown effect ends in the middle, and the victory showdown effect starts from the beginning.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S6801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. In the case of a three-card game, the process advances to step S6802 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S6803 to perform an additional lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the extra lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win watermelon, you will win any of the extra games 30, 50, 100, or 300 with a probability of about 1/5, and if you win cherry, it will take about 3 minutes. Any one of 10, 20, 30, and 50 additional games is won with a probability of 1. In step S6804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, it is determined in step S6805 whether or not the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the first effect determination process is performed in step S6806, and then this process is terminated.

In the first effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, in step S6901, a confrontation effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a confrontation effect. In the confrontation effect lottery, the success/fail determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the success/failure of the role. In step S6902, it is determined whether or not the confrontation effect lottery has been won. If the confrontation effect lottery is not won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the confrontation effect lottery is won, the process advances to step S6903 to perform the confrontation game number lottery. In the confrontation game number lottery, as in the case of the chance mode, any one of 3 to 5 is selected based on the winning flag that has been set and the random number obtained when judging the suitability of the role. get the value. In step S6904, the value obtained by lottery for the number of confronting games is set in the confronting game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In step S6905, it is determined whether or not the number of insufficient games is greater than zero. More specifically, the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the mode game number counter is subtracted from the value of the transition game number counter to derive the number of remaining games in the notification mode. The reason why the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the mode game number counter is subtracted is because the mode game number counter is updated in the game section process after the game is over, so the number of mode games is calculated at the stage of the section lottery process. This is because the counter is not updated. When the number of remaining games in the notification mode is derived, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is subtracted from the value obtained by lottery for the number of confrontation games to derive the number of insufficient games. Therefore, when the number of missing games is larger than 0, it means that the notification mode ends in the middle of the confrontation effect if the confrontation effect is performed as it is. Therefore, in such a case, in step S6906, the number of insufficient games is added to the value of the transition game number counter, and the process proceeds to step S6907. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, it means that the confrontation effect can be executed to the end in the notification mode, so the process proceeds to step S6907 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S6907, an effect flag is set in the section information storage area 106d. After that, in step S6908, a battle command is transmitted, and this process ends. In the notification mode, as a confrontation command, information including the number of confrontation games obtained in the confrontation game lottery and the number of additional games obtained in the addition lottery is transmitted. It should be noted that the first effect determination process is a process performed when the additional lottery is not won, so in step S6908, the number of confrontation games is any value of 3 to 5, and the number of additional games is 0. Send information.

Returning to the description of the section lottery process, if it is determined that the effect flag is set in step S6805, it means that the confrontation effect is being executed, so the main effect is performed without performing the first effect determination process. End the process.

If it is determined in step S6804 that the additional lottery has been won, this process is terminated after performing the second effect determination process for determining the method of notifying the number of additional games.

In the second effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set in step S7001. If the effect flag is not set, in step S7002, a confrontation effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a confrontation effect. In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won.

If the confrontation effect lottery is won, the process advances to step S7004 to perform a lottery for the number of confrontation games. In the confrontation game number lottery, as in the case of the first effect determination process, any one of 3 to 5 is selected based on the winning flag that has been set and the random number obtained when judging the suitability of the role. get the value of Furthermore, in the chance mode, the first effect determination process, and the second effect determination process, the same lottery table is used to determine the number of confrontation games. In step S7005, the value acquired in the number-of-fighting-game lottery is set in the number-of-fighting-games counter. In step S7006, it is determined whether or not the number of insufficient games is greater than zero. If the number of insufficient games is greater than 0, it means that part of the additional number of games will be consumed under the confrontation effect if the confrontation effect is performed as it is. Therefore, in such a case, in step S7007, the number of insufficient games is added to the value of the transition game number counter, and the process proceeds to step S7008. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, it means that the confrontation effect can be executed to the end without using part of the number of additional games, so the value of the counter for the number of transition games is changed. Then, the process proceeds to step S7008. In step S7008, a production flag is set in the section information storage area 106d, and in step S7009, a battle command is transmitted. Since the second effect determination process is a process that is performed when the additional lottery is won, in step S7009, the number of confrontation games is any value from 3 to 5, and the number of additional games is 10, 20, 30, 50, 100. , 300 and any value of . In step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated.

When it is determined that the confrontation effect lottery was not won in step S7003, in order to execute the pseudo game described in the first embodiment, the addition flag is set in step S7011, and in step S7012. Send a superimposition command. Then, in step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S7001 that the effect flag is set, it means that the confrontation effect is being executed, so a confrontation command is transmitted in step S7013. At this time, since the additional lottery is won but the confrontation game number lottery is not performed, 0 as the number of confrontation games and any value of 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300 as the number of additional games is set. Send information including; In step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, when the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, and when the rare role is not won, the first effect determination process and the second effect determination are performed. This processing ends without performing any processing.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-game determination process.

In the pseudo-game determination process, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode in step S7101, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is terminated as it is. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S7102, and it is determined whether or not the addition flag is set. When the add-on flag is set, the add-on flag is cleared in step S7103, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and this process ends. When the addition flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set in step S7105. If the effect flag is set, it means that the confrontation effect is being executed, so the processing is terminated as it is. If the effect flag is not set, a pseudo-game lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a pseudo-game in step S7106. In the pseudo-game lottery, the winning flag that is set, and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the role, the success or failure determination is performed. In step S7107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is. When the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-game is not performed during the confrontation production.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S7201, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S7202, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S7201, so the section command was transmitted in step S7208. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S7203, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S7204. Determine whether or not When the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S7205 to S7207 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S7208 to end this processing. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S7205, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S7206. In step S7207, an initialization process associated with the end of the advantageous section is executed. In the initialization process, the information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the interval) is initialized, and if the effect flag is set, the effect flag is cleared. etc.

If it is determined in step S7204 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the value of the confrontation game number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7209, and the number of confrontation games is determined in step S7210. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter has reached 0. When the value of the confrontation game number counter becomes 0, it means that the confrontation effect has ended, so the effect flag is cleared in step S7211. If the effect flag is cleared, or if it is determined in step S7210 that the value of the confrontation game number counter is not 0, a section command is transmitted in step S7208, and this processing ends.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 in executing the confrontation effect in the notification mode will be described. As explained in the section lottery process in the notification mode, in the notification mode, the main controller 101 determines whether or not to execute the confrontation effect, regardless of whether the victory confrontation effect or the defeat confrontation effect is performed. Sending a confrontation command.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing confrontation command processing in the notification mode.

In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is zero. When the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is not 0, it means that the lottery for the number of confrontation games is performed in the first effect determination process or the second effect determination process, that is, it is decided to start the confrontation effect from the current game. means In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7302, and the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is set in the announcement game number counter. In step S7303, it is determined whether or not the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is zero. If the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is not 0, it means that the additional lottery has been won. Set the number of extra games to show. After that, in step S7305, a victory flag is set, and in step S7306, 0 is set in the effect game number counter, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S7303 that the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is 0, it means that the main controller 101 has decided to start the confrontation effect in a situation where the additional lottery has not been won. In such a case, a defeat flag is set in step S7307, and 0 is set in the effect game number counter in step S7306, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is 0, it means that the additional lottery is won during the confrontation effect. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7308, and the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is added to the value of the information game number counter. In the subsequent step S7309, it is determined whether or not the defeat flag is set. If the defeat flag is set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S7310, the victory flag is set in step S7311, and this processing ends. If the victory flag is set instead of the defeat flag, the processing is terminated.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing lottery result command processing in the notification mode.

In step S7401, it is determined whether or not the victory flag is set.If the victory flag is not set, it is determined in step S7402 whether or not the defeat flag is set. If the victory flag or the defeat flag is set, the process advances to step S7403 to perform the confrontation effect processing described above. When the victory effect is started in the confrontation effect process (step S6605, see FIG. 95), after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the value stored in the notification game number counter, that is, the number of additional games is supplemented. Processing for displaying on the display unit 65 is performed. If the confrontation effect process is performed or if it is determined in step S7402 that the defeat flag is not set, the process advances to step S7404 to determine whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is. , and the process ends. At this time, when the confrontation effect is being performed on the auxiliary display part 65, both the confrontation effect and the operation order for establishing the bell winning are displayed on the auxiliary display part 65.例文帳に追加

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Some slot machines in recent years notify whether or not an additional lottery is won by a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to expect that the additional lottery will be won over a plurality of games, while in a situation where the number of games required for executing the continuous performance cannot be secured, the continuous performance is performed. There is a concern that the game may become monotonous because it cannot be executed.

Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to derive the number of insufficient games when it is determined to execute the confrontation effect in the notification mode. Then, when the number of missing games is 1 or more, the number of missing games is added to the value of the transition game number counter, that is, the number of missing games is added to the number of remaining games in the notification mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to configure that the notification mode is not terminated until the confrontation effect is completed, and it is possible to execute the confrontation effect even when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small. . As a result, even when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Here, in a configuration in which the confrontation effect can be executed when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small, for example, if the notification mode ends when the defeat confrontation effect ends, there is a possibility that the disappointment of the player will increase. can be considered. Some of the players thought that if they had not won the additional lottery, they wanted the notification mode to end without performing the confrontation effect, or that they had lost hopes that they had won the additional lottery. For there are those who think. However, in the configuration in which the number of insufficient games is added to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, the number of games that can be played under the notification mode is increased by the number of insufficient games even if the additional lottery is not won. Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player.

In addition, by adding the number of insufficient games to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the confrontation effect. For example, if the number of remaining games in the notification mode is less than the set maximum number of confrontation games (hereinafter also referred to as "maximum number of confrontation games"), the confrontation effect may not be executed. . However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the game will become monotonous after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of confrontation games, despite the need for a processing configuration to check the number of remaining games. is concerned. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is possible to configure such that after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of confrontation games, another assist effect that is completed in one game is executed. However, in the case of such a configuration, since it is necessary to store the other auxiliary effects in advance, there arises a new problem of an increase in storage capacity. There is also the problem of receiving On the other hand, in the configuration in which the number of insufficient games is added to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

In the second effect determination process performed when winning the extra lottery, when it is decided to perform the confrontation effect, the number of games to be added is added to the value of the transition game number counter after deriving the number of insufficient games. and By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid part of the number of additional games from being consumed during the confrontation effect.

When the number of missing games is 0 or less, the value of the number-of-transition-games counter is not changed, that is, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is not changed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase due to the execution of the confrontation effect to a situation in which the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation in which the notification mode is about to end. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game feature in a situation where the notification mode is about to end, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The smaller the number of remaining games at the start of the confrontation production, the greater the increase in the number of remaining games due to the execution of the confrontation production. is.

When the confrontation performance lottery is won, regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won, any value of 3 to 5 is acquired as the number of confrontation games. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the notification mode is about to end. For example, when the confrontation effect is started in a situation where the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 4, if 5 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is increased by 1, and the number of confrontation games is increased to 4 or 3. If acquired, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will not change. Therefore, when the confrontation performance is started, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the confrontation performance will continue for a long time as well as winning the additional lottery.

A configuration is adopted in which the number of remaining games in the notification mode is not checked when performing the confrontation effect lottery. As described above, in the configuration in which the insufficient number of games is added to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the effect without being restricted by the number of remaining games in the notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the showdown performance.

A production flag is set when winning the confrontation production lottery under the notification mode. When the effect flag is set, the confrontation effect lottery and the confrontation game number lottery are not performed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to have a configuration in which the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed is not changed in the middle. As a result, even in the case of adding the number of insufficient games to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, an event occurs in which the notification mode is not terminated as a result of the change in the number of games for which the confrontation effect is executed. can be avoided.

When winning the additional lottery in the middle of the defeat confrontation performance, the configuration is such that the performance is switched to the victory confrontation performance without changing the length of execution of the confrontation performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and prevent the confrontation effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

When an additional lottery is won in the course of the victory confrontation performance, the number of additional games is collectively notified without changing the length of execution of the confrontation performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and prevent the confrontation effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

As described above, when the confrontation effect is started under the notification mode, the length of execution of the confrontation effect is not changed in the middle of the confrontation effect, so that the presence or absence of winning the additional lottery is notified. It is possible to avoid impairing the intention. In the present slot machine 10 that adds the number of games lacking to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, if the length of execution of the confrontation effect can be changed in the middle of the confrontation effect, the player's interest will increase the result of the lottery. This is because there is a possibility that it is more suitable for continuation of the confrontation production.

In the notification mode, whether the additional lottery is won or not, the main controller 101 side determines whether or not to execute the confrontation performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the confrontation effect even when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous as the notification mode approaches the end. Become. For example, in the case where the display control device 81 side determines whether or not to execute the confrontation effect, if the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small, it cannot be decided to execute the confrontation effect unless the additional lottery is won. be.

In the chance mode, the display control device 81 side determines whether or not to execute the confrontation presentation in the situation where the transfer lottery is not won. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main controller 101, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity. That is, in the notification mode, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode may end due to the number of games remaining in the notification mode. On the other hand, in the chance mode, the chance mode continues when the transfer lottery is not won. There is no possibility of complicating the processing configuration regarding the determination of whether or not to execute or restricting executable effects. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in the main controller 101 in advance, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When the transition lottery is won in the chance mode, the main controller 101 is configured to set the value acquired in the confrontation game number lottery to the transition game number counter and to transmit the confrontation command to the display control device 81. bottom. Then, the display control device 81 is configured to perform control for executing the confrontation effect over the number of games indicated by the confrontation command, and the main control device 101 is configured to perform a three-card game corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of transition games. It is configured to shift to the notification mode when the By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to actually shift the game mode after notifying the shift from the chance mode to the notification mode by the confrontation performance, thereby improving the game interest.

In the chance mode, when the transfer lottery is won in the middle of the defeat showdown production, the defeat showdown production ends in the middle and the victory showdown production starts from the beginning, that is, the number of games in which the showdown production is executed is changed in the middle. It was configured as follows. By adopting such a configuration, even when the display control device 81 side decides to execute the confrontation effect, it is possible to perform the victory confrontation effect and notify the transition to the notification mode. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the confrontation effect is restarted from the beginning in the middle of the confrontation effect, the transition to the notification mode is confirmed, so it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Eighth embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, when winning the press order bell in the notification mode, it is configured to always notify the operation sequence that can establish the bell winning, but the configuration is configured to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability. good too. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

Figure 104 is a diagram showing the transition of the game section.

In the present embodiment, as the notification modes, the notification mode A and the notification mode B are provided, and when the chance mode ends, the notification mode A is entered.

The notification mode A ends when the lottery for promotion to the notification mode B is won, and when a predetermined number of games are played under the notification mode. When the notification mode A ends, if the end is based on promotion lottery winning, the mode shifts to the notification mode B, and if the end is based on the number of games, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. In notification mode A, when winning the pressing order bell, the operation order that can establish the bell winning at a rate of 50% is notified. Therefore, in the notification mode A, an increase of about 1.3 medals is expected every time one game is played in the case of a three-card game.

The notification mode B ends when a predetermined number of games are played under the notification mode. When the notification mode B is finished, the advantageous section is also finished and the normal section is started. In notification mode B, when winning the pressing order bell, the operation order that can establish the bell winning at a rate of 100% is notified. Therefore, in the notification mode B, an increase of about 3.5 medals is expected every time one game is played in the case of a three-card game.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S80101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment is performed.

In step S80102, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S80101, so the section command was transmitted in step S80112. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S80103, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. In the case of a three-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S80104, and a navigation counter update process is performed in step S80105.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is the chance mode, this processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the game section process, in step S80106, it is determined whether or not the shift flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. The existing game mode flag is changed to the notification flag A. At step S80110, 100 is set to the transition game number counter, and at step S80111, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S80112, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S80106 that the transition flag has not been set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S80108 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S80112, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S80109 to change the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d to the notification flag A. At step S80110, 100 is set to the transition game number counter, and at step S80111, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S80112, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S80103 that the current game is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, the interval command is transmitted in step S80112 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

As described above, the chance mode shifts to the notification mode A when the shift lottery is won and when 700 3-card games are played under the chance mode.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S80301, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, this processing is terminated as it is. If the rare combination is won, the process proceeds to step S80303, and it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode A. If it is the notification mode A, the process proceeds to step S80304, and it is determined whether or not the value of the mode game number counter is smaller than 51. If the value of the mode game number counter is less than 51, that is, if the rare role is won by the 1st to 50th games in the notification mode A, the process proceeds to step S80305, and a promotion lottery for whether to promote to the notification mode B I do. In the promotion lottery, the success/failure determination is performed based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success/failure of the role. In the promotion lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the watermelon is won, the probability of winning is about 1/2, and if the cherry is won, the probability of winning is about 1/3. In step S80306, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery has been won, and if the promotion lottery has not been won, this processing ends. If the promotion lottery is won, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag B in step S80307, and this process ends.

When it is determined in step S80303 that the notification mode is not in the notification mode A but in the notification mode B, and when it is determined in step S80304 that the value of the mode game number counter is 51 or more, the process proceeds to step S80308 and shifts. An additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-games counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the extra lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win watermelon, you will win any of the extra games 30, 50, 100, or 300 with a probability of about 1/5, and if you win cherry, it will take about 3 minutes. Any one of 10, 20, 30, and 50 additional games is won with a probability of 1. In step S80309, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the addition lottery is won, an addition flag is set in step S80310, and an addition command is transmitted in step S80311. In step S80312, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the addition lottery, the process is terminated without setting the addition flag.

If it is determined in step S80302 that the rare combination has not been won, the process advances to step S80313 to determine whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the pressing order bell has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is.If the pressing order bell has been won, in step S80314 whether or not to navigate the operation order that can establish the bell winning. After performing navigation determination processing for determining whether or not, this processing ends.

In the navigation determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode B in step S80401. If the notification mode is not the notification mode B but the notification mode A, a navigation lottery is performed in step S80402. In the navigation lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute navigation based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful. In step S80403, it is determined whether or not the navigation lottery has been won.If the navigation lottery has been won, the navigation flag is set in step S80405, and this process ends. The probability of winning the navigation lottery is 1/2. If the navigation lottery is not won, the process advances to step S80404 to determine whether or not the value of the navigation counter is greater than seven. If the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, the navigation flag is set in step S80405, and this processing ends. If the value of the navigation counter is 7 or less, the process ends without setting the navigation flag. Also, if it is determined in step S80401 that the current game mode is the notification mode B, the navigation flag is set in step S80405 without performing the navigation lottery, and this processing ends.

Here, in the rotation start process (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display process (see FIG. 19), the main controller 101 displays on the instruction monitor the operation order that can establish the bell winning. conduct. At this time, in the first embodiment, it is determined (S603, S802) whether or not the winning order bell has been won, and the instruction monitor is displayed. Instead, it determines whether or not the navigation flag is set, and if the navigation flag is set, it performs processing for displaying an instruction monitor. In addition, main controller 101 transmits a lottery result command including information indicating whether or not the navigation flag is set to display controller 81 . When the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including information indicating that the navigation flag has been set, the display control device 81 performs processing for displaying on the auxiliary display section 65 the operation sequence that can establish a bell prize.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S80501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S80502, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S80501, so the section command was transmitted in step S80509. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S80503, and navigation counter update processing is performed in step S80504.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether or not the navigation flag is set in step S80203. If the navigation flag is not set, this process is terminated, and if the navigation flag is set, the navigation flag is cleared in step S80204, and the value of the navigation counter is set to 0 in step S80205. End the process.

Returning to the description of the game section process, in step S80505, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S80509, and then this processing ends.

When the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S80506 to S80508 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S80509 to end this processing. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S80506, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S80507. In step S80508, an initialization process associated with the end of the advantageous section is executed. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Here, the game characteristics of the notification mode in this embodiment will be described.

When the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode, the notification mode A is started. In the notification mode A, when the pressing order bell is won, the ratio of winning the navigation lottery and notifying the operation order is 50%. Further, in the notification mode A, even if the navigation lottery is not won, the operation order is notified if the value of the navigation counter is 8 or more (step S80404, see FIG. 108). The value of the navigation counter is updated by 1 each time a game is played in the notification mode, and is changed to 0 when the navigation flag is set, that is, when the operation order is notified (see FIG. 106). Therefore, in the notification mode A, when the pressing order bell is won, the operation order is notified at a rate higher than 50%. In addition, the value of the navigation counter is updated not only in the notification mode but also in the chance mode (see FIG. 105). Therefore, in the first pressing-order bell-winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the probability of being informed of the operation order is higher than in the second and subsequent pressing-order bell-winning games. This is because, when shifting to the information mode after seven or more 3-card games are played in the chance mode, the operation order is always notified even if the pressing order bell is won in the first game of the information mode. The probability of winning the lottery for transition to the notification mode is about 1/250 even at setting 6, which has the highest probability of winning. Therefore, in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, when the value of the navigation counter is 8 or more, the value of the navigation counter is higher than when the value of the navigation counter is 7 or less.

When a rare role is won by the 50th game after shifting to the notification mode, a promotion lottery is conducted, and when the promotion lottery is won, the operation order is always notified when the pushing order bell is won. Switch to notification mode B. In the case of shifting to the notification mode B, the notification mode B continues until the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the promotion lottery is not won within the 50th game after shifting to the notification mode, the notification mode A continues until the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. When a rare role is won in the notification mode B, and when a rare role is won after the 51st game in the notification mode A, an extra lottery is conducted, and when the extra lottery is won, the number of transition games is counted. The value of the counter is incremented. Therefore, in the notification mode of the present embodiment, the number of medals that the player can obtain until the end of the notification mode greatly changes depending on whether or not the promotion lottery is won and the timing when the promotion lottery is won.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Some slot machines in recent years have a game mode in which the operating order is reported at a rate of less than 100%, such as 50%, when the pushing order bell is won. In such a configuration, the player may run out of tokens owned by the player in the game mode even though the game mode has been shifted to the above game mode, which has led to a marked loss of the player's desire to play.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10, in the first push-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the frequency of notification of the operation order is higher than the frequency of non-report. By adopting such a configuration, even if it is configured such that the operation order may not be notified when the pressing order bell is won in the notification mode, the medals owned by the player will run out under the notification mode. It is possible to reduce opportunities, and it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In the first pressing-order bell-winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the probability of being notified of the operation order is higher than in the second and subsequent pressing-order bell-winning games. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from the transition to the notification mode to the first notification of the operation order.

In the notification mode A, when the pressing order bell is won, the operation order is notified when the navigation lottery is won. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to randomly set the interval at which the operation order is notified when the pressing order bell is won. On the other hand, in a configuration in which whether or not to notify the operation order is determined by a lottery, an event may occur in which the operation order is not notified at all due to bias in the lottery results. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to notify the operation order not only when the navigation lottery is won, but also when the value of the navigation counter is 8 or more. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interval at which the operation order is notified from becoming wider than necessary. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated regardless of whether the two-card game or the three-card game is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the operation order in the next pushing order bell winning game not only when repeatedly failing in the navigation lottery but also when the pushing order bell itself is not won. It is possible to reduce the chance that the player's owned medals will run out under the mode. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated when the winning order bell is won. This is because there is a high possibility that the player will run out of tokens owned by the player.

When winning the press order bell under the notification mode A, if the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, the operation order is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player running out of tokens owned by the player in the notification mode, and to prevent the expected value of the medal payout per game in the notification mode A from increasing more than necessary. It becomes possible to That is, if the set value of the navigation counter is set to a value of 6 or less when it is determined that the operation order is to be notified, the smaller the set value is, the higher the navigation rate in the notification mode A becomes. Since this means that the difference between the notification mode A and the notification mode B is small, the game may become monotonous. Conversely, if the set value of the navigation counter when determining to notify the operation order is set to a value of 8 or more, although the difference between the notification mode A and the notification mode B becomes large, the player's possession under the notification mode This is because it leads to an increase in the chances of running out of medals. It should be noted that the set value "7" of the navigation counter in the present embodiment is based on the result of a simulation using the probability of winning a role and the probability of winning a navigation lottery.

When the operation order is notified in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is returned to 0, that is, the navigation counter is initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the navigation counter and, at the same time, to suppress an unnecessary widening of the interval at which the operation order is notified by means of a relatively simple processing configuration. Become. This is because, if the navigation counter is not initialized when the operation order is notified in the notification mode, it is necessary to secure the capacity of the navigation counter so that it can count 1500, which is the upper limit of the number of advantageous sections. In addition, the value of the navigation counter when the operation order is notified is separately stored, and in step S80404 in the navigation determination process, the current navigation counter value and the navigation counter value when the operation order is notified are stored. , is 8 or more.

The value of the navigation counter is updated not only in the notification mode but also in the chance mode. By adopting such a configuration, while suppressing an increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101, in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the frequency of notifying the operation order is increased. It is possible to configure the frequency to be higher than the frequency of no notification.

Certainly, when shifting to the notification mode A, the first time flag is set, and when the pressing order bell is won in the situation where the first time flag is set, the operation order is notified and the first time flag is cleared. is also possible. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the frequency of notification of the operation order is higher than the frequency of non-report in the first push-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode. However, in such a configuration, whether or not the operation order in the second and subsequent push-order bell winning games is notified or not depends on the result of the navigation lottery. may run out. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to provide a navigation counter that is updated only in the notification mode, and to notify the operation order even when the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. In this case, the processing configuration related to the initial flag and the processing configuration related to the navigation counter need to be stored in advance in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101, which creates a new problem of an increase in the amount of data. It will happen. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when the configuration is such that the value of the navigation counter is updated in the chance mode in addition to the notification mode, the processing configuration related to the initial flag becomes unnecessary, while the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Furthermore, it is generally said that the soundness of the game is ensured when the ball payout ratio is 1.5 or less after 1600 games have been played. Since the upper limit number of times of the advantageous section is 1500 times, for example, when the advantageous section ends when the upper limit number of times is reached, and the transition lottery is won in the first game of the next advantageous section, 1600 times There is a possibility that the payout rate of the game will exceed 1.5, and the soundness of the game cannot be ensured. Here, in the case where the first flag is set, regardless of the number of games under the chance mode when winning the transition lottery, the operation order is changed in the first pushing order bell winning game after the transition to the notification mode. You will be notified. For this reason, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate will exceed 1.5 when the game is played 1600 times, and there is a possibility that the soundness of the game cannot be ensured. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in the chance mode as well as in the notification mode, the number of games played under the chance mode and the number of games played from the transition to the notification mode until the winning order of the first bell is achieved. When the sum of the number and is 7 or less, the ratio of notifying the operation order is 50%. Therefore, in the configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in the chance mode in addition to the notification mode, it is possible to increase the possibility of ensuring the soundness of the game compared to the configuration in which the initial flag is set. .

In the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated when a three-card game is played. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of the value of the navigation counter being greater than 7 in the first pressing-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode. For example, it is possible to update the value of the navigation counter when the bell is won in the order of pressing in the chance mode. However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, an event may occur in which a lottery for transition to the notification mode is won before the bell is won in the order of pressing. This is because the frequency with which the counter value is greater than 7 becomes low. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated when a three-card game is played, even if the player wins the lottery for transition to the notification mode in the first game of the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated in the game. can be updated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7 in the first pressing-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode.

When a rare role is won by the 50th game after shifting to the notification mode, a promotion lottery is conducted, and when the promotion lottery is won, the operation order is always notified when the pushing order bell is won. It was set as the structure which transfers to the alerting|reporting mode B. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to play the game under the notification mode A while anticipating the shift to the notification mode B, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, 100 games are set as the number of games that can be played under the notification mode. Then, the period from the transition to the notification mode to the 50th game was defined as a period during which the transition to the notification mode B could be performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to greatly change the number of medals that the player can obtain until the end of the notification mode depending on the timing of shifting to the notification mode B, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Ninth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing configuration when outputting sound effects from the speaker 64 . Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only features will be described below.

In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 is configured to drive and control the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. In the present embodiment, the effect control device 201 and the liquid crystal control device 251 It drives and controls the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 .

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 110 , the main controller 101 is connected with the effect control device 201 , and the effect control device 201 is connected with the liquid crystal control device 251 . The effect control device 201 has a substrate in which CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. are integrated, and determines and decides the content of the effect to be executed based on commands such as the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. A command corresponding to the result is transmitted to the liquid crystal control device 251 . The liquid crystal control device 251 includes a board on which a CPU 252, a VDP 253, an image ROM 255, and the like are integrated. CPU252 transmits an internal command with respect to VDP253 in order to perform the production|presentation according to the command input from the production|presentation control apparatus 201. FIG. The VDP 253 reads out image data and sound data from the image ROM 255 according to internal commands input from the CPU 252 , and drives and controls the upper lamp 63 , speaker 64 and auxiliary display section 65 .

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the liquid crystal control device 251 is provided with 32 channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output simultaneously. CH0 to CH3 are channels in charge of operation sounds. More specifically, from CH0 and CH1, a bet sound when medals are bet, a start sound when the start lever 41 is operated to generate a start command, and a stop switch 42 to generate a stop command. A stop sound or the like is output when 44 is operated. CH2 and CH3 output a wait sound when a wait occurs, a winning sound when a prize is won, a payout sound when paying out medals, and the like. CH4 to CH7 are channels in charge of BGM and jingles. From CH4 and CH5, BGM for performance when executing auxiliary performance such as continuous performance, normal BGM in game rounds in which no auxiliary performance is executed, and customer waiting performance to be executed when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. Waiting BGM and the like are output. CH6 and CH7 output jingles according to the BGM output from CH4 and CH5. CH8 to CH13 are channels in charge of sound effects such as warning sounds. CH26 is a channel in charge of sound effects for notifying the pressing order. From CH26, when an operation order is announced in a push-order bell winning game, an effect sound is output before the operation order is announced. CH27 is a channel in charge of pressing order notification sound. From CH27, when notifying the operation order in the push-order bell winning game, a sound indicating the stop switch 42-44 to be operated, such as "left", is output. CH28 and CH29 are channels in charge of general-purpose sounds other than the push order notification sound. CH30 is a channel for monaural backup, and CH31 is a channel for error sound when an abnormality occurs and inspection sound during inspection.

The RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with seven layers. A layer is a storage area for storing the sound volume (volume value) when outputting sound data, and is configured to store the sound volume corresponding to the application for each layer. For example, in the layer for CH4 which is in charge of BGM, as shown in FIG. The second layer is an area for storing the volume in the power saving mode. The power saving mode is a mode in which a game is not played for a predetermined period of time. In the power saving mode, a process of reducing the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65 and a process of reducing the volume output from the speaker 64 are performed. Returning to the description of the layers, the third layer of the CH4 layer is an area for storing the volume normally used, and the fourth layer is an area for storing the volume when muting the BGM. The fifth layer is an area for storing the volume when a plurality of effects are executed simultaneously, and the sixth layer is the volume when outputting the winning sound, that is, the volume when outputting both the BGM and the winning sound. This is an area for storing BGM volume.

This slot machine 10 is characterized by a change in volume of the BGM when a rare winning combination is established. Therefore, first, the relationship between the BGM and the prize-winning sound when a rare combination is won will be specifically described by taking as an example the case where one of the rare combinations, a watermelon, is won.

In FIG. 112(a), the BGM is output at 0.0 dB before the watermelon win is established, that is, at the stage when at least one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotating. 0.0 dB is the maximum sound volume corresponding to the sound volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the manager of the gaming facility. When the watermelon winning is established when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the output of the watermelon winning sound is started at 0.0 dB at this timing, and the output of the BGM is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6. changed to 0 dB. -6.0 dB is about half the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the manager of the gaming facility. The watermelon winning sound is output until 2000 msec elapses after the watermelon winning is established, and is not output after that. While the watermelon winning sound is being output, the BGM is continuously output at -6.0 dB. When the output of the watermelon winning sound ends, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over a period of 800 msec. BGM is output at 0.0 dB after 2800 msec has passed since the watermelon win was established.

When the next game start command is issued while the BGM output is being changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, as shown in FIG. The output is changed to 0.0 dB. If the start command is generated within 2000 msec after the establishment of the watermelon winning, that is, if the start command is generated while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the watermelon winning sound will be generated at that timing. output ends and becomes non-output, and the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB.

FIG. 112(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the BGM and the prize-winning sound when the watermelon prize is established in the game in which the sound effect is performed. The muting effect is a effect that can be performed when a lottery for transition to the notification mode or a winning lottery for addition, etc., is performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, when the first stop command is generated, and when the second stop command is generated. This is an effect in which the BGM becomes inaudible at any timing of the hour. When the mute effect is started before the watermelon win is established, the BGM output is changed from 0.0 dB to mute state. In the mute state, BGM data itself is output. When a watermelon win is established when all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, output of a watermelon win sound at 0.0 dB is started at this timing. At this time, the BGM remains mute. The BGM output is changed from the mute state to 0.0 dB at the timing when the next game start command is generated. If a start command is generated while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the output of the watermelon winning sound ends at that timing and the output of the BGM is 0.0 dB from the mute state. is changed to

In the following, processing performed by the effect control device 201 and the liquid crystal control device 251 when performing the above-described BGM volume control will be specifically described.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the effect control processing performed by the effect control device 201. As shown in FIG.

In step S90101, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main controller 101 . When the lottery result command is received, the process proceeds to step S90102, and effect content determination processing is performed. In the effect content determination process, based on the lottery result of the role, the current game state including the game mode, and the random number acquired by the effect control device 201, whether or not the auxiliary effect is executed, and when the auxiliary effect is executed Determines the specific performance content of the auxiliary performance. When the effect content determination process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S90103, and an effect content command indicating the processing result of the effect content determination process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control device 251. FIG. After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S90101 that the lottery result command has not been received, the process advances to step S90104 to determine whether or not a prize winning result command has been received from main controller 101 . When a winning result command is received, it is determined in step S90105 whether or not any winning has been established. If none of the winnings have been established, this processing is terminated as it is. If any winning has been established, a winning sound command indicating the winning combination is transmitted to the liquid crystal control device 251 in step S90106. , the process ends.

If it is determined in step S90104 that the winning result command has not been received, the process advances to step S90107 to determine whether or not a start instruction command has been received from main controller 101 . A start instruction command is a command transmitted from main controller 101 when a start instruction for starting a game is issued. If the start instruction command has not been received, this processing is terminated. is sent, and this process ends.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal control processing performed by the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 .

In step S90201, effect instruction processing is performed. In the effect instruction process, when the effect content command is received from the effect control device 201, an internal command is transmitted to the VDP 253 in order to execute the effect corresponding to the effect content command. For example, when an effect content command indicating execution of a mute effect is received, an internal command instructing to mute the BGM is transmitted at the timing of mute the BGM. The internal command that is transmitted when giving an instruction regarding sound includes information indicating the type of sound, such as BGM for production, and information indicating the channel to be controlled.

In step S90202, winning sound instruction processing is performed.

In the winning sound instruction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 115, it is determined whether or not a winning sound command has been received from the effect control device 201 in step S90301. When the winning sound command is received, it is determined in step S90302 whether or not the watermelon winning has been established. When the watermelon winning is established, the process advances to step S90303 to transmit an internal command to the VDP 253 to output the watermelon winning sound. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the watermelon winning sound and information indicating the channel for outputting the watermelon winning sound. If it is determined in step S90302 that the watermelon winning has not been established, it is determined in step S90306 whether or not the cherry winning has been established. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare combinations. When the cherry winning is established, the process advances to step S90307 to transmit an internal command to the VDP 253 to output a cherry winning sound. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the cherry winning sound and information indicating the channel for outputting the cherry winning sound.

When the internal command for outputting the watermelon winning sound or the cherry winning sound is transmitted, the timer is set in step S90304, the fade time is set in step S90305, and this processing ends. In steps S90304 and S90305, when an internal command for outputting a watermelon winning sound is transmitted (hereinafter also referred to as "watermelon winning sound output instruction"), the timer is set to 2000 msec and the fade time is set to 800 msec. do. Further, when an internal command for outputting a cherry winning sound is transmitted (hereinafter also referred to as a "cherry winning sound output instruction"), in steps S90304 and S90305, the timer is set to 1000 msec and fade time is set. is set to 500 msec.

If it is determined in step S90306 that the cherry winning has not been established, it means that a winning other than a rare combination has been established. to send. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the general winning sound and information indicating the channel for outputting the general winning sound. When the internal command for outputting the general winning sound is transmitted (hereinafter also referred to as "general winning sound output instruction"), this processing is terminated as it is. That is, when the general winning sound output instruction is given, the timer and fade time are not set.

When it determines with not having received the prize-winning sound command from the production|presentation control apparatus 201 in step S90301, it progresses to step S90309 and it is determined whether the timer is set. As described above, when the timer is set, it means that the watermelon winning sound output instruction or the cherry winning sound output instruction has been performed. In such a case, it is determined in step S90310 whether or not the time set in the timer has elapsed. Although detailed description is omitted, when the timer is set in step S90304, the timer is decremented in the timer interrupt process periodically executed by the liquid crystal control device 251. FIG. In step S90310, when the timer reaches 0, it is determined that the set time has passed. If the time set in the timer has elapsed, the process advances to step S90311 to transmit an internal command to the VDP 253 to perform fade-in control to gradually increase the BGM volume. The internal command transmitted at such timing contains information indicating the channel on which fade-in control is to be performed. If an internal command for performing fade-in control is transmitted (hereinafter also referred to as a "fade-in instruction"), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S90309 that the timer has not been set, that is, if it is determined that the timer is 0, the flow advances to step S90312 to determine whether or not the fade time has been set. If the fade time has not been set, this process is terminated, and if the fade time has been set, this process is terminated after giving a fade-in instruction in step S90313. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, when the fade time is set in step S90305, the fade time is subtracted after the timer reaches 0 in the timer interrupt process periodically executed by the liquid crystal control device 251. go. In step S90312, if the fade time is not 0, it is determined that the fade time is set, and if the fade time is 0, it is determined that the fade time is not set.

As shown in FIG. 116, when the watermelon winning is established by executing the winning sound instruction process, the watermelon winning sound is output over 2000 msec by the watermelon winning sound output instruction. When 2000 msec has passed, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over a period of 800 msec by issuing a fade-in instruction over 800 msec. When the cherry winning is established, the cherry winning sound is output for 1000 msec according to the cherry winning sound output instruction. When 1000 msec has passed, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over 500 msec by issuing a fade-in instruction over 500 msec.

Returning to the description of the liquid crystal control process, if the winning sound instruction process is performed in step S90202, the initialization instruction process is performed in step S90203, and the process returns to step S90201. In the initialization instruction process, when a start command is received from the effect control device 201, the data stored in the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 (for example, the volume value stored in each layer of the layer) is returned to the initial value. Send command. Also, in the initialization instruction process, the timer and the fade time are set in the winning sound instruction process, and when a start command is received from the effect control device 201 in a situation where at least one of the timer and the fade time is not 0, the timer and Processing to reset the fade time to 0 is performed.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing BGM output processing performed by the VDP 253 of the liquid crystal control device 251 when outputting BGM such as normal BGM. As described above, the channels responsible for BGM output are CH4 and CH5. Therefore, it can be said that the BGM output process is a process performed when sound is output from at least one of CH4 and CH5. However, in order to facilitate understanding, the case where BGM is output from CH4 will be described below as an example.

In step S90401, a process of reading BGM data from the image ROM 255 is performed. Note that the BGM data to be read is specified in the internal command transmitted by the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 in the effect instruction process. In step S90402, volume value setting processing for setting a volume value to the layer is performed.

In the volume value setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 118, it is determined in step S90501 whether or not there is a mute instruction. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an internal command instructing to mute the BGM has been received from the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 . If there is a mute instruction, the process advances to step S90502 to set the fourth CH4 layer to "0" as the volume value. After that, or when it is determined that there is no mute instruction in step S90501, the process advances to step S90503 to determine whether or not there is a rare combination winning sound output instruction, that is, whether there is a watermelon winning sound output instruction or a cherry winning sound output instruction. judge. If there is an instruction to output a rare winning prize sound, the process advances to step S90504 to set "64" as the volume value in the sixth layer of the CH4 layer. After that, or when it is determined in step S90503 that there is no rare combination winning sound output instruction, the process advances to step S90505 to determine whether or not there is a fade-in instruction. If there is a fade-in instruction, the process advances to step S90506 to add 1 to the volume value set in the sixth layer of the CH4 layer. After that, or if it is determined in step S90505 that there has been no fade-in instruction, the flow advances to step S90507 to determine whether or not there has been an initialization instruction. If there is no initialization instruction, this processing is terminated. is set to "128". After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the BGM output process, when the volume value setting process is completed, the flow advances to step S90403 to compare the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers of the CH4 layer. In step S90404, BGM data is output using the minimum volume value among the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers of the CH4 layer. After that, this process is terminated.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the volume value of the CH4 layer when the volume value setting process is performed.

If there is an initialization instruction, "128" is set to the 0th to 6th layers in step S90508. Under such circumstances, since the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers are all equal to "128", the BGM is output from CH4 with the volume value of "128". When outputting with a volume value of "128", the maximum volume (0.0 dB) corresponding to the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the manager of the game hall is obtained.

When there is a rare combination winning sound output instruction, "64" is set to the sixth layer in step S90504. The volume values of the 0th to 5th layers remain "128". Under such circumstances, since the volume value "64" set for the sixth layer is the minimum value, BGM is output from CH4 with the volume value of "64". When outputting with a volume value of "64", the volume is about half (-6.0 dB) of the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the manager of the gaming facility.

If there is a fade-in instruction, 1 is added to the volume value of the sixth layer in step S90506. The volume values of the 0th to 5th layers remain "128". Under such circumstances, the volume value set for the sixth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with the volume value for the sixth layer. The CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 periodically issues fade-in instructions 64 times until the fade time reaches zero. Therefore, when the watermelon winning sound is output, the volume value of the sixth layer periodically changes from "65" to "128" in 800 msec, and the BGM is output over 800 msec. is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB. When the cherry prize-winning sound is output, the volume value of the sixth layer periodically changes from "65" to "128" in 500 msec, and the output of the BGM becomes - over 500 msec. It is changed from 6.0 dB to 0.0 dB.

If there is a mute instruction, "0" is set in the fourth layer in step S90502. The volume values of the 0th to 3rd layers, the 5th layer, and the 6th layer remain "128". Under such circumstances, the volume value "0" set in the fourth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". When outputting with a volume value of "0", the sound is mute, in which the sound is not heard although the BGM data is being output.

When there is an instruction to output a rare role winning sound after a mute instruction, "0" is set in the fourth layer at the time of the mute instruction, and "64" is set in the sixth layer at the time of the rare role winning sound output instruction. ” is set. The volume values of the 0th to 3rd layers and the 5th layer remain "128". Under such circumstances, the volume value "0" set in the fourth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". That is, when there is a mute instruction, even if a rare winning prize sound output instruction is received after that, the process of outputting BGM from CH4 with a volume value of "64" is not performed.

Although illustration is omitted, when there is a fade-in instruction after a mute instruction, the volume set in the fourth layer is the same as when there is a rare winning prize sound output instruction after a mute instruction. Since the value "0" is the minimum value, BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". In other words, when there is a mute instruction, even if a fade-in instruction is received after that, the process of fading in the BGM is not performed. The BGM output returns to 0.0 dB when there is an initialization instruction, that is, when a start instruction for starting the next game is generated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the rare role winning is established, the rare role winning sound is output at 0.0 dB, and if the BGM is output at 0.0 dB, control is performed to lower the volume of the BGM to -6.0 dB. It was configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the sound output at 0.0 dB from the BGM to the rare winning prize sound, and to make the rare winning prize sound easier to hear than the BGM. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player misses hearing the rare combination winning sound, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When a rare winning combination is established, a rare winning combination winning sound is output. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of accomplishment of winning the rare role and the expectation of the granting of benefits based on the establishment of the rare role winning, etc. by outputting the rare role winning sound. can be improved. Whether or not a rare winning combination is established depends not only on winning the corresponding rare combination, but also on whether or not the player himself/herself operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at winning symbols. This is because, when a rare role winning prize is established, it is determined that a shift lottery to the notification mode or an additional lottery has been performed.

When the output of the rare combination winning sound is completed, control is performed to fade in the volume of the BGM to 0.0 dB. By adopting such a configuration, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the rare role winning sound compared to the configuration in which the volume of the BGM is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB at the timing when the output of the rare role winning sound ends. It becomes possible to As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the watermelon win is established, the output time of the rare role winning sound is longer than when the cherry win is established. In the chance mode, when the watermelon is won, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the notification mode is higher than when the cherry is won. In addition, in the notification mode, when watermelon is won, the expected value of the number of additional games is higher than when cherry is won. Therefore, when the watermelon prize is established, the output time of the rare role winning sound is longer than when the cherry prize is established. It is possible to associate the degree of expectation with the output time of the rare combination winning sound, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The time from when the watermelon win is established and when the cherry win is established, the time from the end of the output of the rare winning prize sound to the return of the volume of the BGM to 0.0 dB is different. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the lingering sound different between when the watermelon winning sound is output and when the cherry winning sound is output, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. becomes. In addition, when a watermelon prize is awarded with high expectations for benefits such as transition to the notification mode and addition of the number of games, the time required to return to 0.0 dB is longer than when a cherry prize is awarded. Thus, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege with the time required for the volume of the BGM to return to 0.0 dB, thereby making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

When a start command is generated during fade-in control, the BGM volume is immediately returned to 0.0 dB. With such a configuration, when a start command for starting the next game is generated, it is possible to output the BGM at 0.0 dB in the next game.

The RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with seven layers for CH4, which is in charge of BGM. The layer for CH4 is configured to store the volume according to the purpose for each layer. With such a configuration, for example, when there is an opportunity to change the volume output from CH4, information related to the volume before change and information related to the volume after change are stored in different layers. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

In the layer for CH4, when there is a mute instruction, the volume value of the 4th layer is changed to 0, and when there is an instruction to output rare winning prize sound, the volume value of the 6th layer is changed to 64. It was configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the mute effect is being executed, whether or not the rare winning prize sound is being output, etc. through the volume values of the 4th layer and the 6th layer. becomes. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When outputting BGM, the volume values of each layer are compared and the minimum volume value is used. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for processing for confirming the volume being output from CH4, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. Further, by adopting a configuration in which BGM is output from CH4 using the minimum volume value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations such as when the volume of CH4 is maintained in a muted state.

That is, in a conventional slot machine having only one volume value storage area for CH4 in the VDP RAM, it is necessary to store the volume value that defines the volume actually output from CH4 in the volume value storage area. , the processing configuration related to sound output has become complicated.

As a specific example, when a rare winning combination is established during execution of the mute effect, the same event as in the present embodiment is generated, that is, when the rare winning combination is established, the output of the BGM is reduced by -6. Consider leaving it muted instead of setting it to .0 dB. In order to generate such an event, at least one of the effect control device, the CPU of the liquid crystal control device, and the VDP needs to be configured to be able to grasp whether or not the mute effect is being executed. For example, in order to configure the CPU of the liquid crystal control device to be able to grasp whether or not the muting effect is executed, a process of setting a muting flag indicating that the muting effect has started when the muting effect is started, and a process of setting the muting flag A storage area for storing is required. Then, in the winning sound instruction process, when a rare role winning is established, it is determined whether or not the mute effect is being executed based on whether or not the mute flag is set, and if the mute effect is being executed, A different internal command needs to be sent to the VDP when the mute effect is not being executed. When the mute effect is being executed, it is necessary to send an internal command to set 0 to the CH4 volume value storage area, and when the mute effect is not being executed, the CH4 volume value storage area is set to 64. This is because it is necessary to send an internal command in which is set. Therefore, processing for determining whether or not the mute effect is being executed in the winning sound instruction process, an internal command for executing the mute effect, and an internal command for the non-execution of the mute effect are required.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the CH4 layer is provided in the RAM 254 of the VDP 253, each of the configurations described above is unnecessary. That is, the VDP 254 of the slot machine 10 changes the volume value of the 4th layer to 0 when there is an instruction to mute, and changes the volume value of the 6th layer to 64 when there is an instruction to output a rare winning prize sound. do. Since the volume value can be stored in different layers in accordance with the instruction, the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 does not need an internal command for execution of the mute effect and an internal command for non-execution of the mute effect. Along with this, the process of determining whether or not the mute effect is being executed in the winning sound instruction process becomes unnecessary. Then, since the process of determining whether or not the mute effect is being executed is not required in the winning sound instruction process, a process of setting a mute flag indicating that the mute effect has started when the mute effect is started; This is because the storage area for storing the mute flag is not required. When outputting BGM, the volume values of each layer are compared and the minimum volume value is used. No need to send commands.

As a result, the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with a plurality of layers for CH4, which is in charge of BGM, so that the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4 can be simplified.

(Tenth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by an ending effect that can be executed under the notification mode. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only features will be described below.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the notification mode that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the ending effect is performed. In the above-described first embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are that 1500 games have been played in the advantageous interval and that the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous interval has reached 2400. In the embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are that the game has been played 3000 times in the advantageous interval and that the difference number of coins has reached 2400 in the advantageous interval. The display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 in order to execute the ending movie in the ending effect.

The ending movie is composed of a story part and a music part, as shown in FIG. 120(a). In the story part, a 175-second digest video summarizing the story of the main character of the slot machine 10 is output over 200 seconds. In the music part, the opening song and video when a work related to the main character of the slot machine 10 is broadcast is output for 40 seconds. When the output of the story part is finished, the music part is repeatedly output until the notification mode and the advantageous section are finished.

In the ROM of the display control device 81, data used when reproducing the story part is divided into seven files and stored. That is, as shown in FIG. 120(b), data from the start of the story part to 25 seconds is stored in the file of story part 1, and data from 26 seconds to 55 seconds of the story part is stored in the file of story part 2. The story part data from 56 seconds to 65 seconds is stored in the story part 3 file, and the story part data from 66 seconds to 95 seconds is stored in the story part 4 file. , data from 96 seconds to 125 seconds of the story part is stored in the file of story part 5, data from 126 seconds to 135 seconds of the story part is stored in the file of story part 6, and Data from 136 seconds to 175 seconds of the part is stored in the story part 7 file. The story part 3 file is composed of 10 seconds of playback data from 56 seconds to 65 seconds of the story part and 10 seconds of pause data. When the data of story part 3 is output, the story part from 56 seconds to 65 seconds is reproduced, and after that, "NEXT" is displayed and the same image (that is, the image at 65 seconds of the story part) continues for 10 seconds. It is now displayed. The same applies to the file of story part 6. The file of story part 6 is composed of 10 seconds of playback data from 126 seconds to 135 seconds of the story part and 15 seconds of pause data. When the data of story part 6 is output, the story part from 126 seconds to 135 seconds is reproduced, and after that, "NEXT" is displayed and the same image (that is, the image at 135 seconds of story part) continues for 15 seconds. It is now displayed. The data used when reproducing the music part is stored in one file as 40-second data.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when performing an ending effect will be described.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing ED determination processing performed by the display control device 81 .

In step S100101, it is determined whether or not an ED start flag, which means that the ending effect has started, is set. If the ED start flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S100102 to determine whether or not the ED flag indicating that the ending movie is being reproduced has been set. If neither the ED start flag nor the ED flag is set, the process advances to step S100103 to determine whether or not the finish conditions are met. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, the current difference number and the remaining number of payouts until the notification mode ends , is greater than 2,400. If the sum of the current difference number and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is 2400 or less, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is used as the expected increase in the number of medals per game. Divide by the value of 3.5 to derive the required number of games. Then, it is determined whether or not the required number of games is greater than the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. When the sum of the current difference number and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is greater than 2400, and when the required number of games is greater than the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, the completion condition is established. I judge. On the other hand, when the current game mode is not the notification mode, and when the current game mode is the notification mode, the sum of the current difference number and the remaining number of payouts until the notification mode ends is 2400 or less, and necessary When the number of games is less than the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, it is determined that the completion condition is not satisfied.

If it is determined that the completion condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100104, and drives and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to notify the transition to the ED. Specifically, processing is performed to display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the ending movie will start from the next game. After that, in step S100105, an ED start flag is set, and this processing ends.

When it is determined that the ED start flag is set in step S100101, when it is determined that the ED flag is set in step S100102, and when it is determined that the completion condition is not satisfied in step S100103. In both cases, this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, when the condition for finishing the race is established by winning an additional lottery or the like, it is notified that the ending movie will start from the next game.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing ED processing performed by the display control device 81. FIG.

In step S100201, it is determined whether or not the ED start flag is set. If the ED start flag is set, ending movie start processing shown in steps S100202 to S100208 is performed, and this processing ends.

In the ending movie start process, it is determined in step S100202 whether or not a start command has been generated. If the start command has not been generated, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the start command has been generated, the ED start flag is cleared in step S100203, and the ED flag is set in step S100204. In the subsequent step S100205, 1 is set in the file number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81, and in step S100206, 1 is set in the data number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S100207, data corresponding to the file number and data number among the data pre-stored in the ROM of the display control device 81 is read. That is, in step S100207, the first data stored in the story part 1 file is read. In step S100208, processing for outputting the read data is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S100201 that the ED start flag is not set, the process advances to step S100209 to determine whether or not the ED flag is set. If the ED flag is not set, this process is terminated, and if the ED flag is set, the ending movie progression process shown in steps S100210 to S100216 is performed, and this process is terminated. .

In the ending movie progression process, in step S100210, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the frame rate of the ending movie is 24 fps. Therefore, the final data number is 600 (=24×25) for story part 1, 720 (=24×30) for story part 2, and 480 (=24×20) for story part 3. Thus, story part 4 is 720 (=24×30), story part 5 is 720 (=24×30), story part 6 is 600 (=24×25), story part 7 If it is a music part, it will be 960 (=24×40), and if it is a music part, it will be 960 (=24×40).

If the value stored in the data number storage area is not the final data number, the process advances to step S100217 to add 1 to the value stored in the data number storage area. After that, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214, and data corresponding to the file number and data number is read in step S100215. In step S100216, processing for outputting the read data is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

If the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number, the flow advances to step S100211 to set 1 in the data number storage area. In step S100212, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the file number storage area is 8. If the value stored in the file number storage area is not 8, the flow advances to step S100213 to add 1 to the value stored in the file number storage area. After that, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214, and data corresponding to the file number and data number is read in step S100215. In step S100216, processing for outputting the read data is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S100212 that the file number is 8, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214 without changing the value stored in the file number storage area. Then, in step S100215, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read out, and in step S100216, processing for outputting the read data is performed. After that, this process is terminated. File number "8" is music part data. That is, when the music part data has been output to the end, the music part data is output again from the beginning.

As described above, when the ending movie is started with the generation of the start command, the data of story parts 1 to 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output. When the music part data has been output to the end, the music part data is repeatedly output until the ED flag is cleared. The ED flag is cleared when a section command indicating that the advantageous section has ended is received.

Here, the error confirmation processing of step S100214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S100301, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred, and if no error has occurred, this processing ends. If an error occurs, the process advances to step S100302 to add 1 to the value of the error count counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 . In step S100303, drive control of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. Specifically, an error type such as a hopper empty error indicating that the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 is empty is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 and an error sound is output from the speaker 64 . At this time, the ending movie is interrupted. In step S100304, it is determined whether or not the error has been resolved. If the error has not been resolved, the error notification continues until the error is resolved. On the other hand, if the error has been resolved, the process advances to step S100305 to drive and control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to notify the restart operation. Specifically, processing is performed to display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the ending movie will be restarted when the start command for the next game is generated. In step S100306, it is determined whether or not a restart operation has been performed, and if the restart operation has not been performed, notification of the restart operation is continued until the restart operation is performed. If a restart operation has been performed, restart processing is performed in step S100307, and this processing ends.

In the restart processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 124, it is determined whether or not the file number is 8 in step S100401. If the file number is 8, it means that an error occurred while outputting the music part data. In such a case, 1 is set in the data number storage area in step S100402, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S100401 that the file number is not 8, it means that an error has occurred during the output of the story part data. In such a case, the process advances to step S100403 to determine whether or not the value of the error number counter is greater than three. Note that the value of the error counter is changed to 0 when the advantageous section ends, and is updated only in step S100302 of the error confirmation process. If the value of the error count counter is greater than 3, it means that 4 or more errors have occurred after the ending movie started, so in step S100404, 1 is added to the value of the file number storage area. After that, in step S100402, 1 is set in the data number storage area, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S100403 that the value of the error count counter is 3 or less, the flow advances to step S100405 to determine whether or not the advance condition is satisfied. The ROM of the display control device 81 stores a move-up table that defines the correspondence between file numbers and move-up conditions. In the carry-over table, the number of games in the advantageous section and the difference number are defined as carry-up conditions. , and the elapsed time is set as a carry-over condition. As shown in FIG. 120(b), file number "1" has 2920 set as the number of games in the advantageous section and 2190 as the difference number. In the file number "2", 2930 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2210 is set as the difference number. In the file number "3", 2940 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, 2240 is set as the difference number, and 10 seconds is set as the elapsed time. In the file number "4", 2950 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2260 is set as the difference number. In the file number "5", 2960 are set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2290 are set as the difference number. In the file number "6", 2970 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, 2320 is set as the difference number, and 10 seconds is set as the elapsed time. In the file number "7", 2980 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2350 is set as the difference number. In step S100405, if any of the number of games in the advantageous interval, the difference number, or the elapsed time is greater than the set value, it is determined that the advance condition is satisfied, and the number of games in the advantageous interval and the difference number are determined. , the elapsed time, and are all equal to or less than the set value, it is determined that the advancing condition is not satisfied. The elapsed time may be determined by measuring the elapsed time after moving to file number "3" or "6", or whether the data number is greater than 240 (=24 x 10). It is good also as composition which judges whether. If the carry-up condition is satisfied, 1 is added to the value of the file number storage area in step S100404. After that, in step S100402, 1 is set in the data number storage area, and this processing ends. If the advance condition is not satisfied, 1 is set in the data number storage area in step S100402 without changing the value of the file number storage area, and this processing ends.

As described above, if an error occurs during execution of the ending movie, the ending movie is interrupted. When the error is resolved, a restart operation is notified, and the ending movie is restarted when the restart operation is performed. At this time, if an error occurs in the middle of the music part, the music part is started from the beginning. If an error occurs in the middle of the story part, if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less and the advance condition is not satisfied, the file will start from the beginning of the file when the error occurred. . On the other hand, when the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is 4 or more, or when the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is 3 or less but the advance condition is satisfied, when an error occurs start at the beginning of the next file after the previous file.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a conventional slot machine capable of executing an ending movie, if an error occurs during the ending movie, the ending movie starts from the beginning after the error is resolved. Therefore, in the above slot machine, the ending movie must be viewed from the beginning every time a hopper empty error occurs, for example, and there is a concern that the game will become monotonous.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10, the ending movie is interrupted when an error occurs during execution of the ending movie. Then, when the error is resolved, the ending movie is restarted from the middle instead of from the beginning. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid starting the ending movie from the beginning when progress of the ending movie is interrupted.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the beginning of the ending movie from being repeatedly executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The data used for executing the ending movie is divided into eight files of story part 1 to story part 7 and music part and stored. Then, when the ending movie is executed, the data of the file corresponding to the value stored in the file number storage area is output. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to resume the ending movie from the position corresponding to the interrupted position when progress of the ending movie is interrupted, while suppressing complication of the processing configuration related to the execution of the ending movie. It becomes possible.

When the ending movie is started in accordance with the generation of the start command, the data of story parts 1 to 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output. With such a configuration, even if the data used for executing the ending movie is divided and stored in a plurality of files, the ending movie can be progressed independently of the progress of the game. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

If an error occurs in the middle of the music part, it is configured to start from the beginning of the music part. Also, if an error occurs in the middle of the story part, if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less and the advance condition is not satisfied, the file will start from the beginning when the error occurred. It was configured to be With such a configuration, part of the ending movie that was executed before the error occurred can be re-executed, that is, part of the ending movie can be overlapped before and after the error occurs, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

When the error is resolved, the ending movie is restarted by issuing a command to start the next game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to decide the restart timing of the ending movie, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Certainly, it is possible to have a configuration in which the ending movie is resumed immediately after the error is resolved. However, an error that is likely to occur in the middle of the ending movie is the hopper empty error. When a hopper empty error occurs, it is possible that the player may leave his seat because the manager of the game arcade where the slot machine 10 is installed needs to replenish tokens and the like. Then, when the player leaves the seat due to the occurrence of the hopper empty error, an event may occur in which the ending movie progresses in the absence of the player. This can lead to a marked decrease in the player's desire to play. This is because the frequency with which the completion condition is satisfied, that is, the frequency with which the ending effect is executed is not so high, and therefore, general players want to enjoy the ending movie from beginning to end. In the present slot machine 10, in which the ending movie is restarted when the start command for the next game is generated, the start command is generated by the player's operation, so that the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved favorably and the game interest can be improved. can be improved.

When the error is resolved, it is configured to notify the restart operation. Then, the ending movie is restarted when the restart operation is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the ending movie is not restarted even though the error has been resolved.

In the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the ending effect is performed when it is confirmed that the termination condition is established. With such a configuration, the number of games in which the ending movie can be executed changes depending on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc. Therefore, if the progress of the ending movie is interrupted and the ending movie is restarted from the beginning, the ending movie will be played to the end. It may become impossible to do so. However, in the case of a configuration in which the progress of the ending movie is restarted from the middle when the progress is interrupted, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

If an error occurs in the middle of the story part, the conditions for moving forward are satisfied when the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is 4 or more, or when the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is 3 or less. In some cases, the ending movie is configured to start from the beginning of the file following the file when the error occurred. In this way, by omitting a part of the ending movie and making it resumable, it is possible to reduce the chance that the ending movie cannot be executed to the end when the progress of the ending movie is interrupted. Become.

The files of story part 3 and story part 6 are provided with 10 seconds of reproduction data for progressing the ending movie and 10 seconds or 15 seconds of pause data. If an error occurs during playback of the story part 3 or story part 6 file, it is determined whether or not 10 seconds have passed. It was configured to start. In this way, pause data is provided so that the story part does not progress, and if an error occurs during the output of the pause data, the output of the pause data is omitted and the next file is started. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the ending movie cannot be executed to the end when progress of the ending movie is interrupted.

(Eleventh embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing performed when setting the winning probability. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only features will be described below.

In the above-described first embodiment, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, but in the present embodiment, "setting 1" to "setting 6" In addition to the six levels of winning probabilities, a "setting 7" winning probability is prepared in advance.

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing winning probability setting processing for setting the above set values.

In step S110101, it is determined whether or not the signal from the front door open sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 is ON, that is, whether or not the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is open, the process advances to step S110102 to check whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is ON, that is, if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned ON. Determine whether or not If the signal from the front door open sensor is OFF and if the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, the process ends.

If both the signal from the front door open sensor and the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a are ON, the flow advances to step S110103 to perform interrupt permission processing for permitting activation of the timer interrupt processing. In step S110104, interrupt wait processing is performed to wait until timer interrupt processing is started. In step S110105, a setting change command is transmitted to the display control device 81 so that the setting change is recognized. In step S110106, the current set value is read from the set value storage area provided in the RAM 106. FIG. After that, setting change processing is performed in step S110107, and this processing ends.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing setting change processing.

In step S110201, it is determined whether or not the set value read in step S110106 is zero. If the set value is not 0, the process advances to step S110202 to determine whether the set value is greater than seven. As described above, the set value in this embodiment is any one of 1-7. Therefore, when the set value is 0 and when the set value is 8 or more, it means that the set value is not an appropriate value. In such a case, after changing the set value to 1 in step S110203, the process proceeds to step S110204. If the set value is any one of 1 to 7, the process proceeds directly to step S110204. In step S110204, the set value is saved in the display buffer provided in the RAM 106, and in step S110205, the set value saved in the display buffer is displayed on the payout number display portion 62. FIG. In step S110206, interrupt wait processing is performed to wait until timer interrupt processing is started. In step S110207, based on the processing result of the timer interrupt processing, more specifically, based on the processing result of the sensor monitoring processing (step S107, see FIG. 10) performed in the timer interrupt processing, whether or not the signal from the sensor has been switched from OFF to ON. ON edge confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether the

Here, the first sensor buffer provided in RAM 106 of main controller 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

The first sensor buffer is composed of four areas, 0th to 3rd areas, and each of the 0th to 3rd areas is composed of 1 byte. The 0th bit of the 0th to 3rd areas is an area for storing signal information from the setting key detection sensor 73a. The first bits of the 0th to 3rd areas are areas for storing signal information from the front door opening sensor. The second bits of the 0th to 3rd areas are areas for storing signal information from the reset detection sensor 72a. The 3rd and 4th bits of the 0th to 3rd areas are unused areas, and 1 is always stored. The 5th bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area is an area for storing signal information from the start detection sensor 41a. The 6th and 7th bits of the 0th to 3rd areas are areas for storing signal information from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process, regarding the first sensor buffer, the information in the first area is shifted to the third area, and the information in the 0th area is shifted to the first area. After that, the signals from the various sensors described above are read, and if it is an ON signal, 1 is stored in the corresponding bit of the 0th area, and if it is an OFF signal, 0 is stored in the corresponding bit of the 0th area. conduct.

Therefore, in the first sensor buffer, it can be said that the current sensor signal state is stored in the 0th area, the previous sensor signal state is stored in the first area, and the 3rd It can be said that the area stores the signal state of the sensor in the time before last. Information is stored in the second area in the ON edge confirmation process.

In the ON edge confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 128, in step S110301, the information stored in the 0th area of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110302, the information stored in the first area of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110303, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the change state of the sensor. In step S110304, the logical product (AND) of the changing state of the sensor and the current sensor state is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the second area of the first sensor buffer. After that, this process is terminated.

As a result of the process in step S110303, in the change state of the sensor, the previous sensor state is "1" and the current sensor state is "0", and the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". , and "1" is stored. Then, by the process of step S110304, in the second area of the first sensor buffer, "1" is stored in the bit of "0" for the previous sensor state and "1" for the current sensor state. That is, it can be said that the second area stores information indicating an ON edge when the signal from the sensor is switched from OFF to ON.

Returning to the description of the setting change process, when the ON edge confirmation process is completed, the process advances to step S110208 to determine whether 1 is stored in the fifth bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, that is, the start detection sensor 41a. is detected. If the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a is not detected, the process advances to step S110209 to determine whether 1 is stored in the second area second bit of the first sensor buffer, that is, the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a. is detected. When the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a is detected, that is, when the reset switch 72 is operated, the set value is updated by 1 in step S110210, and then the process returns to step S110202. As a result, in the setting change process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated, and when the reset switch 72 is operated after the set value becomes 7, the set value returns to 1. .

When the process returns from step S110209 to step S110202, the ON edge confirmation process of step S110207 is performed through the interrupt waiting process of step S110206. That is, if the previous state was "0" and the current state was "1" at the time of the previous ON edge confirmation processing, the previous state was "1" and the current state was "1" by the interrupt wait processing in the current ON edge confirmation processing. has changed to "1", "0" is stored in the bit in which "1" was stored in the second area. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which the setting value is updated multiple times for one operation of the reset switch 72 .

Incidentally, the determination of the signal from the front door open sensor in step S110101 and the determination of the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a in step S110102 are performed by the corresponding bits (first bit, It is determined whether or not 1 is stored in the 0th bit).

If it is determined in step S110209 that the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt waiting process of step S110206. If it is determined in step S110208 that the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has been detected, that is, if it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated, change end processing is performed in step S110211, and this processing ends. .

In the change end process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 129, the display of the setting value ends in step S110401. More specifically, the display mode of the payout number display section 62 is changed from any one of 1 to 7 indicating the set values to 0, which is the initial display mode of the payout number display section 62 . In step S110402, setting key OFF wait processing is performed.

In the setting key OFF wait process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 130, an interrupt wait process is performed in step S110501. In step S110502, the information stored in the 0th area of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110503, the information stored in the first area of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110504, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is acquired as the change state of the sensor. In step S110505, the logical product (AND) of the changing state of the sensor and the previous sensor state is acquired as the OFF edge of the sensor. Contrary to the ON edge confirmation process, in step S110505, "1" is stored in the bit of "1" for the previous sensor state and "0" for the current sensor state.

In step S110506, it is determined whether or not 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the OFF edge, that is, whether or not the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected. If the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is not detected, the process returns to the interrupt waiting process of step S110501. On the other hand, when the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected, it means that the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 is switched from ON to OFF after the start lever 41 is operated. In such a case, the process advances to step S110507 to set 10 times as the number of interrupts. In step S110508, an interrupt waiting process is performed. In step S110509, it is determined whether 0 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer, that is, whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF. determine whether If the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, it is determined in step S110510 whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been performed ten times. If the timer interrupt process has not been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt waiting process of step S110508, and if the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, this process ends. If 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer before the timer interrupt process is performed ten times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S110501.

As described above, the setting key OFF waiting process is performed ten times in succession after the first sensor buffer has stored "1" in the 0th bit of the first area and "0" in the 0th bit of the 0th area. Then, when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area, the process ends.

Returning to the description of the change end processing, if the setting key OFF wait processing is completed, the process advances to step S110403 to store the current set value in the set value storage area. In step S110404, a change end command is transmitted to the display control device 81 so that the setting change is completed and the newly set setting value is grasped. In step S110405, data in RAM 106 other than the set value storage area is cleared. Incidentally, the set value storage area is provided at the top address (0000H) of the RAM 106 . Therefore, in step S110405, the data is initialized by designating the second and subsequent addresses. In step S110406, a front door command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp whether or not the front door 12 is open. In addition to clearing the RAM 106, the front door command is also used when the front door 12 is switched from the closed state to the open state, when the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and when an error state is generated. is transmitted to the display control device 81 when the reset switch 72 is operated to reset the . When the front door command is transmitted to the display control device 81, the change end processing is terminated.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when the winning probability is set will be described.

FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing front door command processing performed by the display control device 81 .

In step S110601, it is determined whether or not the front door command has been received, and if the front door command has not been received, the process ends. When the front door command is received, the process advances to step S110602 to determine whether the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is open, the process advances to step S110603 to determine whether or not the set value of the winning probability is 7. If the set value is not 7 but any one of 1 to 6, the process of outputting the normal opening sound from the speaker 65 is started in step S110604, and this process ends. Also, if the set value is 7, the process of outputting the special opening sound from the speaker 65 is started in step S110605, and this process ends. Here, the normal opening sound and the special opening sound are voice data output to notify that the front door 12 is opened. A female voice saying "The door is open" is output as the normal opening sound, and a male voice saying "The door is open" is output as the special opening sound.

If it is determined in step S110602 that the front door 12 is not in the open state, that is, if the front door 12 is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S110606 to determine whether the set value of winning probability is 7 or not. If the set value is not 7 but any one of 1 to 6, the process of outputting the normal opening sound from the speaker 65 is terminated in step S110607, and this process is terminated. If the set value is 7, the processing of outputting the special opening sound from the speaker 65 is terminated in step S110608, and the lighting mode switching processing is performed in step S110609, thereby terminating this processing. Here, the lighting mode switching process is a process of switching the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63 for a predetermined period of time. After that, processing to return to the lighting state is performed.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing setting change command processing performed by the display control device 81 .

In step S110701, it is determined whether or not a setting change command has been received, and if the setting change command has not been received, this processing ends. When the setting change command is received, the process of outputting the normal opening sound or the special opening sound from the speaker 65 is terminated in step S110702, and the process of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 is started in step S110703. , the process ends. Here, the setting change sound is audio data output to notify that the set value of the winning probability can be changed. As the setting change sound, a female voice saying "Settings are being changed" is output.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing change end command processing performed by the display control device 81 .

In step S110801, it is determined whether or not a change end command has been received, and if the change end command has not been received, this process ends. When the change end command is received, the process of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 is ended in step S110802, the setting value indicated by the change end command is stored in step S110803, and this process ends.

Here, the relationship between a series of operations performed when setting the winning probability and the notification sound to be notified will be described.

A reset switch 72 and a setting key insertion hole 73 used for setting the winning probability are provided in the power supply box 70 . The power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 as shown in FIG. 3 and the like. Therefore, when setting the winning probability, it is necessary to first open the front door 12 from the housing 11 and expose the power supply box 70 to the front open side of the housing 11 . When the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11, front door command processing is performed, so if the setting value is any one of 1 to 6, the normal opening sound is output, and if the setting value is 7 A special opening sound is output (see FIG. 131).

The operation for setting the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as "setting change operation") can be broadly classified into a start operation, a change operation, and an end operation. The start operation corresponds to inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and performing an ON operation. The change operation corresponds to turning on the reset switch 72 . The end operation corresponds to turning off the setting key after turning on the start lever 41 . The configuration of the well-known setting key and the setting key insertion hole 73 will be briefly described here. An OFF position is provided in which an ON signal is not output from 73a (an OFF signal is output). The setting key can be moved to the ON position by inserting it from the OFF position of the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotating it to the right (ON operation). The setting key insertion hole 73 is configured to hold the setting key at the ON position when the setting key is at the ON position. The setting key can be removed from the setting key insertion hole 73 by rotating the setting key located at the ON position to the left to move it to the OFF position and then pulling it out from the setting key insertion hole 73 (OFF operation).

When the start operation is performed, a setting change command is transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display controller 81 (step S110105, see FIG. 125). As a result, the setting change command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, the output of the normal opening sound or the special opening sound is terminated, and the output of the setting change sound is started (see FIG. 132). While the change operation is being performed, the setting change sound is continuously output.

When the end operation is performed, a change end command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 (step S110404, see FIG. 129). As a result, change end command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and the output of the setting change sound is ended (see FIG. 133). Further, when the change end command is transmitted, main controller 101 transmits a front door command to display control device 81 (step S110406, see FIG. 129). As a result, front door command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and if the set value is any one of 1 to 6, the output of the normal opening sound is started, and if the set value is 7, the special opening sound is output. is started (see FIG. 131).

When the end operation is performed to end the setting change operation, the front door 12 is closed. When the front door 12 switches from the open state to the closed state, the main controller 101 transmits a front door command to the display controller 81 . As a result, front door command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and the output of the normal opening sound or the special opening sound is terminated (see FIG. 131). At this time, when the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is in the lighting state in the normal mode, is turned off for 30 seconds.

FIG. 134 shows the relationship between a series of operations performed when setting the winning probability, set values, and notification sounds to be notified.

For example, when the setting value is changed from 1 to 6 to 7, before the setting key is turned ON and after the setting key is turned OFF, that is, The notification sound for notifying the opening of the front door 12 changes before and after the setting change operation is started. As a result, it is possible to inform the administrator or the like of the game arcade where the slot machine 10 is installed that the set value is 7. In addition, by notifying under the condition that the front door 12 is open, the front door 12 is closed and opened when the administrator of the game parlor wants to change the set value to a value other than 7. Settings can be changed without any work.

When the front door 12 is closed, if the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game arcade that the setting value is 7 under the condition that it is difficult to close the front door 12 and change the setting.

In the slot machine 10, when the front door 12 is opened, the opening sound differs depending on whether the set value is 7 or any one of 1 to 6. . For this reason, the manager of the game hall or the like can set the set value to 7 depending on whether or not the special opening sound is output, without performing the setting change operation and confirming the set value displayed on the payout number display section 62. You can check whether there is

Furthermore, in the present slot machine 10, which notifies whether or not the set value is 7 by the notification sound for notifying the opening of the front door 12, even when the manager of the game arcade or the like performs the setting change operation, Whether or not the set value is 7 can be notified. For example, when an error such as a hopper empty error occurs, the front door 12 is closed in order to eliminate the error such as replenishing the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 with medals or operating the reset switch 72. It is common to open Under the condition that the error has not been resolved, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the error is output. This is because the normal opening sound or the special opening sound is output by being transmitted to.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The configuration is such that different notifications can be executed depending on whether the set value is 7 or when the set value is any one of 1 to 6. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the set value is 7, and to prompt the user to change the set value to any one of 1 to 6 by performing the setting change operation. As a result, as setting 7, it is possible to set, for example, a winning probability for event sales in which the machine discount is higher than other setting values.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the set value is 7, the special opening sound is output at the timing when the setting change operation is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that 7 has been stored as the setting value, and to reduce the labor required to change the setting value. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is notified that the set value is 7 after the front door 12 is closed. Because it requires work.

It is configured not to notify that the set value is 7 when the setting change operation is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid giving notification every time the reset switch 72 is operated and the set value becomes 7. As a result, it is possible to allow the operator who performs the setting change work to perform the above work without feeling annoyed.

When it is determined that the set value is 7 under the condition that the front door 12 is opened, a special opening sound is output. By adopting such a configuration, the manager of the game parlor can set whether or not the special opening sound is output without performing the setting change operation and confirming the set value displayed on the payout number display section 62. It can be checked whether the value is 7 or not. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether the set value is 7 or not.

When the front door 12 is opened, different opening sounds are output depending on whether the set value is 7 or any one of 1 to 6. Certainly, unlike the present slot machine 10, in the front door command processing, a process for notifying that the set value is 7 is performed, but a process for notifying that the set value is 7 is newly added. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided independently in However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a concern that the processing configuration may become complicated depending on the timing of activating the processing for notification, which of the other processes should be activated with priority, and the like. However, in the present slot machine 10 that notifies whether or not the set value is 7 by the difference in the opening sound of the front door 12, the front door 12 is opened while suppressing the complexity of the processing configuration. and whether the set value is 7 or not.

When the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state, if the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the change in the lighting state of the upper lamp 63 function as the final means of confirming whether the set value is 7 or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the manager or the like of the game arcade forgets to change the set value from 7. In addition, since the upper lamp 63 is configured to return to the lighting state after 30 seconds from being extinguished, there is no need to return the upper lamp 63 to the lighting state. Become.

A power supply box 70 is provided with a reset switch 72 and a setting key insertion hole 73 , the power supply box 70 is provided inside a housing 11 , and the front open side of the housing 11 is covered with a front door 12 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to change the settings unless the front door 12 is opened, and it is possible to suppress the fraudulent change of the set values. .

The setting change operation is terminated by turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF. By adopting a configuration that includes the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the setting key as requirements for the termination operation, it becomes possible to make fraudulent acts difficult, and it is possible to detect that the termination operation has been performed due to noise or the like. It is possible to reduce the chance of erroneous determination. In addition, since the ON edge of the start lever 41 is detected and the OFF edge of the setting key is detected, the operation of the setting key can be performed more reliably than, for example, the configuration in which the OFF signal of the setting key is detected. can be detected.

That is, some conventional setting change operations include detection of the OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a as a requirement for the end operation. In such a configuration, even when the setting key is turned ON as the starting operation and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key insertion hole 73 immediately after that, the requirements for the ending operation are satisfied. Therefore, there is a concern that the requirement to detect the OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a may not contribute to the termination operation from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 which detects the OFF edge of the setting key, when the setting key is turned ON as a starting operation and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key insertion hole 73 immediately after that, the start lever 41 is turned ON. It will be necessary to turn on the setting key again later. Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to change the set value normally, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The setting key OFF waiting process is performed ten times in succession after the 0th bit of the 1st area of the first sensor buffer is set to "1" and the 0th bit of the 0th area is set to "0". The configuration is such that the process ends when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the area. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the OFF edge due to noise or the like.

When the setting key OFF waiting process is completed, that is, when an end operation is performed, the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. It is also possible to configure the setting value in the setting value storage area to be updated when the reset switch 72 is operated. can be changed, there is a concern that setting values may be changed illegally. On the other hand, in the present configuration in which the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area when the end operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the setting value stored in the setting value storage area from being changed without the end operation being performed. It is possible to avoid this, and it is possible to suitably solve the above concerns.

When a change operation is performed, the setting value is saved in the display buffer and the saved setting value is displayed on the payout number display section 62 . With such a configuration, it is possible to relatively easily select the set value intended by the operator who performs the change operation.

When judging the detection of an ON edge or an OFF edge, interrupt waiting processing is performed prior to the judgment, and the configuration is such that the timer interrupt processing is waited. With such a configuration, detection of an ON edge or an OFF edge can be determined based on the latest status of signals from the start detection sensor 41a, reset detection sensor 72a, and setting key detection sensor 73a. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid detecting the ON edge multiple times for one operation of the reset switch 72, and update the set value multiple times for one operation of the reset switch 72. It is possible to avoid malfunctions that may occur.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured to shift to the main game as it is, but all the reels 32L. , 32M, and 32R are slowed down for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then returned to the normal rotation speed, after which the game is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over through changes in the rotational speeds of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured to shift to the main game as it is, but all the reels 32L. , 32M and 32R may be quasi-stopped before proceeding to the main game, or one or two reels may be quasi-stopped before proceeding to the main game.

When it is configured to shift to the main game after pseudo-stopping one or two reels, the pseudo-game is compared to the configuration in which the main game is shifted to after pseudo-stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to quickly shift from to this game. In addition, in such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the transition to the main game by restarting the rotation of the pseudo-stopped reel again, the player will not know whether it is the pseudo game or the main game. can be avoided.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. However, the pseudo game may be terminated without stopping all spinning reels. In the case of such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform the process of starting the rotation of only the pseudo-stopped reels, so it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the transition to the main game by restarting the rotation of the pseudo-stopped reel again, the player will not know whether it is the pseudo game or the main game. can be avoided.

(4) In the above-described first embodiment, when the rotating reel is pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, the same processing as when a pseudo-stop command is generated is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which processing different from that in the case where a command is issued. In this configuration, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to quasi-stop the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the settlement switch 59 is operated to quasi-stop the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. It is possible to change the stop result of the symbol in the case of . As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the settlement switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that the player can select which one to operate.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the spinning reels are immediately pseudo-stopped at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the symbol stop position. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to cause an event such as the symbol to stop at a position shifted by half the symbol from the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, even if the additional lottery is won, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped so that the combination of "red 7" symbols does not stop on the middle line L2. Let

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reel is pseudo-stopped at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the stop position when the pseudo-stop command is generated.

(5) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in the pseudo-game, it is determined that the cancel operation has been performed, but the operation is not limited to the settlement switch 59, and the game Any operation that does not involve the progress of the game after the start of the turn may be performed. Therefore, it may be determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, or it may be determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the second credit input switch 57 is operated. . A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit insertion switch 58 has been operated.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of determining whether or not a cancel operation has been performed, the pseudo-game may be terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without generating a pseudo-stop command.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. It is good also as a structure which carries out a false stop of one. With such a configuration, when one reel is pseudo-stopped, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice to pseudo-stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(7) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo-game is ended as it is, and at least one reel is pseudo-stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under certain circumstances, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. I wish I had.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, one reel is pseudo-stopped while the other two reels are pseudo-gamed without pseudo-stopping. terminate. When the settlement switch 59 is operated while one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated after the other two reels are pseudo-stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated without the other one reel being pseudo-stopped.

(8) In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the reel in the pseudo-game and the rotation speed of the reel in the main game are equal, but the rotation speed of the reel in the pseudo-game and the reel in the main game may be configured to have different rotational speeds.

(9) In the above-described first embodiment, the stop information setting process is performed after the rotation start process is performed. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, or the stop information setting process may be performed after the instruction monitor display process.

(10) In the first embodiment, the slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the additional lottery winning and the slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning are stored in advance. Although the configuration is such that the slide table is referred to when a pseudo stop command is issued, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined that the pseudo-game flag is set at step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if it is a pseudo-game based on the additional lottery winning, the stop symbol number is "15 ' is set, and if the pseudo-game based on the pseudo-game lottery winning, if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, "15" is set as the stop symbol number, and the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel. If it is 32R, "16" is set as the stop symbol number. As the stop symbol number is set, the processing of steps S1107 and S1108 is not performed.

In the case of such a configuration, in addition to being able to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a slide table in advance, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. .

(11) In the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to slide up to 19 symbols in the pseudo game, but as in this game, within a predetermined time after the pseudo stop command is generated It is good also as a structure which carries out a pseudo stop.

However, in the case of such a configuration, if it is configured to set the pseudo-game stop information after the pseudo-stop command is generated, it will not be possible to slide 4 symbols due to the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information. It is possible.

Therefore, in the case of performing the same stop control as in the main game, in the stop information setting process, the stop information for the main game and the stop information for the pseudo-game are set. At this time, the stop information for this game is set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for pseudo-game is set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

In the case of such a configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process will be longer, there is no need to set the stop information for this game when moving from the pseudo-game to the main game, so from the pseudo-game to the main game It is possible to quickly shift to a game.

At this time, when setting the pseudo-game stop information based on the additional lottery winning, the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game is set as the pseudo-game stop information, and the pseudo-game lottery When setting the stop information for pseudo-game based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of loss in this game is set as the stop information for pseudo-game. With such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo-game and the stop information for the main game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the above-described first embodiment, the stop information for pseudo-game is not set in the stop information setting process, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in FIG. 15, it is configured to determine whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S403. And, when the pseudo-game flag is set, in the stop information setting process, it is configured to set the stop information for pseudo-game instead of the stop information for this game. When the pseudo-game flag is not set, in the stop information setting process, it is configured to set the stop information for this game. At this time, when the stop information for pseudo-game is set, that is, when it is after the end of the pseudo-game, the stop information for pseudo-game is rewritten to the stop information for this game. That is, the storage area in which the pseudo-game stop information is set and the storage area in which the stop information for this game is set are the same area. Then, the processing of step S1104 in the stop position determination processing is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the stop information storage area 106b.

At this time, when setting the pseudo-game stop information based on the additional lottery winning, the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game is set as the pseudo-game stop information, and the pseudo-game lottery When setting the stop information for pseudo-game based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of loss in this game is set as the stop information for pseudo-game. With such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo-game and the stop information for the main game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the above-described first embodiment, the slide table for the pseudo game is prepared in advance, but the stop information may be set in the same manner as in the present game.

(14) In the above-described first embodiment, when the "red 7" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2 in the pseudo-game, there is a privilege to notify that the number of net increase is increased. Although it is configured to be awarded, it is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration may be employed as long as a privilege different from the privilege that is granted when a prize such as medal payout is established is granted. Typical examples of benefits different from the benefits given when a prize is established include, for example, performing a setting suggesting effect, and subsequently suggesting a winning combination in the game.

(15) In the above-described first embodiment, a pseudo-game is performed when winning the additional lottery and when winning the pseudo-game lottery, but the conditions for performing the pseudo-game are arbitrary.

For example, in the final game in the notification mode, a pseudo game is performed.

For example, when a rare role is won, a pseudo-game is performed regardless of whether the additional lottery is successful or not.

(16) In the above-described first embodiment, when the additional lottery is won, the pseudo-game is executed in the game round, but it may be configured to perform the pseudo-game in the next game round in which the additional lottery is won. . With such a configuration, it is possible to start the next round of the game after letting the player know that the rare combination has been won, that is, that the additional lottery has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game cycle while waiting for the start of the pseudo-game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the pseudo-game may be executed in a predetermined number of game rounds, such as after five games, instead of the next game round.

(17) In the above-described first embodiment, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured not to notify whether or not it has been added. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which notification is made as to whether or not it has been completed.

(18) In the above-described first embodiment, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, no notification is made as to whether or not the addition has been made. For example, the number of remaining payouts displayed in the game is updated, but the number of remaining payouts displayed in the game may not be updated even if the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced additional number may be notified in the subsequent pseudo-game, or may be notified in the final game in the notification mode.

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and means to notify that it is a pseudo-game It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with That is, it may be configured to provide a pseudo-game lamp that is lit and displayed only during the pseudo-game, or may be configured to notify that the pseudo-game is in progress by swinging the stopped reels up and down in the pseudo-game. .

(20) In the above-described second embodiment, the waiting process is performed by waiting for 100 msec.

(21) In the above-described second embodiment, after determining that the instruction monitor is not being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor, the standby process is performed to wait for 100 msec. After determining that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, after determining the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the position where the standby process is performed is arbitrary. However, the closer to the process of determining whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, the more it is necessary to set a longer time than 100 msec as the waiting time in the waiting process, so the next game round should be started. There is a concern that it may be delayed until it becomes possible.

(22) In the second embodiment, after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. However, after determining that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it became. Further, in such a configuration, after transmitting the operation end command, it may be determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. In other words, the all reels stop completion command may be transmitted after the operation end command is transmitted.

(23) In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state after transmitting the all reel stop completion command. The all reel stop completion command may be transmitted after determining that the switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. At this time, if the operation end command is transmitted after the all reels stop completion command is transmitted, the same effect as the second embodiment can be expected.

(24) In the above-described second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, and all the stop switches 42 to 44 are unoperated. Although the order of determining whether or not the state has occurred and the order of transmitting the all-reel stop completion command and the operation end command are the same, they may be different. For example, after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. On the other hand, the command transmission order is such that the all-reels stop completion command is transmitted after the operation end command. However, if such a configuration is used, there is a concern that the processing configuration may become complicated and the storage capacity may increase.

(25) In the second embodiment, when the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the all reel stop completion command is transmitted, but the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R may be transmitted individually. More specifically, in step S2204, when it is determined that the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are the stop symbol numbers while the middle reel 32M is not the stop symbol number, the left reel stop completion command is issued. A right reel stop completion command is transmitted, and the CPU waits until the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number. Then, when the middle reel 32M becomes the stop symbol number, after transmitting the middle reel stop completion command, the process proceeds to step S2206. In this configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output the third notification sound when all of the left reel stop completion command, the middle reel stop completion command, and the right reel stop completion command are received, the second It can be expected that the same effects as in the embodiment of .

The same applies to the operation end command, and the left operation end command, the middle operation end command, and the right operation end command may be transmitted individually.

(26) In the above second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are transmitted in this game, but in the configuration of performing a pseudo game as in the first embodiment, It may be configured to transmit an all reel stop completion command or an operation end command in a pseudo-game.

(27) In the above-described third embodiment, both the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header are composed of 1 byte, but needless to say, they may be composed of 2 bytes or more.

(28) In the third embodiment, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header are configured to be the same byte, but they may be configured with different bytes. For example, the pseudo-game flag storage area may consist of 1 byte and the header may consist of 2 bytes. Even in the case of such a configuration, when the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area and the predetermined 1 byte of the header information, the above Effects similar to those of the third embodiment can be obtained.

(29) In the above-described third embodiment, the header information to be transmitted in the case of this game is stored in advance, but this configuration will be changed.

In the above-described third embodiment, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the fifth bit of the header are blank, but the fifth bit is configured to function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. Then, when clearing the pseudo-game flag (step S611, see FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "0", and the pseudo-game flag storage area The configuration is such that the fifth bit is set to "1". When the pseudo-game flag is set (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "1" and the fifth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "0". It is configured to be set.

Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be obtained.

(30) In the third embodiment, the information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body, or may be included in the header. . Even in the case of these configurations, creating a body to be sent by adding pseudo-game determination information to body information, or creating a header to be sent by adding pseudo-game determination information to header information In this case, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment are obtained.

(31) In the third embodiment, the header is created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, but the header is created by performing other predetermined calculation such as subtraction. Even so, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

(32) In the above-described third embodiment, the command to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game and the command to be transmitted in the case of a real game are different, but this configuration is changed.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the BB state and the command to be transmitted in the non-BB state may be different. In such a configuration, a BB state storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is in the BB state, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the BB state storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the normal section and the command to be transmitted in the advantageous section may be different. In such a configuration, an advantageous section storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is an advantageous section, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the advantageous section storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the notification mode (AT game) and the command to be transmitted in the non-notification mode (non-AT game) are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a notification mode storage area is provided for storing information indicating whether or not the notification mode is set, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the case of the 3-card game and the command to be transmitted in the case of the 2-card game are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a bet number storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is a three-card game, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and the header information. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, a command to be sent in the case of BB1 state (BB state of 3-card game), a command to be sent in the case of BB2 state (BB state of 2-card game), and a command to be sent in the case of non-BB state and are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a game state storage area is provided for storing information indicating which game state the player is in, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the game state storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment. In order to include information indicating which of the three types of game states is in the header, it is necessary to prepare at least two bits for storing the above information in the game state storage area and the header. be.

It is of course possible to combine the above configurations. For example, by adding the pseudo-game determination information and the information stored in the bet number storage area to the header information, it is possible to determine whether it is a pseudo-game, whether it is a three-piece game or a two-piece game, may be configured to create a header containing Also, by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, a header including whether it is a pseudo-game is created, and by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information, a three-card game and a two-card game.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, when transmitting the rotation start command, the stop command, and the stop command, the header is created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information. Needless to say, when transmitting other commands such as a result command, a header may be created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area may be electrically connected to the output port. In the case of such a configuration, when the pseudo-game flag is set ("1" is stored in the 6th bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the pseudo-game flag is cleared (the If "0" is stored in the 6 bits), an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. FIG. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area functions as information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and outputs a signal indicating a pseudo-game to the outside of the slot machine 10. It is possible to give a function as information used when performing. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the pseudo-game flag storage area, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, the result display is started when the effect switch 67 is operated once. , the above effects can be achieved. Therefore, for example, the result display may be started when the production switch 67 is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times such as 10 times, or the result display may be started when the production switch 67 is pressed for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. may be configured.

(36) In the fourth embodiment, the push display is started when the operation end command is received, but the push display may be started when the all reels stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the pressing display is started when the interval command is received, or the pressing display is started when the state command is received. In any of these configurations, after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the pressing display is started, so that the above-described effects can be obtained.

(37) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the pressing display is started when the operation end command is received. A configuration may be adopted in which the pressing display is started in the middle of the game round. In such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the completion flag is set in step S3601 in the start waiting process shown in FIG. With such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes valid immediately in the same way as when the depression effect is not executed, and when the operation end command is received. If the completion flag is not set, the menu start operation is validated based on the value of the first timer or second timer as described in the fourth embodiment.

(38) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after starting the press display. However, when the operation end command is received, the value of the first timer is set to 1000. Alternatively, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when the all reels stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the value of the first timer is set to 1000 when the interval command is received, or the value of the first timer is set to 1000 when the state command is received. Even with these configurations, only the operation start timing of the first timer changes, so the above-described effects can be achieved.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed. may be set. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the above effects can be achieved.

If the configuration is such that the completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300, and the result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the fourth embodiment can be applied. The display counter used in the embodiment becomes unnecessary.

Also, if it is configured to determine whether or not the value of the second timer is 300 or less in step S4104 of the pressing effect processing shown in FIG. 61, the completion flag becomes unnecessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the value of the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the value of the first timer is 0 when the result display is executed to the end. If the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes effective when the value of the first timer becomes 0, that is, the value of the second timer is not referred to. The configuration is such that the result display process is terminated without setting the timer value to 300. FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation becomes effective when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, becomes 0, so 300 is set to the value of the second timer. After that, the result display process is terminated.

With the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, the second timer does not operate in a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer. It is possible to configure the first timer not to operate when the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

(41) In the above fourth embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with the first timer, and the menu start operation may become effective based on the value of the first timer. 101 may be provided with a first timer, and when the value of the first timer becomes 0, the configuration may be such that the time elapsed command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . With such a configuration, the display control device 81 is configured to end the pressing effect process and enable the subsequent menu start operation when the completion flag is set when the time elapsed command is received. When the completion flag is not set when the command is received, when the value of the second timer becomes 0, the depression effect processing is terminated and the subsequent menu start operation is enabled. With such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, it is possible for the main controller 101 side to define the start timing of the press display and the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance of malfunction.

The timing for setting the value of the first timer to 1000 may be set when it is determined in step S3304 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, or in step S3306 all may be set when it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. Alternatively, it may be set at another timing such as after transmission of the operation end command.

(42) In the above fourth embodiment, the display of results to be executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display to be executed when the additional lottery is not won are executed to the end. Although the required time is the same, it goes without saying that different configurations may be used. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after displaying the result to the end, when the menu start operation is validated based on the value of the second timer, the result It is possible to set a constant time from when the display is executed to the end until the menu start operation becomes effective.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18000 in the pressing effect process. 18000 may be set to end the pressing effect process. With such a configuration, the customer waiting effect is started approximately 180 seconds after the pressing effect process ends.

(45) In the fourth embodiment, the menu start operation is enabled immediately when the pressing effect is not executed. However, even when the pressing effect is not executed, the menu start operation is effective after about 10 seconds. It is good also as composition which becomes. As a configuration for realizing such a configuration, for example, when it is determined that an operation end command has been received in the operation end command process shown in FIG. is configured to set In step S3505, 1000 is not set to the value of the first timer. Then, when it is determined that the effect flag is not set in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer has become zero. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first timer has become 0, the processing shown after step S3603 is performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 when the menu start operation is performed. A configuration in which the menu screen is always displayed on the menu screen display section may be employed.

(47) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the effect switch 67 has the function of advancing the pressing effect and the function of displaying the menu screen. It may be configured to be provided separately from the switch 67 .

(48) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and game history clear. is. Therefore, a configuration including a payout table and volume adjustment may be used, or a configuration including only volume adjustment may be used. It goes without saying that in a configuration having only one type of game information to be displayed, the game information may be directly displayed instead of the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated.

(49) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the success or failure of the additional lottery is notified in the pressing effect. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the winning combination is notified.

(50) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration using the subtracting timer has been described, but it goes without saying that the adding timer may be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the first timer is set to 1000, subtraction of the first timer is started, but this configuration is changed. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at an arbitrary timing, such as the timing at which a start command is generated, before the pressing display is started. Then, in step S3505 (see FIG. 55) of operation end command processing, the configuration is such that subtraction of the first timer is permitted. Even with such a configuration, the operation and effect described in the fourth embodiment can be achieved because the first timer is activated when the process of step S3505 is performed.

(52) In the above fourth embodiment, when a bet number command indicating that the number of bets has become 1 or more is received during the pressing effect process, the pressing effect process is ended and the start command waiting process is started. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In such a configuration, the press display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 ends at the timing when the player bets medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when the pressing effect is executed has been focused and explained from this point of view. It is clear that the same effects as those described above can be obtained with respect to the timing of transition to . This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby timer has become 0 after the pressing effect process is finished.

(54) In the above fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode. The configuration may be such that the end screen is displayed after the stop.

(55) In the above fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode, but at least one reel stops. With a configuration in which the end screen is displayed before, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be obtained. This is because it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of time for displaying the end screen.

At this time, if the end screen is displayed after the two reels are stopped, it is possible to grasp whether or not the bell wins at least when the bell is won in the order of pressing. As the number of sheets, it is possible to display the number of sheets difference at the end of the notification mode.

(56) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends with the number of difference 2400. In addition, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends with the number of interval games 1500. may be configured to perform

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the notification mode is terminated according to the number of games played in the notification mode. good too. Even in such a configuration, if the end screen is displayed not based on the reception of the start command, but based on the reception of the lottery result command indicating that the pressing order bell has been won, the above-described fifth step can be performed. It is possible to achieve the effects described in the embodiment.

(58) In the fifth embodiment, only the display control device 81 is configured to grasp the number of post-notification games. Alternatively, both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 may be configured to grasp the number of post-notification games.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, when winning the extra lottery, the number of games to be added is notified in the pseudo game, and the number of games to be added is notified in the resurrection effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the additional number of games is notified only in the resurrection effect.

(60) In the above-described fifth embodiment, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is performed. Any configuration may be used as long as it can notify the user of the fact. For example, the notification mode may end after 50 games per set, and a set number addition lottery (revival lottery or continuation lottery) may be performed in a predetermined game such as when shifting to the notification mode or when one set ends.

(61) In the above-described fifth embodiment, as conditions for determining the end of the notification mode with the number of difference 2400, the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the number of difference is greater than 2200. The setting of conditions is arbitrary. Only the number of remaining games may be set as a condition, or only the difference number may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, when the end of the notification mode with the difference number of 2400 is confirmed, the ending effect is started from the next game, but the timing of starting the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be started from the next game in which the difference number reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be started from the next game in which the difference number reaches 2250. - 特許庁That is, it is sufficient to start with the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode is performed. It is good also as a structure which performs the assistance production of.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends, the advantageous section ends, and the event in which the advantageous section ends under the chance mode does not occur. A configuration in which a termination event occurs is also possible. For example, in addition to the lottery for transition to the notification mode under the chance mode, an end lottery for the end of the advantageous section may be performed, or the transition to the chance mode may be performed after the termination of the notification mode.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode is not shifted from the normal section to the notification mode, but the configuration may be such that the transition is made to the notification mode.

(66) In the above-described fifth embodiment, if the lottery for switching to the chance mode is not won, the suggestive orb or the confirmed orb is displayed. A suggested orb may be displayed when the transfer lottery is won.

(67) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggestive orb or the fixed orb. , the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be obtained. As the advantageous information, for example, in a configuration having a plurality of chance modes with different winning probabilities of the transition lottery to the notification mode, a configuration that suggests or notifies the transition destination of the chance mode, the number of ceiling games under the chance mode (transition game number) can be set, a typical example is a configuration that suggests or notifies the number of ceiling games to be set.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the fixed jewel is displayed after the 6th game in the normal section, but the fixed jewel is also displayed with a predetermined probability in the 1st to 5th games in the normal section. may be configured. In other words, the configuration may be such that the accuracy of setting suggestion increases according to the number of staying games in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestive orb and the fixed orb are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of display is arbitrary. In addition, although the suggestive orb and the fixed orb are hidden after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, they may be displayed continuously until the chance mode is entered. Furthermore, in a configuration that can display a menu screen, when a game history is selected, it may be configured to display suggested orbs and fixed orbs that have been displayed up to that point.

(70) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the end screen is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the number of medals won. Alternatively, only the number of medals obtained may be displayed. In addition, the indication that the notification mode is terminated is not limited to the actual character notation such as "notification mode terminated", and the termination of the notification mode can be indicated by a predetermined action such as a crying waving of a predetermined character. may be notified.

(71) In the fifth embodiment, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of won medals is not changed thereafter. The display of the number of won medals may be changed according to the game result of the game (whether or not a prize is established). Also, the display of the number of medals obtained may be changed in the normal section as well.

(72) In the above-described sixth embodiment, the left-center-right bell 1 and the left-center-right bell 2 are provided as winning combinations in which the bell winning is established in the operation order of left-center-right. It goes without saying that it is good. The same applies to the left-right middle bell, the middle left-right bell, the middle right-left bell, the right left middle bell, and the right middle left bell.

(73) In the sixth embodiment, for example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order of middle left and right, the winning combination is the middle left right bell 1, the middle left right bell 2, or the first special bell. Although the configuration is such that 3 small winnings are established even if the winning combination is the same, the configuration may be such that the mode of the bell winnings established in accordance with the winning combination is different. For example, when the middle left and right bell 1 is won, the small winning combination 3 is won, when the middle left and right bell 2 is won, the small winning combination 4 is won, and when the first special bell is won, the small winning combination is won. The configuration is such that one prize is established. Even with such a configuration, the fact that the bell win is established in which eight medals are paid out does not change, so the same effects as those of the sixth embodiment can be achieved.

(74) In the sixth embodiment described above, there are six types of operation orders that can establish a bell prize, but any type of operation order can be used. For example, there may be three types depending on which of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, or two types depending on whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Alternatively, for example, there may be four types of middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. In addition to the operation sequence described above, if it is also required to operate a predetermined stop switch at a predetermined timing, more than six types of push order bells can be set.

(75) In the sixth embodiment, while the left-center-right bells 1 and 2 and the left-right-middle bells 1 and 2 are included in the push order group 1, the winning combination that establishes the bell prize in the above operation order is included in the push order group. 2, but the winning combination of all the operation orders that can establish the bell winning is put into the pushing order group 1, and the winning combination of the predetermined operating order that can establish the bell winning is put into the pushing order group. 2, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the sixth embodiment.

(76) In the sixth embodiment, the winning combinations belonging to the pushing order group 1 have the same winning probability, but the winning combinations belonging to the pushing order group 1 may have different winning probabilities. For example, in the pressing order group 1, the point value PV of the left-center-right bells 1, 2 and the left-right-middle bells 1, 2 is 1960, and the point value PV of the other pressing order bells is 1990. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the configuration is such that the operation order is always notified when the push order group 2 is won, the operation order is not notified under the notification mode A and the notification mode B. It is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of establishment of bell prizes depending on the order. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in profit between the players due to the amount of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and the players can enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

(77) In the sixth embodiment described above, when winning the push order group 2 in the notification mode, the operation order is always notified, but the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability such as 90%. may be Even with such a configuration, when the operation order is not notified under the notification mode A and the notification mode B, the difference in the frequency of establishment of the bell prize depending on the operation order can be reduced.

When the operation order is not reported in the situation where the pressing order group 2 is won, it is desirable to display on the auxiliary display section 65 "x?" indicating that the operation order is based on the center or right. .

(78) In the sixth embodiment, by making a determination according to the push order group in the navigation determination process, when the operation order is not notified under the notification mode, the operation order of the stop switch 42 to Although the configuration is such that the establishment probability of winning a bell is equal even if 44 is operated, this configuration will be changed.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing another example of the lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 90, in order to facilitate comparison with the sixth embodiment, the first to fourth special bells are described and 0 (not winning) is set as the point value PV. These are not required.

1980 is set as the point value PV for the left-center-right bell 1, left-center right bell 2, left-right middle bell 1, and left-right middle bell 2. A point value PV of 4070 is set for the middle right left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, right left middle bell 2, right middle left bell 1, and right middle left bell 2.

Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left right middle bell 1, left right middle bell 2 are the left correct bells, and middle left right bell 1, middle left right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2 are middle right bells. Then, right-left center bell 1, right-left center bell 2, right-center left bell 1, and right-center left bell 2 are defined as right correct bells. At this time, the winning probability of the left correct bell is 7920/65535, the winning probability of the middle correct bell is 16280/65535, and the winning probability of the right correct bell is 16280/65535.

In the notification mode A, when the left correct bell is won, navigation is determined with a probability of 0/7920; when the middle correct bell is won, navigation is determined with a probability of 8360/16280; It is determined to navigate with a probability of 8360/min.

With such a configuration, the number of values for determining that navigation is not performed is 7920 regardless of whether the left correct bell, middle correct bell, or right correct bell is correct. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified under the notification mode, the establishment probability of winning the bell becomes equal even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in any operation order.

In the notification mode B, when the left correct bell is won, navigation is determined with a probability of 1920/7920; when the middle correct bell is won, navigation is determined with a probability of 10280/16280; It is determined to navigate with a probability of 10280 minutes.

With such a configuration, the number of values for determining that navigation is not performed is 6000 regardless of whether the left correct bell, middle correct bell, or right correct bell is correct. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified under the notification mode, the establishment probability of winning the bell becomes equal even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in any operation order.

(79) In the sixth embodiment, the configuration has three types of notification mode A, notification mode B, and notification mode C with different navigation rates. Alternatively, any two of the above three types may be used. Further, it may be configured to have four or more notification modes with different navigation rates.

(80) In the sixth embodiment described above, when shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, the configuration is such that the notification mode is started from the notification mode A. However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. Or, it may be configured to start from the notification mode C.

(81) In the sixth embodiment, when the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, the promotion effect is always performed. However, the promotion effect may be performed at a predetermined probability.

(82) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion lottery is performed when the bell prize is established in the game round in which the promotion effect is performed, but the promotion lottery is performed regardless of whether the bell prize is established may be In addition, it may be configured such that a point lottery is performed when a bell prize is established in a game cycle in which promotion effects are performed, and the navigation rate is increased when a predetermined point value is reached.

(83) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, the promotion lottery can be performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an additional lottery can be performed.

(84) In the sixth embodiment, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is performed. Instead of or in addition to this, a promotion lottery may be performed. .

(85) In the sixth embodiment, "???" is displayed in the promotion effect and the player is allowed to select one operation order from six operation orders, but this configuration is changed. do.

For example, the stop switch to be operated first is displayed as "1?", "?1?" .

Alternatively, the stop switch to be operated last is displayed as "3?", "?3?" do.

(86) In the sixth embodiment, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section and the chance mode, the result is invalidated even if the transition lottery is won. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, the transition lottery is configured to be performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the winning probability of the transition lottery is made high, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch is set. When the switch 44 is operated for the first time, the winning probability of the shift lottery is made low.

For example, the transition lottery is performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the transition lottery is performed, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is first operated. If it is operated, the transfer lottery is not performed.

(87) In the sixth embodiment described above, when the bell is won in the pressing order, either the bell prize with which 8 medals are paid out or the prize with which 1 medal is paid out is always established. However, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order that does not allow the bell winning to be established, the configuration may be such that none of the winnings is established.

(88) In the seventh embodiment, when 700 3-card games are played without winning the transfer lottery under the chance mode, the transition to the notification mode is made from the next game. In the same way as in the case of winning , it may be configured to shift to the notification mode after the confrontation performance of 3 to 5 games. Further, when 697 3-card games are played without winning the transfer lottery under the chance mode, the transition to the notification mode may be made after the 3-game confrontation performance.

(89) In the seventh embodiment, when the number of missing games is 1 or more, the number of missing games is added to the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In such a configuration, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode ends in the middle of the confrontation production, and if the additional lottery is won, part of the number of additional games will be under the confrontation production. to be digested.

(90) In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games in the relevant game is added to the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In other words, after the end of the confrontation effect, the number of additional games may be added to the value of the counter for the number of transition games.

(91) In the above seventh embodiment, when a rare role is won, the confrontation effect lottery is performed regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won. It is good also as composition which performs confrontation production lottery.

(92) In the seventh embodiment, the number of confrontation games is set to any value between 3 and 5, but the value to be obtained is arbitrary. A configuration in which only 3 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, or a configuration in which any value from 2 to 10 is acquired may be employed.

(93) In the above-described seventh embodiment, the value acquired in the confrontation game number lottery is the same in the case where the additional lottery is won and in the case where the additional lottery is not won. Different configurations are possible.

For example, if the additional lottery is won, one of the values 3 to 5 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, and if the addition lottery is not won, the number of confrontation games is obtained from 5 to 7. It is configured to acquire the value of In the case of such a configuration, if the showdown performance continues for six games or more, it is determined that the additional lottery will not be won. can be suitably alleviated.

(94) In the seventh embodiment, when winning the confrontation effect lottery, a predetermined effect is performed in all the games corresponding to the number of confrontation games. A configuration in which a game exists is also possible. For example, when 7 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, the 1st game and the 3rd game are performed with a stimulating effect that is completed in 1 game, the 2nd game and the 4th game are not performed, and the 5th to 7th games are performed. It is configured to perform a confrontation production in the eyes.

(95) In the seventh embodiment, the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed in the notification mode is not changed during the game, but it may be changed during the game.

(96) In the above-described seventh embodiment, as an auxiliary effect for informing whether or not an additional lottery has been won, a confrontation effect and a pseudo game are provided, but a structure without the pseudo game may be used.

(97) It goes without saying that in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the confrontational effect, an auxiliary effect that can be completed in one game may be provided. At this time, whether or not the auxiliary effect is to be executed may be determined by the display control device 81 side since there is no shortage of the number of games as in the case of the confrontation effect.

(98) In the seventh embodiment, the presence or absence of winning of the additional lottery is notified by the showdown performance in the notification mode, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, in a configuration in which a stock lottery is performed in the notification mode, whether or not the stock lottery is won is notified by a showdown effect.

For example, as notification modes, the notification mode A and the notification mode B in which the number of games that can be played in the notification mode A can be added with a high probability are provided, and in the case that the transfer lottery is won in the notification mode A, the notification mode B is selected. can be played a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, and then returned to the notification mode A.

(99) In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which only the confrontation effect was provided as the effect performed over a plurality of games. Needless to say, it may be configured. In such a configuration, for example, when the effects A and B are provided as effects performed over three games, and the effects C and D are provided as effects performed over four games, the effects are performed on the main controller 101 side. The effect period (3 or 4) to be executed may be determined, and the display control device 81 side may determine which effect is to be executed according to the effect period.

(100) In the seventh embodiment, when the display control device 81 side decides to execute the defeat showdown effect in the chance mode, and the 700th three-card game occurs during the defeat showdown effect, Needless to say, the configuration may be such that the defeat showdown presentation is switched to the victory showdown presentation.

(101) In the above seventh embodiment, in the chance mode, when the transfer lottery is won in the middle of the defeat showdown presentation, the defeat showdown presentation is ended in the middle and the victory showdown presentation is started from the beginning. However, the content of the effect to be executed may be arbitrary as long as the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed is changed in the middle. Therefore, in the game round in which the winning command is received, that is, in the game round in which the transition lottery is won, control is not performed to output the confrontation effect start moving image data to the auxiliary display portion 65, but to output the confrontation effect midway moving image data to the auxiliary display portion 65. may be performed.

(102) In the eighth embodiment, in the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated when the 3-card game is played. The value of the navigation counter may be updated in any of the above cases. With such a configuration, the value of the navigation counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data. In the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the pressing order bell is won, or the navigation counter value may be updated when winning a combination different from the pressing order bell such as replay. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(103) In the eighth embodiment, in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated regardless of whether the 3-card game or the 2-card game is performed. Alternatively, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when a three-card game is played. With such a configuration, the value of the navigation counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data. In the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the pressing order bell is won, or the navigation counter value may be updated when winning another combination different from the pressing order bell, such as replay. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Alternatively, in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the navigation lottery is lost.

(104) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter update process is performed in the game section process, that is, the navigation counter update process is performed at the end of the game. It is good also as a structure performed by.

(105) In the eighth embodiment, in the navigation counter updating process, the navigation counter value is updated not only in the chance mode but also in the notification mode. However, the navigation counter value is updated only in the chance mode. may be configured. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not it is the chance mode is added before step S80201, and if it is the chance mode, the process proceeds to step S80201, and if it is not the chance mode but the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S80203. and With such a configuration, the frequency of notification of the operation order is higher than 50% only in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, and in the second and subsequent pressing order bell winning games, the notification is performed. As long as the mode is not shifted to B, the operation order will be notified at a rate of 50%.

(106) In the eighth embodiment, by using the navigation counter, the operation order is notified more frequently in the first push order bell winning game after the shift to the notification mode. However, this configuration is changed. . When shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, the first flag is set. In the navigation determination process, it is determined in step S80404 whether or not the first time flag is set, and if the first time flag is set, the first time flag is cleared and the navigation flag is set. With such a configuration, the frequency of notification of the operation order is higher than 50% only in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, and in the second and subsequent pressing order bell winning games, the notification is performed. As long as the mode is not shifted to B, the operation order will be notified at a rate of 50%.

(107) In the eighth embodiment, by using the navigation counter, the frequency of notification of the order of operation is increased in the first push order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, but this configuration is changed. . In the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the player wins the navigation lottery with a probability higher than 50%, such as 80%. If you do not do so, you will win the navigation lottery with a probability of 50%.

(108) In the above-described eighth embodiment, the navigation lottery with a winning ratio of 50% is performed, but the ratio of winning the navigation lottery is arbitrary.

(109) In the eighth embodiment, the configuration is such that a navigation lottery with a winning rate of 50% is performed, but this configuration is changed. A loop counter for looping two values of 0 and 1 is provided, and the value of the loop counter is updated when winning the pressing order bell. When the loop counter is updated before the navigation determination process, when the value of the loop counter is 1, the operation order is notified, and when the value of the loop counter is 0, the operation order is notified. It is configured not to notify. In the case where the loop counter is updated at the end of the game, when the value of the loop counter is 0, the order of operations is notified, and when the value of the loop counter is 1, the order of operations is not notified. and Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the operation order is notified at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in the above configuration, since the operation order can always be notified in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the notification frequency of the operation order can be reduced in the first pressing order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode. When limited to the function of increasing, the configuration relating to the navigation counter in the eighth embodiment is not required. When the configuration described above is combined with the configuration related to the navigation counter, the configuration related to the navigation counter functions as a remedy when eight games or more are not won in the pressing order bell.

(110) In the eighth embodiment, in the navigation determination process, the value of the navigation counter is checked when the navigation lottery is lost. good too.

(111) In the above eighth embodiment, when a lottery for transition to the notification mode is won, the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode A. However, when the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode A, It is good also as a structure with the case where it transfers to the alerting|reporting mode B from a mode.

(112) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter is initialized when the operation order is notified in the notification mode, but the navigation counter may not be initialized.

(113) In the above-described eighth embodiment, the operation order is notified when the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, but any value of the navigation counter may be used when notifying the operation order. However, if the value of the navigation counter is reduced, the navigation rate in the information mode A will increase, and if the value of the navigation counter is increased, there is a chance that the player will run out of medals in the information mode. will lead to an increase in

(114) In the eighth embodiment, if a rare role is won during the 50th game after shifting to the notification mode, a promotion lottery is conducted. be. The promotion lottery may be held until the 30th game after shifting to the notification mode, or until the notification mode A ends after shifting to the notification mode. In addition, for example, when a specified condition such as a case where a bell prize can be established in a push-order bell-winning game in which the operation order is not notified, is satisfied, the number of games until a predetermined number of games such as 10 games elapses. It is good also as a period during which a promotion lottery is performed between.

(115) In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the additional lottery is not won, a total of 100 games can be played in the notification mode A and the notification mode B, but this configuration is changed.

For example, if the promotion lottery is not won, 100 games can be played under the notification mode A, and if the promotion lottery is won, the notification mode A ends in the game, but the game is played 100 times under the notification mode B. It is a configuration that allows the game to be played.

For example, when the promotion lottery is not won, 100 games can be played under the notification mode A, and when the promotion lottery is won, the game is played 100 times under the notification mode A regardless of the timing of winning the promotion lottery. After the game is played, the game is shifted to the notification mode B, and 100 games can be played under the notification mode B.例文帳に追加

(116) The sixth embodiment may be appropriately combined with the eighth embodiment. That is, the pattern arrangement and prize mode in the sixth embodiment may be applied, or the configuration may be such that three types of notification modes with different navigation rates are provided as in the sixth embodiment. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the promotion lottery is performed when the rare combination is won, but the promotion lottery may be performed when the operation order is not notified in the pressing order bell winning game.

(117) In the ninth embodiment, the liquid crystal control device 251 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65. However, the liquid crystal control device 251 controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65. It is good also as a structure which drive-controls and the production|presentation control apparatus 201 drives and controls the upper lamp 63. FIG. Alternatively, the liquid crystal control device 251 may drive and control the auxiliary display section 65 , and the effect control device 201 may drive and control the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 .

(118) In the ninth embodiment, the VDP 253 performs the BGM output process. In the case where the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 performs the processing, the layer may be provided in the RAM of the liquid crystal control device 251 .

(119) In the ninth embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels to be provided is arbitrary.

(120) In the ninth embodiment, seven layers are provided, but the number of layers to be provided is arbitrary.

(121) In the ninth embodiment, the layer for CH4 has been explained, but a layer may be provided for all channels CH0 to CH31, or for some channels such as CH4 to CH13. It is good also as a structure which provides a layer with respect to it. Alternatively, the number of layers may be different for each channel, for example, the CH4 layer may be composed of seven layers, and the CH0 layer may be composed of four layers.

(122) In the ninth embodiment, when a rare role is won, the volume of the BGM is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB, but the amount of reduction is arbitrary. For example, if the volume of BGM is reduced to -12.0 dB, that is, about a quarter of the volume, the sixth layer of the CH4 layer should be set to "32" instead of "64". good. Also, for example, when the volume of the BGM is reduced to -2.5 dB, that is, about three-fourths of the volume, the sixth layer of the CH4 layer is set to "96" instead of "64". do it.

(123) In the above ninth embodiment, when a rare role winning is established, the rare role winning sound is output at 0.0 dB. , BGM can be output at a volume higher than that of BGM, so that the above effects can be expected.

(124) In the ninth embodiment, when the rare role winning is established, the BGM volume is lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. is established, the BGM volume may be lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. Further, the degree of reduction in the volume of the BGM may be different between when a rare role win is established and when a general prize is established.

(125) In the ninth embodiment, two kinds of rare hands, cherry and watermelon, are set as rare hands, but it goes without saying that three or more kinds of hands may be set as rare hands. At this time, the output time of the rare role winning sound may be different for each role, or the output time of the rare role winning sound may be different depending on the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege.

For example, a rare role A that wins the lottery for transition to the notification mode with a probability of about 1/2, and a rare role B and a rare role C that wins the lottery for transition to the notification mode with a probability of about 1/3. and, when the rare role A win is established, the rare role winning sound is output for 2000 msec, and when the rare role B winning or the rare role C winning is established, the rare role winning sound is output for 1000 msec. good too.

(126) In the above ninth embodiment, when the watermelon prize is established and when the cherry prize is established, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after the output of the rare role winning sound is completed. Although the configuration is such that the time up to is different, the configuration may be the same.

Further, when three or more types of roles are set as rare roles, the return time until the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB may be different for each role, or the return may be made according to the degree of expectation for the grant of the privilege. It is good also as composition with which time differs.

For example, a rare role A that wins the lottery for transition to the notification mode with a probability of about 1/2, and a rare role B and a rare role C that wins the lottery for transition to the notification mode with a probability of about 1/3. and, when the rare role A wins, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after 800 msec from the end of outputting the rare role winning sound, and the rare role B wins or the rare role wins. When the C prize is established, the volume of the BGM may return to 0.0 dB after 500 msec from the end of the output of the rare combination prize sound.

(127) In the ninth embodiment, the BGM fade-in control is started after the output of the rare winning sound is finished. A configuration may be adopted in which fade-in control of BGM is started so as to return to 0.0 dB.

(128) In the ninth embodiment, the rare combination winning, the output time of the winning sound, and the fade-in control time correspond to each other, but this configuration is changed.

For example, when a rare role winning is established in the chance mode, if the lottery for transition to the notification mode is won, the winning sound A is output at a rate of about 90%, and the winning sound B is output at a rate of about 10%. configuration. Transition to the notification mode When the lottery is not won, the prize winning sound B is output at a rate of about 90%, and the prize winning sound A is output at a rate of about 10%. The prize winning sound A is output for 2000 msec, and when the output of the prize winning sound A ends, the BGM volume returns to 0.0 dB after 800 msec. The winning sound B is output for 1000 msec, and when the output of the winning sound B ends, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after 500 msec.

In the case of the above configuration, since the degree of expectation for shifting to the notification mode changes depending on which one of the winning sound A and the winning sound B is output, it is not possible to grasp which winning sound has been output. In this case, there is concern that the expectation for the transition to the notification mode may be lost, and the interest in the game may be reduced. However, when outputting winning sound A or winning sound B, the volume of the BGM is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB, and when the output of winning sound A or winning sound B ends, the BGM volume is reduced to -. In the configuration of fading in from 6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, it is possible to preferably solve the above concern, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(129) In the ninth embodiment, the processing configuration related to the output of BGM has been described, but it goes without saying that the processing configuration may be applied to the output of other sounds such as sound effects and jingles. do not have.

(130) In the ninth embodiment, the fade-in control is started when the output of the rare combination winning sound is finished, but the fade-in control may be started at another timing.

For example, when the player performs a game start operation in the power saving mode, fade-in control is started.

Briefly, when shifting to the power saving mode, "64" is set in the second layer of the CH4 layer. As a result, in the power saving mode, the BGM volume is lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. When the game start operation is performed under such a situation, fade-in control is started to periodically update the volume value of the second layer of the CH4 layer to 128.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player who is about to start a new game will be surprised by the sudden increase in the volume of the BGM and lose his or her desire to play the game. Improvement can be achieved.

The game start operation includes a bet operation by directly inserting medals or operating the first to third credit insert switches 56 to 58, and a start command generation operation by operating the start lever 41 after the bet operation. Alternatively, the fade-in control may be started when a bet operation is performed, or the fade-in control may be started when a start command operation is performed. When the fade-in control is started when the bet operation is performed, the fade-in control can be performed until the start command operation is performed, so that the background music is played before the game round is started. can be returned to 0.0 dB.

(131) In the above-described ninth embodiment, the rare combination has a function of performing a lottery for transition to the notification mode and an additional lottery. Any configuration may be used as long as it has a function of granting a predetermined privilege other than the privilege associated with establishment or expecting the granting of a predetermined privilege. Therefore, in a so-called A-type slot machine, a combination that can be won in duplicate with BB may be a rare combination. Then, when such a rare winning combination is established, a rare winning combination winning sound may be output, and the BGM output may be reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB.

(132) In the tenth embodiment, when the output of the story part ends, the music part is repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends. However, the story part is repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends. Needless to say, it may be configured as follows.

(133) In the tenth embodiment, the value of the data number storage area is changed to 1 when the error is resolved. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of is not changed. With such a configuration, when the error is resolved, the ending movie can be resumed from where it was interrupted.

(134) In the tenth embodiment, the data used for executing the ending movie is divided and stored in eight files of story part 1 to story part 7 and music part. The number of files is arbitrary. For example, it may be divided and stored into two files, a story part and a music part, or may be divided and stored into four files, three story parts and one music part. If the number of files to be split is increased, the time required to play one file can be shortened, so the length of the overlapping ending movie will be shortened when the error is resolved. becomes possible.

(135) In the tenth embodiment, the data used for executing the ending movie is divided and stored in eight files of story part 1 to story part 7 and music part. A configuration may be used in which one file is stored without the However, in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to set the number of seconds pointer that indicates the elapsed time from the start of the ending movie. It is desirable to have a configuration that resumes

(136) In the tenth embodiment, the file of story part 3 and the file of story part 6 are composed of playback data and pause data, but it goes without saying that they may be composed of playback data only. Nor. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which temporary stop data is provided in a file other than the above.

(137) In the tenth embodiment, the ending movie is started from the next game when the finish conditions are satisfied, but the conditions for starting the ending movie are arbitrary. For example, the ending movie may be started when the difference number under the notification mode exceeds a predetermined number such as 1000, or the number of games under the notification mode exceeds a predetermined number such as 100 games. The ending movie may be started when

(138) In the tenth embodiment described above, the conditions for finishing the race are that the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2400 in the notification mode, and that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 3000 in the notification mode. However, it is also possible to set only the fact that the difference in the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 2400 under the notification mode as the completion condition, or to set only the fact that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 3000 under the notification mode as the completion condition. may Also, other conditions may be set as finish conditions.

(139) In the tenth embodiment, when the error is resolved, the restart operation is notified, but the restart operation may not be notified.

(140) In the tenth embodiment, the ending movie is resumed when the error is resolved and the restart operation is performed. However, the ending movie is resumed when the error is resolved. may be configured. For example, in the case of a hopper empty error, there are an operation of pressing the reset switch 72 and an operation of closing the front door 12, which are performed after medals are supplied, as error elimination operations performed by the manager of the game arcade or the like. Therefore, in the case where the ending movie is resumed when the error is resolved, the ending movie may be resumed when the reset switch 72 is pressed, or the front door 12 may be closed. The ending movie may be resumed when the state is reached.

(141) In the tenth embodiment, the restart operation is set to generate a command to start the next game. is. Therefore, operating the effect switch in the configuration provided with the effect switch, that is, an operation not involved in the progress of the game round may be set as the restart operation, or betting medals, etc., which is involved in the progress of the game round. You may set the operation to resume as the resume operation.

(142) In the tenth embodiment, the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the elapsed time are set as the advancing conditions. Alternatively, only the number of games in the advantageous section may be set. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, in a configuration in which the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section and the number of games in the advantageous section are provided as end conditions for the advantageous section, the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section and the number of games in the advantageous section and were set as carry-over conditions. The moving-up condition may be any configuration as long as it sets a condition corresponding to the end condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, if only the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section is provided as the end condition of the advantageous section, only the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section may be set as the advance condition.

(143) In the tenth embodiment, when the ending movie is started, the data of the story part 1 to the story part 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output without being based on the player's operation. However, the predetermined data may be output based on the player's operation.

For example, an ending movie is composed of story part A, story part B, and music part. Data for outputting story part A is divided into three files of story part 1 to story part 3 and stored. Data for outputting story part B is divided into four files of story part 4 to story part 7 and stored. Data for outputting music parts are stored in one file. The story part A is repeatedly output until the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2240 after the completion condition is satisfied. That is, the data of story parts 1 to 3 are continuously output without being based on the player's operation, and when the final data of story part 3 is output, the data of story part 1 is returned. When the number difference in the advantageous section reaches 2240, the story part B is repeatedly output until the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2350 from the next game, that is, due to the generation of the start command for the next game. do. Then, when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2350, the music part is repeatedly output from the next game, that is, until the advantageous section ends due to the generation of the start command of the next game.

Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the tenth embodiment can be obtained.

(144) In the tenth embodiment, when the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is four or more, the ending movie is started from the beginning of the file next to the file in which the error occurred. , the number of errors to move to the next file is arbitrary.

(145) In the tenth embodiment, the ending movie effect is used. However, it is possible to use a specific AT time effect that starts under a predetermined condition, a continuous effect effect, a big bonus effect, or the like. For example, as an episode AT (episode bonus), an AT that reproduces a music part after executing a 200-second movie production of story parts 1 to 7, and the number of the story part that was interrupted when the episode AT was interrupted due to an error It is also possible to play back the performance from .

(146) In the tenth embodiment, the ending effect is interrupted when an error occurs. You can make it progress with . When displaying the error screen on the upper layer, it is possible to display the error information on a black screen that completely obscures the ending effect, making it appear that the ending effect is suspended. Alternatively, the error information may be displayed on a translucent gray transmissive screen so that the progress of the ending effect can be recognized through the transmissive screen. In that case, the file number where the error occurred is memorized, the ending effect itself progresses in the background, and when the error is resolved, it is determined where to start playback based on the file number where the error occurred. do. By doing this, if an error screen is displayed on the upper layer of the effect image when an error occurs, the error screen is displayed in the same way when an error occurs during the ending effect, thereby standardizing the error processing. can be achieved. Specifically, in the event of a door open error, control should be performed using the same common processing as for errors such as displaying the "Door is open" display on the upper layer of the liquid crystal while the effect at that time is progressing. will be able to

(147) In the eleventh embodiment described above, the configuration having seven levels of winning probabilities has been described, but the number of winning probabilities to be provided is arbitrary.

(148) In the eleventh embodiment, different notification is performed depending on whether the set value is one of 1 to 6 or when the set value is 7, but the configuration is limited to not to be It may be configured to perform different notifications depending on whether the set value is 4 or when the set value is 1 to 3 or 5 to 7, or the set value is any of 1 to 3. A configuration may be adopted in which different notification is performed depending on whether the set value is one of 4 to 7. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs different alert|reporting for every setting value.

(149) In the eleventh embodiment, the opening sound for notifying that the front door 12 is open when the set value is any one of 1 to 6 and when the set value is 7 However, instead of or in addition to this, it may be configured to have a different notification sound for notifying a predetermined error such as a spare tank full error, or to have a different predetermined sound such as a medal payout sound. . Further, in place of or in addition to the sound, a configuration may be adopted in which a display is made on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like, or a configuration in which the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63, the lower panel, or the like is changed.

(150) In the eleventh embodiment, although the content of the notification that the front door 12 is open is the same for the normal opening sound and the special opening sound, the sex of the output voice is different. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the sex of the voice is the same but the content of the notification is different, or a configuration in which the content of the notification and the sex of the voice are both different. For example, the normal opening sound indicates that the front door 12 is open, such as "The door is open." 7.

It goes without saying that the opening of the front door 12 may be notified by a predetermined music, and different music may be output for the normal opening sound and the special opening sound.

(151) In the eleventh embodiment, the opening sound differs depending on whether the set value is 7 or any of 1 to 6. However, this configuration is changed. . When notifying that the front door 12 is open, a normal opening sound is output regardless of the set value of 1-7. However, when the set value is 7, a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined warning sound is output for a predetermined period of time prior to the output of the normal opening sound. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which both the normal opening sound and the predetermined warning sound are output using a plurality of channels.

(152) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting change sound is output when the setting change operation is performed. It may be configured to be

(153) In the eleventh embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed under the condition that the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds. However, the light-off state may be maintained until a predetermined cancellation operation is performed. The predetermined cancellation operation may be to operate the operation means such as the start lever 41 or to change the set value to a value other than 7.

(154) In the eleventh embodiment, the starting operation is to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turn it on. Inserting the setting key into the hole 73 and turning it on may be the start operation, or inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on, and then turning on the power switch 71 may be the start operation. . Further, an operation other than inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and performing the ON operation may be used as the start operation.

(155) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key OFF waiting process is performed in the situation where "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the first area of the first sensor buffer and "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer. After that, the configuration ends when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area 10 consecutive times, but "0" is stored continuously in the 0th bit of the 0th area The number of times is arbitrary.

(156) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key OFF wait process may be terminated when the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected.

(157) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is stored in the display buffer when a change operation is performed, and the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area when an end operation is performed. The configuration may be such that the set value in the set value storage area is changed when a change operation is performed.

(158) In the eleventh embodiment, the set value is displayed in the payout number display section 62 when a change operation is performed. A configuration in which the set values are displayed on a display unit other than 62 is also possible. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a display section for displaying the set values is provided inside the housing 11 .

(159) In the eleventh embodiment, the slot machine 10 whose winning probability is changeable has been described as an example, but it goes without saying that the invention may be applied to a pachinko machine whose winning probability is changeable.

(160) In each of the above embodiments, the transition lottery and the additional lottery are performed only in the 3-card game, but the transition lottery and the additional lottery may also be performed in the 2-card game.

(161) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is terminated when the net increase number reaches 120, but the notification mode may be terminated when the payout number reaches 120. , the notification mode may be terminated when the number of games reaches 50 times.

(162) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a continuous lottery is performed in the notification mode end game, or a configuration in which a continuous lottery is performed in the notification mode transition game. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a continuation lottery in the predetermined game under alerting|reporting mode. And it is good also as a structure which reports the result of these continuation lotteries in a pseudo-game.

(163) In each of the above embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the press order bell is won in the chance mode, but it is configured to be notified at a lower probability than in the notification mode. good too.

(164) In each of the above embodiments, when the notification mode ends, the advantageous section ends. .

(165) In each of the above embodiments, when a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the mode is changed from the normal section to the chance mode. The odds of being out are arbitrary. However, as the number of games in which the player stays in the normal section increases, the chances for the player to perceive that it is a normal section increase. .

(166) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 61, but the section indicator 66 can be provided at any position. However, in order to reduce the chances that the player will perceive that the game is the end of the advantageous section, it is desirable to place it at a position away from the auxiliary display section 65, for example, it is desirable to provide it at the settlement switch 59.

(167) In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing related to the game mode, such as the transition lottery, is performed on the condition that the game is three-card game. It is good also as a structure which performs the process regarding game modes, such as.

(168) In each of the above embodiments, the interval indicator 66 is turned off during the game interval process, but may be turned off during the start waiting process. Even with such a configuration, the section indicator 66 is turned off after the end of the advantageous section end game, so that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be expected. Similarly, the section indicator 66 is configured to be lit ON in the section lottery process, but it is configured to be lit ON after the rotation start process and before it is determined whether the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. good too.

(169) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when a transition is made to the advantageous section. It may be configured to be notified, or may be configured to be notified of the operation timing and the operation method. That is, the advantageous section may be any game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch can operate. It should be noted that the normal section may be a game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch for establishing a small winning combination does not operate.

(170) In each of the above-described embodiments, the combinations of symbols that result in winnings are examples, and the combinations of symbols are not limited to these combinations. Also, the number of symbol combinations that result in winning is arbitrary.

(171) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine with a BB state has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a slot machine without a BB state may be used. It may be a slot machine with states as well. Further, it may be a slot machine having other game states such as CB state and MB state.

(172) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not a start command has been issued after three or two medals have been betted. Needless to say, it may be configured to determine whether or not. Further, it goes without saying that it is possible to determine whether or not a start command has been generated only after three medals have been bet, that is, to allow only three medals to be played.

(173) In each of the above-described embodiments, in addition to the privilege of changing the game state and the privilege of replaying, the privilege of paying out medals is provided as the privilege to be granted, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as the player is provided with some kind of privilege. For example, instead of paying out medals, prizes other than medals may be paid out. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(174) In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine has three reels arranged in parallel and one effective line. It may be a slot machine equipped with a slot machine or a slot machine having 5 activated lines.

(175) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined in the normal processing, and the processing for stopping the reel is performed in the timer interrupt processing. may be configured to perform a process of stopping the Specifically, when the stop pattern number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination process shown in FIG. Perform processing to stop the reel. After that, the processing shown after step S1109 is performed. In the case of such a configuration, after stopping the reel on which the stop command (pseudo stop command) has been generated, it is confirmed whether or not the next stop command (pseudo stop command) is generated. It becomes impossible to continuously generate a pseudo stop command).

(176) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed in the reel control process (step S407, see FIG. 15). If the time from the start to the constant speed is uniform, when starting the acceleration of the reel (step S607, see FIG. 17), a timer corresponding to the time is set, and in step S407, the It may be configured to wait until the time corresponding to the timer value elapses. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

(177) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the present invention will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

Game machine A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 after stopping Migration preparation processing function S412) in
When the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the pattern, the pseudo game second end means (main controller 101 Simulated game flag clear function S1004) during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R) can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control by the second pseudo-game ending means is performed, the pseudo-game is terminated without the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means being pseudo-stopped.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo-game is executed when a specific condition is established. In the pseudo-game, the cyclic display of patterns is started, and the cyclic display of the patterns of the corresponding cyclic display means when the stop operation means is operated is stopped in a pseudo manner. Then, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns, the quasi-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the cyclic display means, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game. Therefore, in this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the pseudo-game is terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game from declining the willingness to play when the pseudo-game is started.

Furthermore, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means is not quasi-stopped, and the patterns of the cyclic display means are displayed. The pseudo-game is finished while the cyclic display of is continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game unless the stop operation means is operated in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine A2. In the gaming machine A1, the second start control means (main control unit 101 acceleration start in the game) for performing control to start the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo game Processing function (S607), stepping motor control processing function (S106), and when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the cyclic display of the pattern, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. A second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main controller 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the cyclic display means, and the privilege giving means is the second stop A gaming machine, wherein the privilege is given based on a control result by a control means.

According to this game machine, the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo game is restarted, and the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Then, a privilege is given based on the result of stopping the pattern. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the cyclic display of patterns is not stopped at the stage of starting the next game cycle. In addition, in such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the pattern and the pseudo-game ends, the control by the second start control means is not performed. It becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine A3. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine A2 comprises a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, even if the pseudo-game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern, the player cannot understand whether it is a pseudo-game or a game related to awarding of benefits. It is possible to avoid disappearing.

Game machine A4. In the game machine A2 or the game machine A3, the pseudo-game executing means, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, circulates the patterns. A gaming machine comprising deceleration means for decelerating display for a predetermined time.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is slowed down for a predetermined time. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over by reducing the speed of cyclic display of the symbols.

Game machine A5. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means is configured such that when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the Specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 performed through step S1003 of main controller 101, stepping motor control A game machine characterized by comprising a processing function S106).

According to the game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has quasi-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is performed so as to quasi-stop the cyclic display of all the patterns. A cyclic display means is controlled. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the specific operation means to stop the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means. It is possible to end the game.

Game machine A6. In the game machine A5, the specific stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stop mode different from the case where the quasi-stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of patterns, the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of patterns is stopped by the stop operation means. The cyclic display of patterns is quasi-stopped in a stop mode different from when is operated. With such a configuration, when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the specific operation means, and when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the stop operation means, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game. Become. As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, and it is possible for the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine A7. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means is configured such that when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third end means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that performs the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine A8. In the gaming machine A7, the second start control means performs control to start the cyclic display of the symbols of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the symbols when the pseudo-game ends. game machine.

According to this game machine, when there is a cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of patterns when the pseudo game is finished, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means is started. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game related to giving a privilege using all of the cyclic display means.

Game machine A9. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the speed of cyclic display of the pattern when controlled by the start control means and the speed of cyclic display of the pattern when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the pattern cyclic display speed in the pseudo game and the pattern cyclic display speed in the game related to awarding of the privilege are equal. With such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, etc., it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. It becomes possible.

Game machine A10. In any one of the game machines A1 to A9, determination means (of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant a specific privilege (addition of the net increase counter) different from the privilege granted by the privilege granting means A gaming machine comprising an additional lottery winning confirmation function (S1804), wherein the specific condition is established when the determination means determines that the specific privilege is to be granted.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific privilege different from the privilege given by the privilege giving means is to be given, the specific condition is established and the pseudo-game is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the pseudo-game a game for notifying that the specific privilege is given, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Game machine A11. In the gaming machine A10, when the pseudo-stop result of the symbols becomes a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols is stopped on the middle line L2) under the control of the pseudo-stop control means, the specific privilege is provided, and if the pseudo stop result of the pattern does not result in the specific stop result, provision notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that does not notify that the specific privilege is provided is provided. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game becomes the specific stop result, it is notified that the specific privilege is given. On the other hand, when the pseudo-stop result of the pattern does not result in the specific stop result in the pseudo-game, it is not reported that the specific privilege is given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prompt a player who wants to be notified of the provision of the specific privilege to operate the stop operation means, and to allow a player who does not need to be notified of the provision of the specific privilege to operate the specific operation means. It becomes possible.

Game machine A12. In the gaming machine A11, there is an advantageous state transition means (announcement mode transition function S1608 of the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (notification mode) that is advantageous to the player, and a number of games that can be played under the advantageous state. and a number information storage means (net increase number counter of the main controller 101) for storing information (remaining number of payouts), and the specific privilege is a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. A game machine characterized by being.

According to this gaming machine, as the specific privilege, a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is provided. By adopting such a configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated in the pseudo-game, it is possible to avoid any disadvantage to the player.

It should be noted that the "privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under an advantageous state" corresponds to a privilege that increases the number of games if the advantageous state ends based on the number of games played. If the advantageous state ends based on the number of given game media, the benefit of increasing the number of given game media is applicable.

Game machine A13. In any one of the game machines A1 to A12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this game machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if the player repeatedly hits the start operation means when starting the game, the pseudo-game ends despite the fact that the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo-game. This is because an event that causes

Game machine B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 after stopping Migration preparation processing function S412) in
A pseudo-game second end means (pseudo-game end function based on the cancel operation of the main control device 101) for ending the pseudo-game when the second specific condition (operation of the settlement switch 59) is satisfied is configured to be executable. ,
Second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of main controller 101, stepping motor a control processing function S106);
A second stop control means ( Equipped with a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106) in this game of the main control device 101,
The gaming machine, wherein the pseudo-game second end means executes different processes according to the pseudo-stop status of the cyclic display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo-game is executed when a specific condition is established. In the pseudo-game, the cyclic display of patterns is started, and the cyclic display of the patterns of the corresponding cyclic display means when the stop operation means is operated is stopped in a pseudo manner. Then, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns, the quasi-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the cyclic display means, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the pseudo-game is configured to end even when the second specific condition is satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the pseudo-game is terminated, the pseudo-circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied is simulated. The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the stop status. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo game according to the pseudo stop situation of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine B2. In the game machine B1, the second specific condition is satisfied when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated, and the privilege granting means is controlled based on the control result of the second stop control means. A game machine characterized in that a privilege is provided, and the pseudo-game second end means executes different processing according to the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

According to this game machine, the pseudo-game is configured to end even when the specific operation means is operated, and when the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo-game, before the specific operation means is operated The configuration is such that different processing is executed according to the number of operated stop operation means. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game according to the situation in which the specific operation means is operated.

Game machine B3. In the game machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means terminates the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the stop operating means that is not operated. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated, the pseudo-game is ended without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the non-operated stop operation means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game unless the stop operation means is operated in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means for the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine B4. A game machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game notifying means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is the pseudo-game when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game in the gaming machine B3. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With such a configuration, even if the pseudo-game can be completed without the pseudo-stop of the cyclic display of the pattern, the player can decide whether it is a pseudo-game or a game related to awarding of benefits. It is possible to avoid being lost.

Game machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or gaming machine B4, when there are a plurality of cyclic display means for quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the symbols in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means for quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the symbols is the cyclic display means for simulating the circulation of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) relating to timing for starting display.

According to this gaming machine, when there are a plurality of cyclic display means that quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns in a pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that quasi-stops the cyclic display of patterns is related to the timing of starting the cyclic display of patterns. Timing information is set individually. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B6. In the game machine B5, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo-game to the start of the cyclic display of the patterns. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the stopping result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B7. In any one of the game machines B3 to B6, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is continued for a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine characterized in that a deceleration means for decelerating is provided.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is slowed down for a predetermined time. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over by reducing the speed of cyclic display of the symbols.

Game machine B8. In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the cyclic display speed of the pattern when controlled by the start control means and the cyclic display speed of the pattern when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the pattern cyclic display speed in the pseudo game and the pattern cyclic display speed in the game related to awarding of the privilege are equal. With such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, etc., it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. It becomes possible.

Game machine B9. In the gaming machine B2, the pseudo-game second end means is configured to pseudo-stop all the cyclic display of the patterns when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one of the stop operation means is operated. It is characterized by comprising specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed through step S1003 of the main controller 101) that controls the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the pattern. game machine.

According to the game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means is operated, the cyclic display means for performing the cyclic display of the patterns to pseudo-stop all the cyclic display of the patterns. controlled. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the specific operation means to stop the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means. It is possible to end the game.

Game machine B10. In the gaming machine B9, the specific stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the patterns in a stop mode different from the case where the quasi-stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the patterns. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means is operated, the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is displayed in the same manner as when the stop operation means is operated. simulates the cyclic display of patterns in a different stopping mode. With such a configuration, when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the specific operation means, and when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the stop operation means, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game. Become. As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, and it is possible for the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine B11. In the game machine B9 or the game machine B10, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of the patterns in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that has quasi-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns is the cyclic display of the patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) relating to timing for starting display.

According to this gaming machine, when all of the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that quasi-stops the cyclic display of the patterns is related to the timing of starting the cyclic display of the patterns. Timing information is set individually. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B12. In the game machine B11, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo-game to the start of the cyclic display of the patterns. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game will serve as an operation assistance for the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B13. In any one of the game machines B2 to B12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this game machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if the player repeatedly hits the start operation means when starting the game, the pseudo-game ends despite the fact that the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo-game. This is because an event that causes

Game machine C1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop operation determination means (main controller) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern and the cyclic display of the pattern becomes constant speed 101 stop command confirmation function S1008);
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, the second stop control means for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to stop the cyclic display of the pattern (stop of the main controller 101 in this game Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
The privilege granting means is configured to grant the privilege based on the control result of the second stop control means,
The second stop control means causes the stop operation means to be operated in a prescribed operation method (operating order for establishing a bell prize) when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a prescribed result (bell winning in order of pushing). and controlling the plurality of cyclic display means so that a prescribed winning (bell winning) is established and the stop operating means is operated by an operation method other than the prescribed operating method so that the prescribed winning is not established,
providing an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of informing the specified operation method when the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result;
The operation method notification means, when notifying the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means is operated When notifying the prescribed operation method in the game round that executes the pseudo-game, the pseudo-stop control means in the pseudo-game after all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means is pseudo-stopped and, before the second start control means starts the control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns, the prescribed operation method is notified.

According to this game machine, when notifying the prescribed operation method in a game cycle in which the pseudo-game is not executed, the stop operation determination means is configured to notify the prescribed operation method before determining whether the stop operation means is operated. bottom. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to operate the stop operation means after grasping the prescribed operation method in game rounds in which no pseudo-game is executed.

Further, when notifying the prescribed operation method in the game round in which the pseudo-game is executed, after the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means in the pseudo-game, the second start The prescribed operation method is notified before the control means starts the control for starting the cyclic display of the pattern. By adopting such a configuration, while avoiding that the stop operation means is operated by the stipulated operation method in the pseudo-game, the stop operation means is operated by an operation method different from the stipulated operation method in the game related to the provision of benefits after the pseudo-game. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a privilege is not granted due to the establishment of a prescribed prize due to the operation.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine C2. In the game machine C1, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo-game is not executed, after the cyclic display of all the patterns of the cyclic display means reaches a constant speed, the A game machine characterized by notifying a prescribed operation method.

According to this gaming machine, when notifying the specified operation method in a game cycle in which no pseudo-game is executed, after the cyclic display of all the patterns of the cyclic display means becomes a constant speed, the stop operation determination means Before it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, the specified operation method is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding different between the game round in which the pseudo-game is executed and the game round in which the pseudo-game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the prescribed operation method is notified before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding of the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the pseudo game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Game machine C3. In the game machine C1 or the game machine C2, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result. When the specified determination means (winning combination confirmation function S603 of the main controller 101) and the specified determination means determine that the result of the lottery for the combination is the specified result, the specified operation method is notified to the operation method notification means. and time information setting means for setting time information (main a delay time acquisition function (S605) of the control device 101, and the second start control means sets the time information when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means. A game machine characterized by performing control to start the cyclic display of the pattern after the elapse of time according to the time information set by the means.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the role is a specified result, and the lottery result of the role is determined. When it is determined that the specified result is obtained, the operation method notification means is caused to notify the specified operation method, and when the operation method notification means is caused to notify the specified operation method, the time information is set. Then, the second start control means controls to start the cyclic display of the patterns after the elapse of the time corresponding to the time information when the pseudo stop control means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means. conduct. With this configuration, in the pseudo-game, when notifying the specified operation method after all the circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the pattern, the notification of the specified operation method is performed before the cycle display of the pattern is started. It is possible to execute

Game machine C4. Any one of the game machines C1 to C3 includes at least the pseudo game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, and supervises the game. Main control means (main control device 101) to manage and subordinate control means (display control device 81) to perform various controls under the control of the main control means, and the main control means controls the operation method notification means A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to this game machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means for overall management of the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event in which it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated before the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method.

Game machine C5. In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is performed, the pseudo game ends without the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means being pseudo-stopped, and the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated. (2) a game machine characterized in that said operation method notification means is configured to notify said specified operation method.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, the pseudo-game can be terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game from declining the willingness to play when the pseudo-game is started.

Further, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying the patterns, the quasi-game ends without quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclical display means. The operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo-game to a game related to awarding of benefits, while reducing the chance of operating the stop operation means with an operation method different from the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding privileges. It becomes possible to

Game machine D1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means (pseudo-game stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
Second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of main controller 101) for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the combination ) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the pseudo game A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set during the execution of .

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding is set during execution of the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine D2. In the gaming machine D1, stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the patterns. ), wherein the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated.

According to this game machine, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated. With this configuration, even if the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo-game, the time required for the stop operation determination means to determine the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo-game It is possible to achieve shortening.

Game machine D3. In the game machine D2, the stop information setting means sets stop information such that the pattern attached to one predetermined specific position is pseudo-stopped at the specified position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine, the stop information setting means sets the stop information such that the pattern attached to one predetermined specific position is pseudo-stopped at the specified position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. do. In this way, even if the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop operation means. It is possible to suppress the delay from the operation of the stop operation means until the cyclic display of the pattern of the corresponding cyclic display means is stopped in a pseudo manner.

Game machine D4. In the game machine D2 or the game machine D3, the second stop control means is controlled to stop the cyclic display of the pattern during a period from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined time elapses. and the pseudo-stop control means is configured to be capable of performing control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern after the specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the game related to awarding of a privilege, control is performed to stop the cyclic display of patterns during a period from when the stop operation means is operated to when the predetermined specified time elapses. On the other hand, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to perform control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of patterns after a specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time for setting the stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, the time for determining the stop position of the cyclic display means based on the stop information, and the like. becomes possible.

Game machine D5. In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second stop information setting means causes the start control means to start cyclic display of the pattern when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set later and before the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of the privilege is after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the patterns, and the pseudo stop control means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns. It is set before performing control to let By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

Game machine D6. In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, stop operation determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the patterns. The second stop information setting means includes a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008), and when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set before determination is made.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of the privilege is set before the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

Game machine D7. In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means, and it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. .

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine D9. In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine E1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
The pseudo game execution means is
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated, the pseudo stop control means (stop in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) that controls the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo stop the cyclic display of the pattern Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 A preparation processing function S412) is provided,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
Second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of main controller 101) for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the combination ) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means The stop information is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether or not the operation is performed, and the second stop information setting means determines whether the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. In this case, the second stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether the stop operation means has been operated. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether the stop operation means is operated, and is used in the game related to awarding the privilege. 2 Stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine E2. In the gaming machine E1, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, the specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is the specific result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo-game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits, and reduce the amount of data prepared in advance. It is possible to plan

Game machine E3. In the gaming machine E1 or gaming machine E2, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game, the stop information setting means after the start control means starts controlling the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine characterized by setting information in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area after starting the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start cyclic display of patterns when executing a pseudo-game.

Game machine E4. In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means, and it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. .

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine E5. In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the pseudo-game executing means, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the pattern a third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of (1).

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine F1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game, start control means for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern (acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106 )and,
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 preparation processing function S412);
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
a second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
Stop operation determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means executing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated (pseudo stop command confirmation function and stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means The stop information is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether or not the operation is performed, and the second stop information setting means determines whether the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. When doing so, the second stop information is stored in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether the stop operation means has been operated after the pseudo game is completed. A game machine characterized by setting.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether the stop operation means is operated, and is used in the game related to awarding the privilege. 2 stop information is set in the first storage area from the end of the pseudo-game to before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With such a configuration, in a pseudo-game, it is possible to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of patterns using the stop information, and in a game related to awarding of benefits, the cyclical display of patterns is performed using the second stop information. It is possible to stop.

Further, by setting the second stop information in the first storage area in which the stop information is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity prepared in advance.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine F2. In the game machine F1, the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first storage area to the second stop information.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-game ends, the stop information set in the first storage area is rewritten to the second stop information. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the first storage area.

Game machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. A gaming machine characterized by setting

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, the specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is the specific result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo-game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits, and reduce the amount of data prepared in advance. It is possible to plan

Game machine F4. In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the stop information setting means determines that, when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game, the start control means has started controlling the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine, wherein the stop information is set in the first storage area later.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area after starting the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start cyclic display of patterns when executing a pseudo-game.

Game machine F5. In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for the control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer needed. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine F6. In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the pseudo-game execution means operates the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, at least the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. becomes. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for the control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer needed. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Note that the game machine group A to the game machine group C may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. In addition, the game machine group A to the game machine group C may be appropriately combined with the game machine group D to the game machine group F, and even when they are combined, the above-described effects can be obtained.

Game machine G1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
stop operation determination means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means and the corresponding cyclic display means stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of main controller 101) for determining the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns when the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means. (stepping motor control processing S106 of the main controller 101),
The stop operation determination means is used for the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position to before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. 2, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated,
Based on the fact that the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, standby processing execution means (100 msec of the main controller 101 A game machine characterized by providing a standby function S2210).

According to this game machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operating means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is operated, and if the stop operating means is operated, the corresponding cyclic display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. Then, when the cyclic display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position by the stop position determination means and before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop operation means can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if it is configured to determine the operation of other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of patterns to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a state where the cyclic display of patterns has not stopped. New problems such as becoming may arise. Therefore, in this gaming machine, a standby process of waiting for a predetermined predetermined time is performed based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and the above concerns can be resolved favorably.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine G2. The gaming machine G1 includes stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. The waiting process executing means performs the waiting process after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. machine.

According to the game machine, the stop position determination means for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, After determining that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, standby processing is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Game machine G3. In the game machine G2, the stop position determination means can determine a position different from the cyclic display position of the cyclic display means when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated as the stop position. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this game machine, the cyclic display of patterns may not stop immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, since the time from when the stop operation means is operated until the cyclic display of the pattern of the corresponding cyclic display means stops fluctuates, the standby process is performed in consideration of the time. In this case, there is a concern that the time until the next game round can be started may be delayed. However, when this configuration is applied to the game machine G2, it is possible to set the waiting time in the waiting process without considering the time required for the cyclic display means to reach the stop position. It is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine G4. In the game machine G2 or G3, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, all of the stop operation means are operated. Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation second determination means is provided, and the standby process execution means is configured such that the stop operation second determination means A gaming machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that none of the gaming machines have been operated.

According to this game machine, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, it is determined whether or not all of the stop operation means have been operated. The stop operation second determination means is provided, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop operation second determination means determines that all of the stop operation means are not operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started even in the case of the configuration in which the standby process is performed, and the next game round can be started. It is possible to improve the operability when For example, without providing the stop operation second determination means, the standby process may be performed after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. It is possible. However, in the case of such a configuration, depending on whether the timing at which the player ends the operation of all the stop operation means is after the waiting process or during the waiting process, the following This is because the time required until the game round can be started will change. Then, if the time required until the next game round can be started changes, an event occurs in which even if the player performs an operation for starting the next game round, the operation is not accepted, This is because the operability at the time of starting the next game round is lowered.

Game machine G5. In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the standby process executing means performs the standby process before the privilege granting means grants the privilege.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process is performed before the privilege granting means grants the privilege. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which a privilege is given in a situation where the cyclic display of patterns is not stopped.

Game machine G6. In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, winning determination means (a payout determination processing function of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination has been established. ), wherein the standby process executing means performs the standby process before the winning determination means performs the winning determination.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process is performed before the winning determination means performs the winning determination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated, and to create a situation in which the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped while the standby processing is being performed.

Game machine G7. In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, when the lottery result of the combination is a specified result (push order bell win), the stop operation means performs a specified operation method (an operation capable of establishing a bell winning). The plurality of cyclic display means are operated so that a prescribed winning (bell winning) is established when the operation is performed in the order), and the prescribed winning is not established when the stop operation means is operated by an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. Controlling stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of main controller 101), and operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout A gaming machine characterized by comprising a number display section 62).

According to this gaming machine, when the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result, the specified operation method may be notified by the operation method notification means. At this time, when the stop operation means is operated by the specified operation method, the specified winning can be established. By applying any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6 to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the stop operation means in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. It becomes possible.

Game machine G8. The game machine G7 is provided with notification control means (main controller 101) for controlling the operation method notification means, and the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, the stop operation is performed. After the position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, the notification by the operation method notification means is terminated, and the standby processing execution means causes the notification control means to stop notification by the operation method notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after the game is terminated.

According to this game machine, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method, the stop position determination means ends the notification by the operation method notification means after all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means are determined, Standby processing is then performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process while promptly ending the notification by the operation method notification means.

Game machine G9. In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a normal process executing means (main controller 101) that is activated when the power is turned on and repeats a series of normal processes, and a means for periodically interrupting the normal process. interrupt processing execution means (main controller 101) for performing interrupt processing, and the normal processing execution means includes the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means. The interrupt process execution means has the stop means, and the normal process execution means has a predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop position determination means has not determined the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the stop position is determined, means for determining whether or not the predetermined cyclic display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means is deficient.

According to this game machine, in the normal process that is repeatedly performed when the power is turned on, the cyclic display means for performing the cyclic display of the pattern and the corresponding stop operation means are operated. When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop position of the cyclic display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means is determined. A process of determining is performed. On the other hand, in the normal process, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means have not been determined, the predetermined cyclic display means determines the stop position determination means. It is not determined whether or not the stop position determined by 1 is reached. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Game machine G10. In any one of the game machines G1 to G9, the cyclic display means includes a circulating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that circulates in the circumferential direction and is provided with a plurality of patterns in the circumferential direction; and a driving means (stepping motor) for driving the revolving body.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display means includes a circulating body that circulates in the circumferential direction and that has a plurality of types of patterns in the circumferential direction, and a driving means that drives the circulating body. In such a configuration, it is conceivable that when the driving of the driving means is stopped, the circulating body may swing without immediately ending the circulating movement. However, in the case of performing a standby process of waiting for a predetermined time, it is possible to end the oscillation of the orbiting body while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine H1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
A slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means,
The main control means is
stop operation determination means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means and the corresponding cyclic display means stop position determination means (stop symbol number determination function S2305 of main controller 101) for determining the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns when the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means. (stepping motor control processing S106 of the main controller 101),
The stop operation determination means is used for the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position to before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. 2, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated,
After the stop position determining means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, a stop for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of main controller 101);
When the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, the first information indicating the determination result of the stop position determination means (all reel stop completion command) to the slave control means (all reel stop completion command transmission function S2205 of the main control device 101);
Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means has determined all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. and,
When the stop operation second determination means determines that none of the stop operation means is operated, second information (operation end command) indicating the determination result of the stop operation second determination means is sent to the slave control means A game machine characterized by comprising a second transmission means (operation end command transmission function S2207 of the main controller 101) for transmission.

According to this game machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operating means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is operated, and if the stop operating means is operated, the corresponding cyclic display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. Then, when the cyclic display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position by the stop position determination means and before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop operation means can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which the operation determination of the other stop operation means is performed without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern to stop, for example, while the operation of all the stop operation means is completed, for example, the second The cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means whose stop position has been determined has not been completed, or the operation of at least one stop operation means has not been completed while the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means has been completed. new problems such as Then, when the above-described problem arises, a problem arises in the control performed on the side of the slave control means. Therefore, in this game machine, after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means on the main control means side, all of the plurality of cyclic display means are the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. When it is determined that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the first information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. . Further, on the main control means side, after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and if none of the stop operation means has been operated. When the judgment is made, the second information indicating the judgment result is transmitted to the slave control means. With such a configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the circulating display status of patterns by receiving the first information, and can control the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. It is possible to perform control according to As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine H2. In the game machine H1, the second transmission means transmits the second information after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after transmitting the first information. With such a configuration, after the slave control means performs control according to all of the plurality of cyclic display means reaching the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, all the operations of the stop operation means are completed. It is possible to perform control in accordance with what has been done. Furthermore, since the main control means includes the stop position determination means, the maximum time required for the cyclic display means to actually reach the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position is It can be grasped or predicted on the instrument side. On the other hand, the time required until all the stop operation means are not operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be grasped and predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted, for example, the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of patterns and the timing when the slave control means receives the first information It is possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on .

Game machine H3. In the gaming machine H2, the stop operation second determination means performs the stop operation after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. A game machine characterized by determining whether or not a means is operated.

According to this game machine, the stop operation second determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. judge. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine H4. In the game machine H3, the second stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

According to this game machine, the stop operation second determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmission means transmits the first information. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the slave control means to quickly grasp that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and all of the plurality of cyclic display means can be displayed. It is possible to reduce the deviation between the timing when the cyclic display of the pattern ends and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information.

Game machine H5. In any one of the game machines H2 to H4, the sub-control means controls when a specific condition (additional lottery winning) is established, when all of the plurality of cyclic display means end the cyclic display of the pattern. , Effect control means (display control device 81 A game machine characterized by comprising an additional notification processing function).

According to this gaming machine, the slave control means, when a specific condition is established, when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of patterns, and when all the operations of the stop operation means have completed, An auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute different auxiliary performances. In such a configuration, depending on whether all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of the patterns or the operation of all the stop operation means has been completed, whichever occurs first, for example, a well-prepared auxiliary Problems such as one of the performances being unable to be executed or the processing configuration of the performance control means being complicated and the storage capacity being increased may occur. However, the main control means transmits first information indicating that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and notifies that none of the stop operation means has been operated. By transmitting the second information indicating the second information, the slave control means can grasp that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of the pattern through the reception of the first information. It is possible to grasp that all the operations of the stop operation means have been completed through the reception of . Further, since the main control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the sub-control means performs control to execute a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then the second information. Based on the reception of , control may be performed to execute an auxiliary effect different from the predetermined auxiliary effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine H6. In the game machine H5, the effect control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a first auxiliary effect (third notification sound) when the first information is received when the specific condition is established. and controlling the auxiliary effect means to execute a second auxiliary effect (announcement of the number of coins to be added) when the second information is received.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first auxiliary effect is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary effect is executed when the second information is received. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which one of the carefully prepared first assistance effect and the second assistance effect cannot be executed.

Game machine H7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine H6, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices.

According to this gaming machine, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices. By adopting such a configuration, even when the interval between the reception of the first information and the reception of the second information is short, it is possible to reliably execute the first assistance effect. .

Game machine H8. In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the main control means determines a predetermined time ( 100 msec) standby processing execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of the main controller 101) is provided, and the standby processing execution means is such that the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means are stopped. A gaming machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after it is determined that the stop position determined by the position determining means is reached.

According to this game machine, when the stop position determining means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means, the waiting process of waiting for a predetermined predetermined time is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which all the cyclic display of patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of new problems such as

Further, the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Game machine H9. In the gaming machine H8, the standby process execution means transmits the second information to the sub-control means after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the sub-control means. A gaming machine characterized by performing the standby process after transmitting to the means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process execution means, after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means, Perform standby processing. With such a configuration, there is a difference between the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means finish cyclically displaying the patterns and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information, It is possible to reduce the difference between the timing when the player ends the operation of the stop operation means and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the second information. Moreover, since the waiting time in the waiting process can be set in consideration of the time required for transmitting the first information, etc., it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the waiting process.

It should be noted that the game machine group G and the game machine group H may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. Further, the game machine group A to the game machine group F may be appropriately combined with the game machine group G and the game machine group H, and even in the case of combination, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Gaming machine I1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
Specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (rotation start header information, etc.);
A storage area (pseudo-game flag storage area) for storing different information when it is a specific game (pseudo-game) and when it is not the specific game,
command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
Command creation means for creating the command (header creation function S3002, body creation function S3005, footer creation function S3006, etc.),
The command creating means comprises a specified command creating means (header creating function S3002, etc.) for creating a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating the specific information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area where different information is stored depending on whether it is a specific game or not. . With such a configuration, the sub-control means can grasp whether or not it is a specific game through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the sub-control means to perform control according to whether or not it is a specific game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance commands to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and commands to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. becomes.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and a command to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game are stored in advance, it is possible to determine whether the command is a specific game when transmitting the command. It becomes necessary to perform determination processing, which complicates the processing configuration. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether or not it is a specific game, so the above process is not necessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine I2. In the gaming machine I1, the prescribed command generating means, in both the case of the specific game and the case of the non-specific game, includes the specific information, the information stored in the storage area, A gaming machine characterized by creating a prescribed command by calculating

According to this gaming machine, in both the case of a specific game and the case of a non-specific game, the prescribed command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. . With such a configuration, the process of determining whether or not the game is a specific game is not required when a command is transmitted, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine I3. In the game machine I1 or I2, the game machine is characterized in that the defined command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not the game is a specific game in the header. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine I4. A game machine according to the game machine I3, wherein the header is contained in one byte.

According to this game machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is stored in one byte. can be grasped.

Game machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or gaming machine I4, the header comprises a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating a command type, and whether or not it is the specific game. and a specific game storage bit for storing information indicating whether the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. Characteristic game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating the command type, and information indicating whether or not it is a specific game. The specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in a bit that was not used in the past, and commands to be transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means can be stored. Redundancy can be suitably suppressed.

Game machine I6. In the gaming machine I5, the gaming machine is characterized in that the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the specific game storage bits are unused areas. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. .

Game machine I7. A game machine according to any one of the game machines I3 to I6, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether or not it is a specific game is created by calculating header information including information indicating a command type and information stored in a storage area. be. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header of the command to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and the header of the command to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game, so that the amount of data can be reduced. It is possible to plan

Game machine I8. In any of the game machines I1 to I7, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, the first execution means ( Pseudo-game flag set function S504) and when the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is changed to the second information (00H) Second execution means (pseudo-game flag clear function S611), confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and the confirmation means put the first information in the storage area a specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the specific game when it is confirmed that the is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the storage area. is changed to the second information. Then, when the confirming means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used for determining whether or not to execute a specific game, in addition to creating the specified command, thereby suppressing an increase in the storage capacity. becomes possible.

Game machine I9. In any one of the game machines I1 to I8, when information indicating that the specific game is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and the specific game is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine, wherein the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine when information indicating that the game is not played is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the information indicating that the specific game is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the information indicating that the specific game is not stored in the storage area. In this case, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the information stored in the storage area has a function as information used when creating a prescribed command and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. , can be given. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Gaming machine I10. In any one of the game machines I1 to I9, the game machine is characterized in that the specific game is a pseudo game.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make the sub-control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game through the prescribed command.

Game machine I11. In any one of the game machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a game in a specific game state.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make the sub-control means grasp whether or not the game is in the specific game state through the prescribed command.

Game machine J1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
When the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo-game lottery winning) is established, the first execution means (pseudo-game flag set function S504) for storing the first information (40H) in the storage area (pseudo-game flag storage area) and,
When the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is established after the first specific condition is established, the information stored in the storage area is changed to the second information (00H) Second execution means (clear pseudo-game flag function S611);
Confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.),
Different control is performed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. Control execution means to be executed (pseudo game execution function),
and setting means for setting corresponding information (rotation start header) using at least part of the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the storage area. is changed to the second information. Different control is executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. . Corresponding information is set using at least part of the information stored in the storage area. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for determination when executing control, but also for setting correspondence information, so that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Become.

As a result, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine J2. In the gaming machine J1, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, and the confirmation means A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the second information is stored in a storage area, the specific game is not executed.

According to this gaming machine, when it is confirmed that the first information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed. game is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a specific game is to be executed based on the information stored in the storage area, and to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not a particular game is to be executed. .

Game machine J3. In the game machine J1 or the game machine J2, specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) and command transmission means (command transmission processing) for transmitting commands to the slave control means. 3, etc.), and the setting means includes a specified command creation means (header creating means) for creating a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specified information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function S3002, etc.).

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the specified information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area in which different information is stored depending on whether the first specified condition and the second specified condition are satisfied, the prescribed command is created. With such a configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether or not each specific condition is satisfied through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it is possible to cause the sub-control means to perform control according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance a command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and a command to be transmitted when the second information is stored. can be reduced.

Further, in the configuration in which the command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and the command to be transmitted when the second information is stored are stored in advance, the confirmation means is used when the command is transmitted. , and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this game machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include which of the first information and the second information is stored, so the confirmation process is unnecessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine J4. In the gaming machine J3, the prescribed command creating means, both when the first information is stored in the storage area and when the second information is stored in the storage area, A gaming machine, wherein a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, both when the first information is stored in the storage area and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific information and the information stored in the storage area are create a prescribed command by computing the information; With such a configuration, when a command is transmitted, there is no need to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the storage area. reduction can be achieved.

Game machine J5. In the game machine J3 or J4, the game machine is characterized in that the defined command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied in the header. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine J6. A gaming machine according to the gaming machine J5, characterized in that the header is accommodated in 1 byte.

According to this game machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, and the header is stored in one byte. It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or J6, the header comprises: a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header; a type storage bit storing information indicating a command type; 2 a specific condition storage bit for storing information indicating whether or not a specific condition is established, and the specific condition storage bit is positioned lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A game machine characterized by being provided in.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met. The specific condition storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not each specific condition is established in a bit that was conventionally not used, and commands transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means become redundant. It is possible to suitably suppress to do.

Game machine J8. In the gaming machine J7 described above, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and an area other than a position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. .

Game machine J9. A gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines J5 to J8, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, the header including the information indicating whether or not each specific condition is satisfied is created by calculating the header information including the information indicating the command type and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header to be transmitted when the first information is stored and the header to be transmitted when the second information is stored. can be reduced.

Game machine J10. In any one of the game machines J1 to J9, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the game machine when the first information is stored in the storage area, and stores the second information in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that when information is stored, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine. No output. With such a configuration, the information stored in the storage area is provided with a function as information used when executing control and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Game machine K1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
Information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing first command information (stop header information, etc.) to be transmitted to the sub-control means in the case of the first game (main game);
When executing a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game, a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H),
In the case of the second game, command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) for creating second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, the first command information to be transmitted to the sub-control means in the case of the first game is stored in advance, and when the second game different from the first game is to be executed, the stored command information is stored. Second game information is stored in the area. Then, in the case of the second game, the second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to transmit the second command information to the sub-control means when the second game is being played, depending on whether it is the first game or the second game. It is possible to cause the slave control means to perform the same control.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Moreover, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store the second command information in advance in the main control means, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K2. The game machine K1 is characterized in that the first game information (00H) is stored in the storage area when the first game is executed.

According to this gaming machine, when executing the first game, the first game information is stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a storage area for storing the first game information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K3. In the game machine K2, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established, the first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing the second game information in the storage area , When the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is established after the first specific condition is established, second execution means (pseudo-game flag clear) for changing the information stored in the storage area to the first game information Function S611), confirmation means for confirming information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area In this case, when the first game execution means (this game execution function) for executing the first game and the confirmation means confirm that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game is executed. and a second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the game machine.

According to this game machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area. The information is changed to the first game information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area, the first game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game information is stored in the storage area. 2 games are executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for generating the second command information but also for determining whether the first game or the second game is to be executed. It is possible to suppress the increase in

Game machine K4. In the gaming machine K2 or gaming machine K3, the command generating means stores the first command information and the storage area in both the first game and the second game. A game machine characterized by creating command information by calculating stored game information.

According to this gaming machine, in both the case of the first game and the case of the second game, the command is executed by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the storage area. create information. With such a configuration, when a command is transmitted, the process of determining whether it is the first game or the second game becomes unnecessary, and the amount of data can be reduced by simplifying the processing configuration. It becomes possible.

Game machine K5. In the gaming machine K4, when the command generating means calculates the first game information and the first command information and the first game information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this game machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the calculation result remains the first command information. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine K6. In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first command information is a header.

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as the header, and the first game and the second game are stored in the header. It is possible to include information indicating which one. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine K7. In the game machine K6, the game machine is characterized in that the header is stored in 1 byte.

According to this gaming machine, since the header includes information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game, and the header is stored in one byte, when the header is received, the slave control means It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or gaming machine K7, the header comprises a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating a command type, the first game and the second game. a game storage bit for storing information indicating which of the games the game is, and the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating the command type, and whether it is the first game or the second game. and a game storage bit for storing information indicating that the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game in a bit that was previously not used. It is possible to suitably suppress redundant commands to be transmitted.

Game machine K9. In the gaming machine K8, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the game storage bits are unused areas.

According to this game machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the game storage bits are unused areas. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the first command information and the second game information.

Game machine K10. In any of the game machines K1 to K9, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and the second game information is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine when the first signal is not set.

According to this gaming machine, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when the second game information is not stored in the storage area, the second signal is output outside the gaming machine. 1 signal is no longer output. With this configuration, the second game information has a function as information used when creating the second command information, a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine, can be given. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Game machine K11. In any one of the game machines K1 to K10, the second game is a pseudo game, and the first game is a game other than the pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible for the sub-control means to grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game through the first command information and the second command information.

Game machine K12. In any one of the game machines K1 to K10, the second game is a game in a specific game state, and the first game is a game in a game state different from the specific game state. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible for the slave control means to grasp whether or not the game is in the specific game state through the first command information and the second command information.

Note that the gaming machine group I to the gaming machine group K may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group I to the game machine group K may be appropriately combined with the game machine group A to the game machine group H, and even if they are combined, the above effects can be obtained.

Game machine L1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (menu screen) based on the fact that a predetermined operation (operation of effect switch 67) is performed,
When the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective when a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is established after the start of the specific effect, and the above-mentioned after the start of the specific effect A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid even if a specific condition is not established.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective when the specific condition is established after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation becomes effective even if the specific condition is not established after the start of the specific performance. Since there is a certain case, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine L2. In the game machine L1, the specific condition includes elapse of a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) after starting the specific effect.

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective after the specific time has passed after the start of the specific effect, and the predetermined operation is performed before the specific time has passed after the start of the specific effect. There are cases where it is effective and others. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

Game machine L3. In the game machine L2, the specific effect is configured to inform the specific result (whether or not there is an addition) until a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) shorter than the specific time elapses. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the specific effect, the specific result is notified until the second specific time shorter than the specific time elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances that the predetermined operation becomes effective before the identification result is notified.

Game machine L4. In the gaming machine L3, when a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is satisfied after the specific effect is started, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. , the gaming machine, wherein the second specific condition includes elapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect.

According to this gaming machine, when the second specific condition including the lapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect is satisfied, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. With such a configuration, the specific result is notified regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation becomes effective or the second specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation becomes effective. After that, it becomes possible to validate the predetermined operation.

Game machine L5. In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this game machine, the first operation means is operated not only when the first effect is executed but also when the predetermined information is displayed. In the configuration in which the specific effect is started with the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, it is conceivable that the player may operate the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the effect after notification of the specific result. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to notify the specific result until the second specific time shorter than the specific time elapses, the chance of displaying the predetermined information in a situation unintended by the player is reduced. It becomes possible to

Game machine L6. The game machine L5 is characterized in that the specific time is set to be twice or more the second specific time.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific time is set to be at least twice the second specific time, when the player again operates the first operation means in anticipation of further development of the performance after notification of the specific result. In addition, it is possible to avoid displaying the predetermined information.

Game machine L7. In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first effect is executed, the elapsed time after the specified condition (operation end command reception) is established is the first specified time (about 10 seconds) after reaching, if the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect becomes the second specified time (about 2 seconds), the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect is longer than the second specified time The prescribed operation becomes valid when the third prescribed time is long (about 5 seconds), and the prescribed condition is satisfied after the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second prescribed time. The predetermined operation is valid when the elapsed time since the specified condition is satisfied is the first specified time, or when the elapsed time after the specified condition is satisfied is the first specified time. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, after the elapsed time from the establishment of the specified condition reaches the first specified time, the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect is the second When the prescribed time is reached, the prescribed operation becomes effective when the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches a third prescribed time longer than the second prescribed time, and the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance. becomes the second specified time and the elapsed time since the specified conditions are met becomes the first specified time, or if the elapsed time after the specified conditions are met becomes the first specified time Predetermined operation becomes effective. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time.

Game machine L8. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the prescribed condition is established when the first effect is started.

According to the game machine, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the relationship between the elapsed time after starting the first effect and the timing when the elapsed time after starting the specific effect becomes the second specified time. changes. Since the specific effect is triggered by the operation of the first operation means, the time required from the start of the first effect until the player operates the first operation means can be It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the time.

Game machine LL1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for shifting to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state),
When the first effect is executed, when a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is established after the start of the specific effect, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state, and after the start of the specific effect. A game machine characterized in that there is a case where the game machine shifts to the customer waiting state even if a specific condition is not established.

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state when the specific condition is established after the specific performance is started, and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not established after the specific performance is started. Since there is a case and a certain configuration, it is possible to change the timing of shifting to the customer waiting state, for example, according to the start timing of a specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the configurations described in the game machines L2 to L8 may be appropriately combined after changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state". Even if there is, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Game machine M1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
Sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with a first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means comprises specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect control means (result display processing function) for performing control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) for controlling display of predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the enabling means for validating the subsequent predetermined operation (finishing the pressing effect process and performing S3603 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to shift to

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect is already executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid, so the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid. can be defined by the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine M2. In the game machine M1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the predetermined operation is performed after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second validating means (a function of ending the pressing effect processing based on a second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603).

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is valid after the specific effect has been executed. Become. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command.

Game machine M3. In the game machine M1 or the game machine M2, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, a predetermined effect is set after the specific effect has been executed. After a specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed, a second validation means (a function of terminating the pressing effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent predetermined operation is provided. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, after the specified time has elapsed after the specific effect has been executed, the subsequent The predetermined operation becomes valid. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command. In addition, by providing a grace period of a prescribed time between when the specific effect is completed and when the predetermined operation becomes effective, the timing when the specific effect is completed, that is, the timing when the first operation means is operated. , the timing at which the specific command is received, and the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective can be changed.

Game machine M4. In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this game machine, the first operation means is operated not only when the first effect is executed but also when the predetermined information is displayed. In the configuration in which the specific effect is started with the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, there is a possibility that the player will operate the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the effect after the specific effect has been executed. Conceivable. Therefore, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid is not the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, but the timing at which the specific command is received or after the specified time has passed, so that the predetermined information can be displayed in situations unintended by the player. It is possible to reduce the chance of displaying.

Game machine M5. In the gaming machine M4, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (symbols), and a start operation means (start lever) operated to start the cyclic display of the patterns. 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58), lottery means (lottery processing function of main control unit 101) for performing lottery for a role, and a plurality of switches operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the patterns. The stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) and the winning symbols corresponding to the winning combination won in the lottery of the aforementioned combination form a predetermined combination (combination of small combination symbols, etc.) at the effective position (effective line). privilege giving means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) for giving a privilege to the player as a win based on the stoppage, and the predetermined information control means controls at least the cyclic display means. A game machine characterized by performing control to display the predetermined information when all of the patterns stop cyclic display.

According to this gaming machine, the above-described effects can be achieved in a slot machine capable of displaying predetermined information in a state where a game is not started.

Game machine M6. In the game machine M5, the main control means provides an operation end command for transmitting an operation end command to the slave control means when all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed. A gaming machine comprising transmission means (operation end command transmission function S3307), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on reception of the operation end command.

According to this game machine, the first effect is executed when all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are finished. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases in which control is performed to execute a specific effect and in which control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is validated, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the malfunction. becomes possible.

Game machine M7. In the game machine M6, when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) elapses after all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed, A gaming machine characterized by transmitting the specific command.

According to this game machine, when the predetermined specific time has passed after all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed, the specific command is transmitted. With this configuration, the elapsed time after all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the pattern are completed, and the timing when the specific effect is completed, that is, the first operation means is operated. It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation is effective depending on the timing.

Game machine M8. In the game machine M5, the main control means includes a circulation end command transmission means (all A gaming machine comprising a reel stop completion command transmission function (S3305), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on reception of the circulation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases in which control is performed to execute a specific effect and in which control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is validated, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the malfunction. becomes possible.

Game machine M9. In the game machine M8, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (about 10 seconds) has passed after all of the cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined specific time has elapsed after the cyclic display of all patterns has stopped, the specific command is transmitted. With such a configuration, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective is determined by the elapsed time after the completion of the cyclic display of all the patterns and the timing at which the specific effect is completed, that is, the timing at which the first operation means is operated. can be changed.

Game machine MM1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
Sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with a first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means comprises specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect control means (result display processing function) for performing control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Transition control means (standby processing function S3607) that performs control to shift to the customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, transition enabling means (pressing effect processing) for enabling the transition to the customer waiting state after that and a function to move to S3603).

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has been executed when the specific command is received, the transition to the customer waiting state is possible after that, so the transition to the customer waiting state is made. It is possible to prescribe the timing of the command by the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine MM2. In the gaming machine MM1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the customer waiting state is entered after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition enabling means (a function of ending the depression effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) for enabling the transition.

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. become a thing. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command.

It should be noted that the configuration described in the game machines M3 to M9 is changed from the description of "enable the subsequent predetermined operation" to "enable the transition to the customer waiting state after that". They may be appropriately combined after being changed, and even when they are combined, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Game machine N1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (menu screen) based on the fact that a predetermined operation (operation of effect switch 67) is performed,
When the first effect is executed, when the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and based on the value of the second timer operated after the start of the specific effect A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and the predetermined operation is performed based on the value of the second timer that is operated after the start of the specific effect. Since there is a case where the operation is effective, the timing at which the predetermined operation is effective can be changed according to, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine N2. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it comprises operating means (first timer operating function S3505) for operating the first timer when the first effect is started.

According to this game machine, the first timer is activated when the first effect is started. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the elapsed time after starting the first effect, and the time elapsed after starting the specific effect. Based on this, it is possible to have a configuration in which the predetermined operation is valid.

Game machine N3. In the game machine N1 or the game machine N2, a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether or not the value of the first timer is a specified value (0); Execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether or not it has become, and when the value of the first timer becomes the specified value after the specific effect has been executed, the predetermined A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that an operation is effective.

According to this game machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific effect has been executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. , it is possible to reduce the chance that the first effect and the specific effect are delayed.

Game machine N4. In the gaming machine N3, when the specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, or when the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value (0). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that the predetermined operation is effective at the time.

According to this gaming machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value and the specific effect has not been executed, when the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value, the predetermined operation is valid. Become. With this configuration, when the first operating means is operated so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific effect is executed according to the operation timing of the first operating means. After the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the first operation means is operated so that the specific effect is completed. In this case, it is possible to keep the length of time from when the specific effect has been executed until the predetermined operation becomes effective.

Game machine N5. The gaming machine N4, wherein the gaming machine further comprises second operating means (second timer operating function S4212) for operating the second timer when the specific effect has been executed.

According to this game machine, since the second timer is activated when the specific effect is completed, the length from when the specific effect is completed until the predetermined operation becomes effective is fixed. It becomes possible to

Game machine N6. In the gaming machine N5, the second operating means does not operate the second timer when the specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer is not operated, and the specified value is specified after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. When the performance has been executed, the second timer is activated. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. does not operate, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Game machine N7. In any one of the gaming machines N3 to N6, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this game machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. can be configured so as not to operate.

Game machine N8. The game machine N1 is characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer is configured not to operate when the first timer is operating, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective while simplifying the processing configuration. .

Game machine N9. In the gaming machine N8, confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether or not the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific effect has been executed; and second operating means for operating the second timer when confirming means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, it is checked whether or not the value of the first timer is the specified value when the specific effect has been executed, and if the value of the first timer is the specified value, the second timer works. By adopting such a configuration, the first timer is operated until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific performance is completed. It becomes possible to operate the second timer at the timing.

Game machine N10. In the game machine N9, the game machine is characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this game machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. can be configured so as not to operate.

Game machine NN1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for shifting to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state),
When the first effect is executed, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and based on the value of the second timer which is operated after the start of the specific effect A game machine characterized by having a case where it shifts to said customer waiting state.

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the customer waiting state is shifted to the customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and the customer Since there is a case of transitioning to the waiting state, it is possible to change the timing of transitioning to the customer waiting state, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the configurations described in the game machines N2 to N10 may be combined as appropriate after changing the description "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state". Even if there is, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Note that the game machine group L to the game machine group N may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group A to the game machine group K may be appropriately combined with the game machine group L to the game machine N group.

Game machine O1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
a first termination means (advantageous section termination functions S1703 to S1705 of the main controller 101) for terminating the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state when the first termination condition (the difference in the number of sheets is 2400) is established;
Second termination means for terminating the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is established. (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101);
A control means (display control device 81) for controlling to display an end screen notifying that the advantageous state ends,
When the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the control means performs control to display the end screen in the next game round after the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O2. In the gaming machine O1, the first end condition is established when the difference number of sheets from the base point when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of sheets (2400 sheets). A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, when the number of game media decreases the most in an advantageous state as a base point, and if the difference number from the base point reaches the upper limit number, the game ends in the next game round after the difference number reaches the upper limit number. A screen appears. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. This is because the game round in which the condition is satisfied may be shifted, and an event may occur in which the end screen is displayed over a plurality of game rounds under the situation where the advantageous state has not ended.

Game machine O3. The gaming machine O2 is provided with difference number confirmation means (difference number confirmation function S4511 of the main controller 101) for confirming the difference number, and the difference number confirmation means reaches a specified number (2200) which is less than the upper limit number. A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the first end condition is satisfied in a subsequent game round, the advantageous state ends.

According to this game machine, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number of coins, which is less than the upper limit number of coins, has been reached, the first end condition is established in the subsequent game round, and the advantageous state ends. By adopting such a configuration, the player can play the game in an advantageous state with the goal that the difference number reaches the specified number. As a result, even in the case of setting an upper limit to the difference number in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play. Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to grasp in advance that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. 1. It is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects until the end condition is satisfied.

Game machine O4. In the game machine O3, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number has been reached, control is performed to execute a continuous auxiliary effect (ending image) that continues until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by comprising a continuation assistance effect control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of a display control device 81).

According to this game machine, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number has been reached, the continuation assistance performance is executed until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends by means of the continuous assist effect, and the player waits until the first end condition is actually satisfied. can be played while being immersed in a sense of superiority. In addition, since the end screen is displayed in the game round next to the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, the player can play the next game round while enjoying the afterglow. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when a condition for ending the second game mode is established, the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, etc., and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O6. In the gaming machine O5, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the end screen is displayed before the game cycle for which the second end condition is satisfied is finished. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the end screen is displayed before the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the end of the game round. This is because it becomes impossible to sufficiently secure the time for displaying .

Game machine O7. In the game machine O5 or the game machine O6, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one cyclic display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied causes the pattern to be cyclically displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is displayed under a situation in which the game machine is not stopped.

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one of the cyclic display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied does not stop the cyclic display of the pattern. The end screen will be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the cyclic display means have stopped the cyclic display of the patterns. This is because if the operation means is operated, the time for displaying the end screen cannot be sufficiently secured.

Game machine O8. Any one of the game machines O5 to O7 is provided with number information storage means (transition game number counter) for storing number information relating to the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, and corresponds to the number information. A game machine characterized in that a condition for ending the second game mode is satisfied when a game is played a number of times.

According to this gaming machine, when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, the end condition of the second game mode is established. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the second game mode and the advantageous state have not ended.

Game machine O9. In the gaming machine O8, increasing lottery means (additional lottery processing function S4403 of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode; a winning notification means (revival performance in an auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery.

Game machine O10. In any one of the game machines O1 to O9, when the second game mode is shifted to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine P1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
A game characterized in that, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, an end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. machine.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine P2. In the game machine P1, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the transition determination means is the first game mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until a game round is determined to shift to the mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game cycle in the normal state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects that are executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P3. The gaming machine P2 is characterized by comprising a number-of-games informing means (continuous game number display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for informing the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game mode, the number of games played in the first game mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played under the first game mode is not the same, so the number of games cannot be reported or updated under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the players may think that the games under normal conditions are meaningless and lose their desire to play. . However, in the case where the end screen is continuously displayed at each game round in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played under the first game mode, so that there is no discomfort in appearance. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine P4. In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the transition is performed. The judging means is characterized in that a ratio of judging that the normal state is shifted to the first game mode is higher than a ratio of judging that the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode. game machine.

According to this game machine, the ratio of determining to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is higher than the ratio of determining not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the player stays in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen in the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary performances executed in the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity. Further, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or the gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, and the player ends the game with the end screen displayed. It is possible to reduce the chances of being lost.

Game machine P5. In any one of the game machines P1 to P4, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of difference displayed in the above is configured so as not to reflect the game result in the normal state.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state to when the advantageous state ends. The game result in the normal state is not reflected in the number of difference displayed on the end screen. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of game media acquired by the player in an advantageous state even when the end screen is displayed in the normal state. In addition, since processing for updating the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P6. In any one of the game machines P1 to P5, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode, and the transition determination Advantageous information informing means (suggestive orb and confirmed orb display function of auxiliary display section 65) for informing the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player when the means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode, advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game in the normal state.

Game machine P7. In the gaming machine P6, the advantageous information notifying means is configured so that all of the plurality of cyclic display means are capable of circulating the pattern in a game turn in which the transition determining means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. The game machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is displayed before all of the plurality of circulating display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern in the game round in which the shift determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern, the notification is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for a player who wants to confirm advantageous information to play a game under a normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating due to the normal state.

Game machine P8. In the game machine P6 or the game machine P7, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is notified based on the number of times the normal state continues. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the normal state does not shift to the first game mode. Further, when this configuration is applied to the configuration related to the gaming machine P2, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal state. If the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. This is because it is possible to have the player hold the player and to direct the player's attention to the advantageous information.

Game machine P9. Any one of the game machines P1 to P8 is characterized by comprising end screen control means (display control device 81) for performing control to display the end screen in a game turn in which the second game mode ends. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen may be displayed in the game round when the second game mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will perceive the normal state. .

Game machine P10. In the gaming machine P9, an increase lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. a processing function S4403), and winning notification means (resurrection effect in the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating. For example, when a predetermined player ends the game with the end screen displayed, the start operation means is operated to start the next game round while making the other players expect the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to

Game machine P11. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, when the first ending condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is established, the first ending means (of the main controller 101) for ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state Advantageous section end functions (S1703 to S1705) and a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) are established, the advantageous state is ended. A second termination means (advantageous section termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101) for shifting to the normal state, and a control means (display control device 81), wherein, when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the game round following the game round in which the first end condition is met. and, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the game machine performs control to display the end screen in the game cycle in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine Q1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
Transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode;
Advantageous information notification means for informing the player of advantageous information (suggestion orb of auxiliary display unit 65, fixed orb display function) when the transition determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode, advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game in the normal state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine Q2. In the gaming machine Q1, the advantageous information notifying means is configured so that all of the plurality of circulating display means circulate the pattern in the game turn in which the transition determining means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. The game machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is displayed before all of the plurality of circulating display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern in the game round in which the shift determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern, the notification is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for a player who wants to confirm advantageous information to play a game under a normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating due to the normal state.

Game machine Q3. In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is notified based on the number of times the normal state continues. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the normal state does not shift to the first game mode.

Game machine Q4. In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, when the second game mode is shifted to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed in the first game of the normal state. A game machine characterized by having a configuration in which is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine Q5. In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until a game turn in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the first game mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game cycle in the normal state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects that are executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, if the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game may become monotonous under normal conditions. However, in the configuration in which the advantageous information is reported when the normal state continues, it is possible to make the player have expectations that, for example, the next game may be reported with different advantageous information from the current one. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the advantageous information. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine Q6. The game machine Q5 is characterized in that it comprises a number-of-games informing means (continuous game number display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for informing the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game mode, the number of games played in the first game mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played under the first game mode is not the same, so the number of games cannot be reported or updated under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the players may think that the games under normal conditions are meaningless and lose their desire to play. . However, in the case where the end screen is continuously displayed at each game round in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played under the first game mode, so that there is no discomfort in appearance. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine Q7. In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of difference displayed in the above is configured so as not to reflect the game result in the normal state.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state to when the advantageous state ends. The game result in the normal state is not reflected in the number of difference displayed on the end screen. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of game media acquired by the player in an advantageous state even when the end screen is displayed in the normal state. In addition, since processing for updating the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine Q8. In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the ratio of determining that the transition determination means is to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than a judging ratio.

According to this game machine, the ratio of determining to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is higher than the ratio of determining not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game is played while staying in the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the game in the normal state. In addition, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine Q5, it is possible to reduce the chances of the end screen being continuously displayed for a long period of time, thereby reducing the chances that the player ends the game with the end screen displayed. can be reduced.

Game machine Q9. Any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8 is characterized by comprising end screen control means (display control device 81) for performing control to display the end screen in the game round in which the second game mode ends. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen may be displayed in the game round when the second game mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will perceive the normal state. .

Game machine Q10. In the gaming machine Q9, an increase lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode a processing function S4403), and winning notification means (resurrection effect in the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating. For example, when a predetermined player ends the game with the end screen displayed, the start operation means is operated to start the next game round while making the other players expect the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to

Game machine Q11. In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, when the first end condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is established, the first end means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end functions (S1703 to S1705) and a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) are established, the advantageous state is ended. A second termination means (advantageous section termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101) for shifting to the normal state, and a control means (display control device 81), wherein, when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the game round following the game round in which the first end condition is met. and, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the game machine performs control to display the end screen in the game cycle in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the O group of gaming machines to the Q group of gaming machines may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group A to the game machine group N may be appropriately combined with the game machine group O to the game machine group Q, and even in the case of the combination, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine R1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a judgment target to be judged in the lottery of the role,
When the plurality of stop operation means are operated by a first operation method (middle left and right), a prize is established in which a first number (8) of game media is provided, and the plurality of stop operation means is operated by an operation method different from the first operation method. a first determination object (middle left and right bells 1) on which a prize can be awarded in which a second number (1) of game media smaller than the first number is awarded when the stop operation means of is operated;
When the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the first operation method, a prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, and the plurality of stop operation means is operated by an operation method different from the first operation method. at least a second determination object (first special bell) that can establish a prize for awarding the second number of game media when operated,
A first group is formed by the first determination target and another predetermined determination target (left middle right bell 1), and the second determination target and another predetermined determination target different from the first group (second special A game machine characterized in that a second group is formed by a bell).

According to this gaming machine, when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation method, a winning prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded as a determination target to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination. A first determination target that can win a prize in which a second number of game media smaller than the first number is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the operation method, and a plurality of game media by the first operation method. When a stop operation means is operated, a first number of game media is awarded, and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the first operation method, a second number of game media is awarded. is provided at least as a second determination target with which a winning prize can be established. By adopting such a configuration, a plurality of lottery results of the lottery means can be obtained for one event in which a prize is awarded in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation method. Correspondence becomes possible.

In addition, the first determination target forms a first group with another predetermined determination target, and the second determination target forms a second group with another predetermined determination target different from the first group. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control according to the group.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine R2. In the gaming machine R1, a winning prize in which the first number of game media is provided when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation method (right, left, middle) as a determination target determined in the lottery for the winning combination is established, and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the second operation method, the second number of game media is provided. ), a prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the second operation method, and the plurality of stop operation means are stopped by an operation method different from the second operation method. a fourth determination object (third special bell) that can establish a winning prize in which the second number of game media is awarded when the operating means is operated, and the first group comprises at least the first determination A gaming machine, wherein the target and the third determination target are included, and the second group includes at least the second determination target and the fourth determination target.

According to this gaming machine, when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by the second operation method as the determination target to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination, a winning prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, and the second A third determination target that can establish a prize in which a second number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the operation method, and a plurality of stop operation means are operated by the second operation method. Winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when the first number of game media is awarded, and winning in which the second number of game media is awarded is established when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the second operation method. A possible fourth determination target is provided at least. By adopting such a configuration, a plurality of lottery results of the lottery means can be obtained for one event in which a prize is awarded in which the first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by the second operation method. Correspondence becomes possible.

Also, the first group includes at least the first determination target and the third determination target, and the second group includes at least the second determination target and the fourth determination target. By adopting such a configuration, even if it is sensed to which group the determination object belongs to, the operation method for realizing the winning of the first number of game media is possible. It is possible to avoid being caught.

Game machine R3. In the game machine R2, the first operation method and the second operation method are different in operation order of the plurality of stop operation means.

According to this game machine, the first operation method and the second operation method differ in the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a univocal correspondence between which group the determination object belongs to and the operation order for establishing the winning prize in which the first number of game media is provided. becomes possible.

Game machine R4. The gaming machine R2 or R3, wherein the probability of winning the first determination target is equal to the probability of winning the third determination target.

According to this gaming machine, since the probability of winning the first determination target is equal to the probability of winning the third determination target, when performing control according to the first group, the first operation method The establishment probability of awarding the first number of game media is different between when a plurality of stop operation means are operated and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by a second operation method. can be avoided.

Game machine R5. In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, a gaming machine characterized in that the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target.

According to this gaming machine, the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target. The establishment probability of awarding the first number of game media is different between when a plurality of stop operation means are operated and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by a second operation method. can be avoided.

Game machine R6. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines R2 to R5, a plurality of determination objects having equal winning probabilities are put together into one group.

According to this gaming machine, since a plurality of determination targets with equal winning probabilities are grouped into one group, when performing control according to the group, the winning establishment probability of awarding the first number of game media is determined by the operating method. It is possible to avoid becoming different depending on the

Game machine R7. In any one of the game machines R1 to R6, a plurality of determination targets for establishing a prize in which the first number of game media is provided only when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operation method are grouped into one group.

According to this gaming machine, since a plurality of determination targets for which a prize of the first number of game media is provided only when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by a predetermined operation method are grouped together, When performing control according to the group, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the winning probability of awarding the first number of game media differs depending on the operation method.

Game machine R8. In any one of the game machines R1 to R7, the first group is provided with the first number of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a specific operation method (left, center, right). Judgment object (left, middle, right bell 1) in which the second number of game media is provided when a prize is established and the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the specific operation method. and the second group includes a winning that the first number of game media is provided when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the specific operation method, and an operation method different from the specific operation method. A game machine characterized in that it does not include a determination target that can establish a winning prize in which the second number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated.

According to this gaming machine, the first group wins a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated by a specific operation method, and a plurality of game media are awarded by an operation method different from the specific operation method. The second group includes a judgment target that can establish a winning prize in which the second number of game media is awarded when the stop operation means of the second group is operated, and the second group includes the first Including a judgment target that can establish a winning award in which a second number of game media is awarded when a winning operation in which a number of game media is awarded is established and a plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the specific operation method. do not have. By adopting such a configuration, the first number of game media is provided when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the specific operation method and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method other than the specific operation method. It is possible to realize a configuration with different establishment probabilities of winning with a relatively simple configuration.

Game machine R9. an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) for informing an operation method capable of establishing a winning prize in which the first number of game media is provided in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R8; and a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation method, and the notification determination means wins a determination target belonging to the first group. A gaming machine characterized in that the frequency of determining to notify the operation method is different between a case and a case of winning a judgment target belonging to the second group.

According to this gaming machine, winning in which the first number of game media is provided can be realized when the determination object belonging to the first group is won and when the determination object belonging to the second group is won. The frequency of determination differs when the possible operation methods are notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation method.

Game machine R10. In the gaming machine R9, main control means (main control device 101) which has at least the lottery means and the notification determination means and controls the progress of the game, and a subordinate control means based on information transmitted from the main control means and a sub-control means (display control device 81) for performing control, wherein the main control means determines that the notification determination means selects the operation method in a situation in which a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won. When it is determined to notify, the information indicating which determination target has been won is transmitted to the sub-control means, and in the situation where the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group has been won, the notification determining means determines the When it is decided not to notify the operation method, information indicating the group to which the winning determination target belongs is transmitted to the sub-control means, while information indicating which determination target is selected is not transmitted to the sub-control means. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, there are at least lottery means and notification determination means, main control means for controlling the progress of the game, sub-control means for performing subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means, It has Then, when the notification determining means determines to notify the operation method in a situation in which the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won, the main control means sub-controls the information indicating which determination target has been won. Send to means. When the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation method in a situation where the determination object belonging to the first group or the second group is won, information indicating the group to which the winning determination object belongs is transmitted to the sub-control means. , does not transmit to the sub-control means the information indicating which determination target has been won. With such a configuration, when the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation method in a situation in which the judgment object belonging to the first group or the second group is won, the sub-control means determines which judgment object has been won. It is possible to have a configuration that is not grasped by As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acquisition of a winning determination target from the sub-control means.

Game machine S1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a judgment target to be judged in the lottery for the winning combination, a specific judgment target in which a first number (8) of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation order (center left and right) is established. (Middle left/right bell 1, first special bell) and the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order (left, middle, right) to establish a predetermined judgment target in which the first number of game media is awarded. (left middle right bell 1), and at least a plurality of the specific determination targets are provided,
a first group including the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target, and the specific determination target, and and a second group that does not include the predetermined determination target while including
an operation order notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation order in which a prize awarded with the first number of game media can be established;
A notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation order,
The operation order notification means, in a specific game state (notification mode A), when the determination target belonging to the first group is won, and when the determination target belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is determined. A gaming machine characterized by different notification frequencies.

According to this gaming machine, as the determination targets determined in the lottery for the winning combination, a specific determination target in which a prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, A predetermined determination target is provided in which a winning of a first number of game media is established when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order, and at least a plurality of specific determination targets are provided. With such a configuration, the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. It is possible to vary the frequency at which winnings are established.

In addition, the determination target for which the first number of game media is awarded according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means is set to a first group including the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target, and a group including the specific determination target. and a second group that does not include a predetermined judgment object, and in the specific game state, if the judgment object belonging to the first group is won, and if the judgment object belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is The frequency of reporting is different. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order in the specific game state. As a result, in the case where the determination target for establishing the winning award in which the first number of game media is provided is won according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means, the operation order is notified, the operation order is not notified, A certain specific game state can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in a configuration having, for example, three types of operation orders that can establish a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded, if the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation order (right, left, middle), the above-mentioned A third determination target (bell 1 in the middle of the right and left) is provided, and a first group including the specific determination target, the predetermined determination target, and the third determination target; With a configuration in which the determination targets are classified into a second group that includes the third determination target but does not include the predetermined determination target, the above-described effects can be achieved. The same applies to a configuration having four or more kinds of the above operation orders.

Game machine S2. The game machine S1 is characterized in that the probability of winning one of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined determination target.

According to this gaming machine, the probability of winning one of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined determination target. With such a configuration, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, the first number of game media is awarded more than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. It is possible to increase the frequency of establishment of winning prizes.

Game machine S3. In the game machine S1 or the game machine S2, the notification determination means determines to notify the operation order with a predetermined probability when a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific game state, and the second A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to notify the operation order without fail when a determination target belonging to a group is won.

According to this game machine, in the specific game state, when the judgment object belonging to the first group is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability, and when the judgment object belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is guaranteed. decides to notify By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities between players due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of establishment of a prize awarded with the first number of game media is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of establishment of prizes in which the first number of game media is awarded to a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is increased. Differences will occur. However, in the configuration in which it is determined that the operation order is always notified when a judgment target belonging to the second group is won, the difference between the winning probability of the specific judgment object and the winning probability of the predetermined judgment object in the situation where the operation order is not notified. This is because it is possible to reduce the difference, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded.

Game machine S4. In the gaming machine S3, the gaming machine is characterized in that winning probabilities of determination objects belonging to the first group are made equal.

According to this gaming machine, the winning probabilities of the determination objects belonging to the first group are equal. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a difference in the winning frequency in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified under the specific game state. becomes.

Game machine S5. In any one of the game machines S1 to S4, the notification determination means has a second specific game state (notification mode B) in which the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation order is higher than the specific game state, and the notification is performed. The determining means determines that the operation order is reported at a higher frequency than the specific game state if the second specific game state is selected when the determination object belonging to the first group is won, and the operation order belongs to the second group. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a determination target is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with equal frequency in the specific game state and the second specific game state.

According to this game machine, when the determination object belonging to the first group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation order is notified at a higher frequency than in the specific game state in the second specific game state. When the determination object belonging to the group is won, it is determined that the operation order is reported with equal frequency in the specific game state and the second specific game state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities between players due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of establishment of prizes in which the first number of game media is awarded to a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is increased. Differences will occur. However, in the case where the determination object belonging to the second group is won, the frequency of determining to notify the operation order in the specific game state and the second specific game state does not change, in a situation where the operation order is not notified This is because it is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the specific judgment target and the winning probability of the predetermined judgment target, and to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. be.

Game machine S6. In the gaming machine S5, based on the fact that the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation order, the second 2. A game machine characterized by comprising transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state.

According to this game machine, the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and based on the decision that the notification determination means does not notify the operation order, the second specific game state is entered. It is determined whether or not to transfer. By adopting such a configuration, even if the operation order is not notified in the specific game state, it is possible to play the game while expecting the transition to the second specific game state, thereby improving the game interest. becomes possible.

Game machine S7. In the above-described gaming machine S6, the transition determination means determines whether or not to transition to the second specific game state when a winning award in which the first number of game media is awarded is established. machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a prize awarded with the first number of game media is established, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second specific game state. In such a configuration, a player who knows that the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media differs depending on the order of operations, and a player who does not know the fact, enter the second specific game state. A difference occurs in the transition probability. This not only creates profit disparities among players, but can also lead to the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S5, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. becomes possible.

Game machine S8. In any one of the game machines S1 to S7, a determination object belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation order. A gaming machine comprising provision determination means for determining whether or not to provide a privilege related to the number of games that can be played under the specific game state.

According to this game machine, the determination object belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and based on the decision that the notification determination means does not notify the operation order, the game is played under the specific game state It is determined whether or not to give a privilege related to the number of possible games. By adopting such a configuration, even if the operation order is not notified under the specific game state, the game can be played while expecting that the privilege related to the number of games that can be played under the specific game state will be granted. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of game interest.

Game machine S9. In the gaming machine S8, the grant determination means determines whether or not to grant a privilege related to the number of times the game can be played in the specific game state when a prize is awarded in which the first number of game media is awarded. A gaming machine characterized by judging.

According to this gaming machine, when a prize awarded with the first number of game media is established, it is determined whether or not to award a privilege related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state. In such a configuration, there is a difference in the awarding probability of the privilege between a player who knows that the winning frequency of awarding the first number of game media differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the fact. will occur. This not only creates profit disparities among players, but can also lead to the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S8, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. becomes possible.

Game machine S10. In any one of the game machines S1 to S9, a predetermined game state (chance mode) in which the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation order is lower than the specific game state, and from the predetermined game state to the A specific transition means (game section processing function of the main control device 101) for shifting to a specific game state, and the plurality of stop operation means in a situation where the specific transition means is not notified of the first operation order When operated in the first operation order, the frequency of shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order in a situation where the first operation order is not notified, compared to the case where the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order, The frequency of shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state is reduced. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to differentiate the increase and decrease of the game media between the predetermined game state and the specific game state while prompting the player to operate the plurality of stop operation means in the second operation order. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine T1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
A first determination in which a first number (8) of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation order (middle left and right) as a determination target determined in the lottery for the combination is established. When the target (center left and right bell 1, first special bell) and the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order (left, center, right), the first number of game media is provided. A judgment target (left middle right bell 1) is provided,
an operation order notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation order in which a prize awarded with the first number of game media can be established;
A notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation order,
A configuration in which the probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target,
The operation order notification means, in a specific game state (notification mode A), the frequency of notifying the operation order when the first determination target is won is the operation order when the second determination target is won. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the notification frequency.

According to the present gaming machine, the determination target determined in the winning lottery is the first determination target in which the winning of the first number of game media is established when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order. and a second determination target for establishing a winning prize in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. The probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target. With such a configuration, the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. It is possible to vary the frequency at which winnings are established.

Also, in the specific game state, the frequency of notifying the operation order when the first determination object is won is higher than the frequency of notifying the operation order when the second determination object is won. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparity in the specific game state for the player due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of establishment of prizes in which the first number of game media is awarded to a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is increased. Differences will occur. However, in the specific game state, the frequency of notifying the operation order when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency of notifying the operation order when the second determination target is won. It is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first determination object and the winning probability of the second determination object in a situation where no information is given, and reduce the difference in the frequency of establishment of a prize awarded with the first number of game media. This is because it becomes possible to

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine T2. In the game machine T1, when the operation order is not notified under the specific game state, the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, and the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order. The winning probabilities of the first determination target and the second determination target and the notification determination means are set so that the winning probability of winning the first number of game media is equal to that in the case of operating in the two operation order. and a frequency of determining that the operation order is to be notified.

According to this game machine, when the operation order is not notified under the specific game state, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order The winning probability of the first determination target and the second determination target, and the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation order so that the winning probability of winning the first number of game media is the same in the case of and are stipulated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of profit disparity in the specific game state for the player due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine.

Game machine T3. In the game machine T1 or game machine T2, the first determination target or the second determination target is won under the specific game state, and the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation order Based on that, A gaming machine comprising grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege relating to the number of times a game can be played under the specific gaming state.

According to this game machine, it is possible to play under the specific game state based on the fact that the first determination target or the second determination target is won under the specific game state, and the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation order. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege related to the number of games played. By adopting such a configuration, even if the operation order is not notified under the specific game state, the game can be played while expecting that the privilege related to the number of games that can be played under the specific game state will be granted. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of game interest.

Game machine T4. In the gaming machine T3, the grant determination means determines whether or not to grant a privilege related to the number of times the game can be played in the specific game state when a prize is awarded in which the first number of game media is awarded. A gaming machine characterized by judging.

According to this gaming machine, when a prize awarded with the first number of game media is established, it is determined whether or not to award a privilege related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state. In such a configuration, there is a difference in the awarding probability of the privilege between a player who knows that the winning frequency of awarding the first number of game media differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the fact. will occur. This not only creates profit disparities among players, but can also lead to the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T3, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. becomes possible.

Game machine T5. In any one of the game machines T1 to T4, a predetermined game state (chance mode) in which the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence is lower than the specific game state, and from the predetermined game state to the A specific transition means (game section processing function of the main control device 101) for shifting to a specific game state, and the plurality of stop operation means in a situation where the specific transition means is not notified of the first operation order When operated in the first operation order, the frequency of shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order in a situation where the first operation order is not notified, compared to the case where the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order, The frequency of shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state is reduced. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to differentiate the increase and decrease of the game media between the predetermined game state and the specific game state while prompting the player to operate the plurality of stop operation means in the second operation order. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine T6. In any one of the game machines T1 to T5, a plurality of the first determination targets are provided, and the determination targets for which the first number of game media are awarded according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means are established. , a first group including the first determination target and the second determination target, and a second group including the first determination target but not including the second determination target, and the notification determining means In the specific gaming state, the frequency of determining that the operation order is notified differs between when the determination target belonging to the first group is won and when the determination target belonging to the second group is won. Characteristic game machine.

According to this gaming machine, since a plurality of first determination targets are provided, it is possible to relatively easily realize a configuration in which the probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target. becomes.

Further, a first group including a first determination target and a second determination target and a first determination target for determining a winning prize in which the first number of game media are provided according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means are selected. and a second group that does not include the second judgment object, and in the specific game state, if the judgment object belonging to the first group is won, and if the judgment object belonging to the second group is won. , are configured to have different frequencies for determining the operation order to be notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order in the specific game state. As a result, in the case where the determination target for establishing the winning award in which the first number of game media is provided is won according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means, the operation order is notified, the operation order is not notified, A certain specific game state can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in a configuration having, for example, three types of operation orders that can establish a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded, if the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation order (right, left, middle), the above-mentioned a third determination target (bell 1 in the middle of the right and left) is provided, and a first group includes the first determination target, the second determination target, and the third determination target; With a configuration in which the objects are classified into a second group that includes the first determination target and the third determination target but does not include the second determination target, the above effects can be achieved. The same applies to a configuration having four or more kinds of the above operation orders.

Game machine T7. In the gaming machine T6, the notification determining means determines to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability when a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific game state, and determines to belong to the second group. A game machine characterized in that it is determined to notify the operation order without fail when an object is won.

According to this game machine, in the specific game state, when the judgment object belonging to the first group is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability, and when the judgment object belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is guaranteed. decides to notify By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities between players due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of establishment of prizes in which the first number of game media is awarded to a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is increased. Differences will occur. However, in a configuration in which it is determined that the operation order is always notified when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the winning probability of the first determination target and the winning probability of the second determination target in a situation where the operation order is not reported. This is because it is possible to reduce the difference between , and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded.

Game machine T8. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine T7, winning probabilities of determination objects belonging to the first group are made equal.

According to this gaming machine, the winning probabilities of the determination objects belonging to the first group are equal. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a difference in the winning frequency in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified under the specific game state. becomes.

Game machine T9. In any one of the game machines T6 to T8, the notification determining means has a second specific game state (notification mode B) in which the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation order is higher than the specific game state, and the notification is performed. The determining means determines that the operation order is reported at a higher frequency than the specific game state if the second specific game state is selected when the determination object belonging to the first group is won, and the operation order belongs to the second group. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a determination target is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with equal frequency in the specific game state and the second specific game state.

According to this game machine, when the determination object belonging to the first group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation order is notified at a higher frequency than in the specific game state in the second specific game state. When the determination object belonging to the group is won, it is determined that the operation order is reported with equal frequency in the specific game state and the second specific game state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities between players due to the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of establishment of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of establishment of prizes in which the first number of game media is awarded to a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is increased. Differences will occur. However, in the case where the determination object belonging to the second group is won, the frequency of determining to notify the operation order in the specific game state and the second specific game state does not change, in a situation where the operation order is not notified It is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first determination object and the winning probability of the second determination object, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. It is from.

Game machine T10. In the gaming machine T9, based on the fact that the determination object belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation order, the second 2. A game machine characterized by comprising transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state.

According to this game machine, the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific game state, and based on the decision that the notification determination means does not notify the operation order, the second specific game state is entered. It is determined whether or not to transfer. By adopting such a configuration, even if the operation order is not notified in the specific game state, it is possible to play the game while expecting the transition to the second specific game state, thereby improving the game interest. becomes possible.

Game machine T11. In the gaming machine T10, the transition determination means determines whether or not to transition to the second specific game state when a winning award in which the first number of game media is provided is established. machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a prize awarded with the first number of game media is established, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second specific game state. In such a configuration, a player who knows that the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media differs depending on the order of operations, and a player who does not know the fact, enter the second specific game state. A difference occurs in the transition probability. This not only creates profit disparities among players, but can also lead to the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T10, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning prizes awarded with the first number of game media. becomes possible.

Note that the game machine group R to the game machine group T may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine group Q may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group R to the gaming machine group T, and even when the gaming machines are combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine U1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, a first game state (chance mode) and an operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (bell prize) are higher than the first game state. and a second game state (notification mode),
grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant advantageous benefits (transition to notification mode, addition of number of games);
Advantageous privilege granting means (notification mode shift function S6307 of main control unit 101, number of added games addition function S7010) for granting the advantageous privilege when the grant determination means determines that the advantageous privilege is to be granted;
Effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestive effect (confrontation effect) suggesting whether or not the advantageous privilege is given;
execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect;
a period setting means for setting a plurality of game rounds as an effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect,
The execution determining means is
First execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery of display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect in a situation where the grant determining means does not determine to grant the advantageous privilege under the first game state function S6702);
Second execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery of main controller 101) that determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect in a situation where the grant determining means does not determine to grant the advantageous privilege under the second game state function S6901),
The period setting means is
a first period setting means (fight game number setting function S6705 of the display control device 81) for setting the effect period when the first execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect;
a second period setting means (fighting game number setting function S6904 of the main controller 101) for setting the effect period when the second execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect;
The second execution determining means and the second period setting means are provided in main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of the game, and the first execution determining means and the first period setting means are provided in the main control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided in a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the means.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not an advantageous privilege is given, a plurality of game rounds are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the provision of the advantageous privilege over a plurality of game rounds, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Whether or not to execute the suggestive performance in a situation where the grant determination means does not determine to grant an advantageous privilege under the first game state is determined by the slave control means, and determination is made under the second game state. Whether or not to execute the suggestive performance in a situation where the means has not determined to give an advantageous privilege is determined by the main control means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control means, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine U2. In the gaming machine U1, the main control means manages the game state and includes the provision determination means and the advantageous benefit provision means, and the provision determination means controls the The gaming machine is characterized by determining whether or not to give an advantageous privilege that increases the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the grant determination means determines whether or not to grant, in the second game state, an advantageous privilege that increases the number of games that can be played in the second game state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the grant determination means has not determined to grant the advantageous privilege under the second game state, if the slave control means side determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is determined. There is a possibility that the processing configuration for determining whether or not to execute an effect will be complicated, or that executable effects will be restricted. This is because, depending on the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state, there is a possibility that the number of games played during the set effect period will be restricted, or that the suggestive effect itself cannot be executed. On the other hand, in a situation where the grant determination means has not determined to grant the advantageous privilege under the second game state, if the configuration is such that the main control means side determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, each of the above It is possible to suitably resolve concerns.

Game machine U3. The game machine U2 is characterized in that, when the second period setting means sets the performance period, the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this game machine, since the second game state is not completed until the performance period set by the second period setting means is completed, for example, it is decided to execute the suggestive performance in the last game round of the second game state. In this case, the number of games that can be played under the second game state is increased by the number of games set as the performance period. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player even when the suggestion effect suggesting that the additional benefit is not given.

Game machine U4. In the gaming machine U3, when the second execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the second period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. and the number of games set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. In this case, changing means ( and a lacking game number addition function S6906) of the main controller 101.

According to this game machine, when the second execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the second period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. be done. When the number of games set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is set for the second period. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed so as to become the number of games set by the means. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to have a configuration in which the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the presentation indicating whether or not the additional privilege is to be provided. For example, when the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state is less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is possible to configure such that the suggestive effect is not executed. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a possibility that the game will become monotonous after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games, despite the need for a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games. Concerned. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to execute another effect suggesting whether or not an increased privilege is given in one game round after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of games. . However, in the case of such a configuration, since it is necessary to store the other effects in advance, there is a new problem of an increase in storage capacity. There is also the issue of acceptance. On the other hand, if the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed to the number of games set by the period setting means, It is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine U5. In the game machine U3 or the game machine U4, the change means changes the second period when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games which can be played under the second game state. When the number of games set by the setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, and when the number of games set by the second period setting means is the second game When it is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase with the execution of the suggestive effect to a situation in which the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation in which the second game state is about to end. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a new game feature in a situation where the second game state is about to end, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine U6. In any one of the game machines U3 to U5, the grant determination means grants the advantageous privilege in game rounds from when the second period setting means sets the performance period to when the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the presentation period does not change when it is determined that the game is to be played.

According to this game machine, the length of the performance period does not change even when it is determined that the advantageous privilege is given in the middle of the performance period. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration while avoiding an unnecessarily long performance period.

Game machine U7. In the gaming machine U6, in the game round from when the second period setting means sets the effect period until the end of the effect period, when the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous privilege, the effect The gaming machine, wherein the executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous privilege is given.

According to this game machine, the second period setting means sets the performance period under the condition that the grant determination means does not determine to grant the advantageous privilege, and the grant determination means is advantageous in the game rounds until the performance period ends. When it is determined that a privilege is to be given, a suggestive performance suggesting that an advantageous privilege is to be given is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect according to the determination result of the provision determining means even when the length of the effect period is not changed.

Game machine U8. In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U7, the second execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played under the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive effect.

Game machine U9. In any one of the game machines U1 to U8, the main control means manages the game state, and includes the provision determination means and the advantageous privilege provision means, and the provision determination means includes the A gaming machine characterized in that, in a first game state, it is determined whether or not to grant an advantageous privilege for shifting from the first game state to the second game state.

According to this gaming machine, the grant determination means determines whether or not to grant an advantageous privilege for shifting from the first game state to the second game state in the first game state. In such a configuration, when the grant determination means does not determine that the advantageous privilege is to be granted under the first game state, the first game state continues, so the slave control means executes the suggestive effect. Even if it is configured to determine whether or not to perform, there is no possibility of complicating the processing configuration for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect or restricting the executable effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control means, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine U10. In the gaming machine U9, the main control means includes waiting period setting means (main control means) for setting a plurality of game rounds as a waiting period when the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous privilege in the first game state. The device 101 has a transition game number change function S6207), and the advantageous privilege granting means changes the gaming state after the waiting period elapses when the grant determination means determines that the advantageous privilege is granted in the first gaming state. The first game state is shifted to the second game state, and when the waiting period setting means sets the waiting period, the effect executing means suggests that the advantageous privilege is given during the waiting period. A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance.

According to this gaming machine, when the provision determination means determines that the advantageous privilege is to be provided in the first game state, a plurality of game rounds are set as the waiting period. After the waiting period has elapsed, the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state. At this time, the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that an advantageous privilege is given during the waiting period. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shift the game state after executing the suggestive effect suggesting that the game state is to be shifted from the first game state to the second game state, thereby improving the interest in the game. Become.

Game machine U11. In the gaming machine U10, the main control means includes information transmission means (a confrontation command transmission function S6210 of the main control device 101) for transmitting information related to the setting result of the waiting period to the slave control means, and the slave control When the first period setting means receives the information from the information transmitting means in a game round from when the first period setting means sets the performance period to when the performance period ends, the waiting period ends in a game round. , and the game round in which the effect period ends, effect period changing means (notification game number change function S6404 of the display control device 81) for changing the length of the effect period so as to match. machine.

According to this game machine, the sub-control means determines to execute the suggestion performance under the situation where it is not determined to shift from the first game state to the second game state, sets the performance period, and sets the performance period in the middle of the performance period. When the main control means determines to shift from the first game state to the second game state, the sub-control means makes the game round at which the waiting period ends and the game round at which the effect period ends match. Change the length of the presentation period. With such a configuration, even when the slave control means side decides to execute the suggestive performance, it is possible to execute the suggestive performance suggesting that the advantageous privilege is given during the performance period.

Gaming machine U12. In any one of the game machines U2 to U11, the execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect in a situation where the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous privilege under the first game state. and a third execution determining means (transition lottery function S6204 of the main controller 101) that determines whether the suggestive effect is executed in a situation where the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous privilege under the second game state and a fourth execution determining means (a confrontation effect lottery function S7002 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether or not the third execution determining means and the fourth execution determining means are provided in the main control means. Characteristic game machine.

According to this game machine, in a situation where it is decided to give an advantageous privilege, the main control means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect in either the first game state or the second game state. do. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect at an appropriate timing when it is decided to give the advantageous privilege.

Game machine V1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, a first game state (chance mode) and an operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (bell prize) are higher than the first game state. and a second game state (notification mode),
Giving determination means (additional lottery function S6803 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant an increased privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state;
an increased privilege granting means (additional game number addition function S7010 of the main controller 101) that grants the increased privilege when the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege,
The game machine is characterized in that the number of games that can be played under the second game state may increase even when the grant determination means determines not to grant the increased privilege.

According to this gaming machine, in the second game state, it may be determined whether or not to grant an increase privilege that increases the number of games that can be played in the second game state. Even if it is determined not to grant the bonus, the number of games that can be played in the second game state may increase. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when it is determined not to give the additional benefit.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine V2. In the gaming machine V1, effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestive effect (confrontation effect) suggesting whether or not the increased privilege is given, and execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. (Confrontation effect lottery functions S6901 and S7002 of the main control device 101), and period setting means (main control unit 101) for setting a plurality of game times as an effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect. and (S6904, S7005) of the device 101 for setting the number of confrontation games, wherein the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this game machine, a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not an additional benefit is given may be executed, and when the suggestive effect is executed, a plurality of game rounds are set as the effect period in which the suggestive effect can be executed. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while anticipating the provision of an increased privilege over a plurality of game rounds. Further, since the second game state does not end until the effect period ends, for example, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect in the last game round of the second game state, the number of games set as the effect period is determined. The number of games that can be played under the second game state is increased by the amount. As a result, even if the suggestion effect suggesting that the additional privilege is not given, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player.

Game machine V3. In the gaming machine V2, when the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. When the number of games set by the comparing means (functions S6905 and S7006 for deriving the number of insufficient games of the main control device 101) and the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the second Change means (lack of main controller 101) for changing the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state becomes the number of games set by the period setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising a game number addition function (S6906, S7007).

According to this game machine, when the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. When the number of games set by the period setting means is larger than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is set by the period setting means. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed so as to become the number of games. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to have a configuration in which the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the presentation indicating whether or not the additional privilege is to be provided. For example, when the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state is less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is possible to configure such that the suggestive effect is not executed. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a possibility that the game will become monotonous after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games, despite the need for a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games. Concerned. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to execute another effect suggesting whether or not an increased privilege is given in one game round after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of games. . However, in the case of such a configuration, since it is necessary to store the other effects in advance, there is a new problem of an increase in storage capacity. There is also the issue of acceptance. On the other hand, if the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed to the number of games set by the period setting means, It is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine V4. In the gaming machine V3, the comparison means allows the game to be played in the second game state when the execution determination means determines to execute the suggestive effect in a situation where the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege. as the remaining number of games played, the remaining number of games played before the increased privilege giving means acquires the increased privilege.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the increased privilege provided by the increased privilege providing means is not taken into consideration. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid part of the increased privilege given by the increased privilege providing means being consumed during the performance period.

Game machine V5. In the game machine V3 or the game machine V4, the change means changes the setting of the period setting means when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games which can be played under the second game state. The game machine is characterized in that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed when the number of games played is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, and when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the number of games that can be played under the second game state When it is smaller than the possible remaining number of games, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase with the execution of the suggestive effect to a situation in which the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation in which the second game state is about to end. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a new game feature in a situation where the second game state is about to end, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine V6. In any one of the gaming machines V2 to V5, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played under the second gaming state. Characteristic game machine.

According to this gaming machine, regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive effect.

Game machine V7. Any one of the gaming machines V2 to V6 lacks means for changing the length of the performance period from when the period setting means sets the performance period to when the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, the length of the presentation period is not changed in the middle. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the second game state is not terminated as a result of extension of the performance period.

Game machine V8. In any one of the game machines V2 to V7, the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege in game rounds from when the period setting means sets the performance period to when the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the performance period does not change when the game machine is set.

According to this game machine, even if it is determined to provide the additional privilege in the middle of the performance period, the length of the performance period does not change. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration while avoiding an unnecessarily long performance period.

Game machine V9. In the game machine V7 or the game machine V8, the period setting means sets the production period under the condition that the provision determination means does not provide the increased privilege, and in game rounds until the production period ends The game machine is characterized in that, when the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege, the performance executing means executes a suggestive performance suggesting that the increased privilege is granted.

According to this game machine, the period setting means sets the performance period under the condition that the grant determination means does not grant the increased privilege, and the grant determination means grants the increased privilege in the game rounds until the performance period ends. When it is determined to do so, a suggestive effect suggesting that the increased privilege is given is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect according to the determination result of the provision determining means even when the length of the effect period is not changed.

Gaming machine V10. In any one of the game machines V2 to V9, the execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the determination result of the grant determination means.

According to this gaming machine, whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is determined regardless of the determination result of whether or not to give the increased privilege. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create an opportunity to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game state even when it is determined not to provide the additional privilege, and it is possible to determine not to provide the additional privilege. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the is made.

Game machine W1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A privilege is given to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and a corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (combination of small winning combination patterns, etc.) at an effective position (effective line) and stop. means (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, a first game state (chance mode) and an operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (bell prize) are higher than the first game state. and a second game state (notification mode),
Giving determination means (additional lottery function S6803 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant an increased privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state;
Increased privilege granting means for granting the increased privilege when the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege (additional game number addition function S7010 of the main controller 101);
Effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestive effect (confrontation effect) suggesting whether or not the increased privilege is given;
Execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery functions S6901 and S7002 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect;
period setting means (fighting game number setting functions S6904, S7005 of the main controller 101) for setting a plurality of game times as an effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect;
A gaming machine characterized in that means for changing the length of the performance period set by the period setting means is deficient.

According to this game machine, a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not an additional benefit is given may be executed, and when the suggestive effect is executed, a plurality of game rounds are set as the effect period in which the suggestive effect can be executed. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while anticipating the provision of an increased privilege over a plurality of game rounds.

Also, when the performance period is set, the length of the performance period is not changed in the middle. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration while avoiding an unnecessarily long performance period.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine W2. In the gaming machine W1, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive effect. For example, when the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state is less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is possible to configure such that the suggestive effect is not executed. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a possibility that the game will become monotonous after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games, despite the need for a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games. Concerned. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to execute another effect suggesting whether or not an increased privilege is given in one game round after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of games. . However, in the case of such a configuration, since it is necessary to store the other effects in advance, there is a new problem of an increase in storage capacity. There is also the issue of acceptance. On the other hand, if it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second game state, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine W3. In the gaming machine W2, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the determination result of the grant determining means.

According to this gaming machine, whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is determined regardless of the determination result of whether or not to give the increased privilege. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect even when it is determined not to provide the additional privilege in a situation where the number of remaining games is small, that is, in a situation where the second game state is about to end. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a situation where the two-game state is about to end.

Game machine W4. In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the provision determination means determines that the increased privilege is provided in the game rounds from when the period setting means sets the performance period to when the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the performance period does not change when the game machine is set.

According to this game machine, even if it is determined to provide the additional privilege in the middle of the performance period, the length of the performance period does not change. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration while avoiding an unnecessarily long performance period.

Game machine W5. In any one of the game machines W1 to W4, the period setting means sets the performance period under the condition that the grant determination means determines not to grant the increased privilege, and the period until the performance period ends The game machine is characterized in that, when the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege in a game cycle, the performance executing means executes a suggestive performance suggesting that the increased privilege is granted.

According to this game machine, the period setting means sets the performance period under the condition that the grant determination means does not grant the increased privilege, and the grant determination means grants the increased privilege in the game rounds until the performance period ends. When it is determined to do so, a suggestive effect suggesting that the increased privilege is given is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect according to the determination result of the provision determining means even when the length of the effect period is not changed.

Game machine W6. In any one of the game machines W1 to W5, the game machine is characterized in that the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this game machine, since the second game state is configured not to end until the effect period ends, for example, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect in the last game round of the second game state, the effect period is set. The number of games that can be played under the second game state is increased by the determined number of games. As a result, even if the suggestion effect suggesting that the additional privilege is not given, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player.

Game machine W7. In the gaming machine W6, when the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. When the number of games set by the comparing means (functions S6905 and S7006 for deriving the number of insufficient games of the main control device 101) and the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the second Change means (lack of main controller 101) for changing the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state becomes the number of games set by the period setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising a game number addition function (S6906, S7007).

According to this game machine, when the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state. When the number of games set by the period setting means is larger than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is set by the period setting means. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed so as to become the number of games. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to have a configuration in which the second game state does not end until the performance period ends.

Game machine W8. In the gaming machine W7, the comparison means allows the game to be played in the second game state when the execution determination means determines to execute the suggestive effect in a situation where the grant determination means determines to grant the increased privilege. as the remaining number of games played, the remaining number of games played before the increased privilege giving means acquires the increased privilege.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, the increased privilege provided by the increased privilege providing means is not taken into consideration. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid part of the increased privilege given by the increased privilege providing means being consumed during the performance period.

Game machine W9. In the game machine W7 or the game machine W8, the change means changes the setting of the period setting means when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games which can be played in the second game state. The game machine is characterized in that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed when the number of games played is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, and when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the number of games that can be played under the second game state When it is smaller than the possible remaining number of games, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase with the execution of the suggestive effect to a situation in which the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation in which the second game state is about to end. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a new game feature in a situation where the second game state is about to end, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine W10. In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W9, even if the grant determination means determines not to grant the increased privilege, the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state may increase. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, even if it is determined not to provide the additional privilege, the number of games that can be played in the second game state may increase. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when it is determined not to give the additional benefit.

Note that the gaming machine group U to the gaming machine group W may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine group T may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group U to the gaming machine group W, and even when the gaming machines are combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine X1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) that grants a privilege to a player when the winning combination won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination is established,
As a game state, a first game state (chance mode) and an operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (bell prize) are higher than the first game state. and at least a second game state (notification mode A),
The privilege giving means is configured to give game media equal to or more than the number of bets required for one game when the specific prize is established,
The second game state is configured to have a case where the instruction function is activated and a case where the instruction function is not activated when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result (push order bell winning),
In the first game cycle in which the lottery result of the winning combination in the second game state is the specified result, the frequency with which the instruction function operates is higher than the frequency with which the instruction function does not operate. Amusement machine.

According to this game machine, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is a specific result, the frequency of operation of the instruction function becomes higher than the frequency of non-operation of the instruction function. By adopting such a configuration, even in the case of a configuration in which the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the combination is a specific result under the second gaming state, the game can be played under the second gaming state. It is possible to reduce the chance that the game media owned by the player will run out, and to improve the interest in the game. This is because if the game media owned by the player runs out in the second game state, the player's willingness to play will be greatly reduced.

Game machine X2. In the gaming machine X1, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role becomes the specified result in the second game state, in the second game round in which the lottery result of the role becomes the specified result in the second game state A game machine characterized in that the instruction function operates more frequently than the game times of the game.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result, the number of the winning combination is higher than that in the second game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result. The indication function is activated frequently. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from the transition to the second game state to the first activation of the instruction function.

Game machine X3. The game machine X1 or the game machine X2 is provided with transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state (notification mode A shift function S80109 of the main controller 101), and the first game state is changed to 1 The expected value of the given number of game media per game round is smaller than the number of game media required for one game, and the second game state is set such that the expected value of the given number of game media per game round is 1. A game machine characterized by being configured to have a larger number of game media than required for a single game.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game state, the game media owned by the player are expected to decrease each time the game is played, and in the second game state, the game media owned by the player play the game. expected to increase each year. In such a configuration, in the case where the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the combination in the second game state is a specific result, the game medium owned by the player in the second game state is not activated. It may run out. In addition, when the game media owned by the player runs out in the second game state, there is a concern that the player's motivation for playing the game will be significantly reduced. However, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination in the second game state is a specific result, if the frequency of operation of the instruction function is higher than the frequency of non-operation of the instruction function, the above concerns may arise. can be suitably resolved.

Game machine X4. In any of the gaming machines X1 to X3, when the lottery result of the winning combination in the second gaming state is the specific result, a predetermined lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. The first determination means (navi lottery function S80402 of the main control unit 101) to determine, and when the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result, the specific condition (the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7 a second determination means (navi counter confirmation function S80404 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether or not the above is satisfied; A specific notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display section 65) for notifying an operation method for establishing the specific winning when the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. Amusement machine.

According to this game machine, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is a specific result, when the instruction function is activated based on the result of the predetermined lottery, and when the specific condition is established. The indication function may or may not operate based on With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means from becoming wider than necessary while making the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the first determination means random. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine X5. In the gaming machine X4, in the first game cycle in which the lottery result of the winning combination in the second game state is the specified result, the frequency with which the specific condition is met is higher than the frequency with which the specific condition is not met. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is a specific result, the frequency with which the specific condition is met is higher than the frequency with which the specific condition is not met. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the frequency at which the instruction function operates higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate in the first game round in which the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is the specified result. Become.

Game machine X6. In the gaming machine X4 or gaming machine X5, storage means (navi counter) for storing predetermined information, and update means for updating the predetermined information stored in the storage means (navi counter update function S80201 of main controller 101). , wherein the second determination means determines that the specific condition is established when the predetermined information stored in the storage means is specific information (a value of 8 or more). game machine.

According to this game machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes the specific information, the specific condition is established and the instruction function is activated. With such a configuration, it is possible to define the operation interval of the instruction function according to the update mode of the update means, and suppress the operation interval of the instruction function from becoming wider than necessary with a relatively simple processing configuration. becomes possible.

Game machine X7. In the game machine X6, a transition means (notification mode A transition function S80109 of the main controller 101) for shifting from the first game state to the second game state is provided, and the update means is a predetermined game state in the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a game (three-card game) is played, predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined game is played in the first game state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game cycle in which the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is the specific result. Become. As a result, it is possible to make the frequency of operation of the instruction function higher than the frequency of non-operation of the instruction function in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specified result.

Game machine X8. In the game machine X7, the predetermined game is a game played using game media with a maximum bet number (3) that can be used for one game.

According to this gaming machine, when a game is played using the maximum bet amount of game media that can be used for one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game cycle in which the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is the specific result. Become. For example, when the result of the lottery for the winning combination in the first game state is a specific result, the predetermined information stored in the storage means may be updated. However, if such a configuration is adopted, for example, an event may occur in which the first game state transitions to the second game state before the result of the lottery for the role becomes a specific result. This is because the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information becomes low in the first game cycle in which the result is the specific result.

Game machine X9. In any one of the game machines X6 to X8, the updating means stores the information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (two-card game, three-card game) is performed in the second game state. A game machine characterized by updating predetermined information.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined game is played in the second game state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, even if the first determination means repeats the determination result not to activate the instruction function, it is possible to prevent the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means from becoming wider than necessary. It becomes possible to

Game machine X10. In the game machine X9, the game machine is characterized in that the second predetermined game is to play one game.

According to this gaming machine, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated each time a game is played. By adopting such a configuration, for example, if the interval at which the instruction function operates is widened based on the fact that the lottery result of the role is not the specified result, the next lottery result of the role becomes the specified result. It is possible to operate the instruction function regardless of the determination result of the first determination means once. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is a specific result, the It is possible to reduce the chances of running out of game media.

Game machine X11. In any one of the gaming machines X6 to X10, when the instruction function is activated, changing means for changing the predetermined information stored in the storage means to initial information (navigation counter reset function S80205 of the main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the instruction function is activated, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is changed to the initial information. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means and, at the same time, to suppress an excessively wide operation interval of the instruction function with a relatively simple processing configuration. Become.

Game machine Y1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) that grants a privilege to a player when the winning combination won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination is established,
As a game state, a first game state (chance mode) and an operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize (bell prize) are higher than the first game state. and at least a second game state (notification mode A),
The privilege giving means is configured to give game media equal to or more than the number of bets required for one game when the specific prize is established,
The second game state is configured to have a case where the instruction function is activated and a case where the instruction function is not activated when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result (push order bell winning),
Transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state (notification mode A transition function S80109 of the main controller 101);
a storage means (navi counter) for storing predetermined information;
update means (navi counter update function S80201 of main controller 101) for updating the predetermined information stored in the storage means;
When the result of the lottery for the winning combination is the specified result under the second game state, a specified determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not a specified condition (the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7) has been established. navigation counter confirmation function S80404),
a specific notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation method for establishing the specific winning when the specific determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied;
The specific determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined information stored in the storage means is specific information (a value of 8 or more),
The gaming machine, wherein the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means at least when a predetermined game (three-card game) is played in the first game state.

According to this game machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes the specific information, the specific condition is established and the instruction function is activated. The predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated at least when the predetermined game is played in the first game state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game cycle in which the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is the specific result. Become. As a result, it is possible to make the frequency of operation of the instruction function higher than the frequency of non-operation of the instruction function in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specified result.

As a result of the above, even if the configuration is such that the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is a specific result, the player's possession in the second game state It is possible to reduce the chance of running out of game media to be played, and to improve the interest in the game. This is because if the game media owned by the player runs out in the second game state, the player's willingness to play will be greatly reduced.

Game machine Y2. In the gaming machine Y1, the predetermined game is a game played using game media with a maximum bet number (3) that can be used for one game.

According to this gaming machine, when a game is played using the maximum bet amount of game media that can be used for one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game cycle in which the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is the specific result. Become. For example, when the result of the lottery for the winning combination in the first game state is a specific result, the predetermined information stored in the storage means may be updated. However, if such a configuration is adopted, for example, an event may occur in which the first game state transitions to the second game state before the result of the lottery for the role becomes a specific result. This is because the frequency in which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information becomes low in the first game cycle in which the result is the specific result.

Game machine Y3. In the game machine Y1 or the game machine Y2, when the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result, a predetermined lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. Judging means (navi lottery function S80402 of main control unit 101) is provided, and when the predetermined judging means judges to activate the instruction function, the specific notification means informs the operation method for establishing the specific winning. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is a specific result, when the instruction function is activated based on the result of the predetermined lottery, and when the specific condition is established. The indication function may or may not operate based on By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the predetermined determination means random, and to prevent the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the specific determination means from becoming wider than necessary. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine Y4. In the gaming machine Y3, the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (2-card game, 3-card game) is performed in the second game state. Characteristic game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined game is played in the second game state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, even if the predetermined determination means repeats the determination result not to activate the instruction function, it is possible to suppress the interval at which the specific determination means operates the instruction function from becoming wider than necessary. becomes possible.

Game machine Y5. In the gaming machine Y4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined game is to play one game.

According to this gaming machine, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated each time a game is played. By adopting such a configuration, for example, if the interval at which the instruction function operates is widened based on the fact that the lottery result of the role is not the specified result, the next lottery result of the role becomes the specified result. It is possible to operate the instruction function once, regardless of the judgment result of the predetermined judging means. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game state is a specific result, the It is possible to reduce the chances of running out of game media.

Game machine Y6. In any one of the game machines Y1 to Y5, when the instruction function is activated, a change means (navi counter reset function S80205 of the main controller 101) for changing the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the initial information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the instruction function is activated, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is changed to the initial information. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means and, at the same time, to suppress an excessively wide operation interval of the instruction function with a relatively simple processing configuration. Become.

Game machine Y7. In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y6, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specified result, the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the The game machine is characterized in that the instruction function is operated more frequently than in the second game in which the specified result is obtained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result, the number of the winning combination is higher than that in the second game round in which the lottery result of the role in the second game state is the specific result. The indication function is activated frequently. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from the transition to the second game state to the first activation of the instruction function.

Game machine Y8. In any one of the game machines Y1 to Y7, the first game state is configured such that the expected value of the number of game media provided per game is smaller than the number of game media required for one game, and A gaming machine characterized in that the second game state is configured such that an expected value of the number of game media provided per game is greater than the number of game media required for one game.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game state, the game media owned by the player are expected to decrease each time the game is played, and in the second game state, the game media owned by the player play the game. expected to increase each year. In such a configuration, in the case where the instruction function may not operate when the result of the lottery for the combination in the second game state is a specific result, the game medium owned by the player in the second game state is not activated. It may run out. In addition, when the game media owned by the player runs out in the second game state, there is a concern that the player's motivation for playing the game will be significantly reduced. However, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination in the second game state is a specific result, if the frequency of operation of the instruction function is higher than the frequency of non-operation of the instruction function, the above concerns may arise. can be suitably resolved.

Game machine Y9. In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y8, when the game state is the specific result of the lottery result of the winning combination, the instruction function is activated at a frequency higher than that of the second gaming state. A game state (notification mode B) is provided, and transition determination means (promotion lottery function S80305 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift from the second game state to the third game state is provided. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result, the second game state can be shifted to the third game state in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the second game state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the game under the second game state while anticipating the transition to the third game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the X group of gaming machines to the Y group of gaming machines may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group A to the game machine group W may be appropriately combined with the game machine group X to the game machine group Y, and even in the case of combination, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine 9A1. a specific determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not a specific condition (rare role winning) has been established;
a specific sound output control means (VDP 253) that performs control to output a specific sound (rare role winning sound) from a specific channel (CH2, CH3) when the specific condition is satisfied;
When the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound (normal BGM, etc.) is output from predetermined channels (CH4, CH5) at a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is set to the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine comprising volume reduction control means (VDP253) for controlling the volume to be reduced from the volume to a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB).

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if a specific condition is met while a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is established.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Gaming machine 9A2. In the gaming machine 9A1, the volume reduction control means performs control to reduce the volume to a volume smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined sound is output with a volume lower than that of the specific sound. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound output when the specific condition is established. Become.

Game machine 9A3. In the game machine 9A1 or the game machine 9A2, the specific sound output control means performs control to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is satisfied. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is established, control is performed to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Game machine 9A4. In any one of the game machines 9A1 to 9A3, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (symbols), and a controller for individually stopping the cyclic display of the patterns A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for performing a lottery for a role, and a prize for a winning combination that has won the lottery for the role has been established. a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main controller 101) for granting a privilege to the player in the event that a special role (rare role) is won in the lottery result of the role. and determining that the specific condition has been established when a specific winning is established.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific prize is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, when the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since it is based on the operation of the plurality of stop operation means by the player whether or not the specific winning is established, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment by establishing the specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of the specific winning. It is possible to heighten the anticipation and the like of the event by outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9A5. In any one of the game machines 9A1 to 9A4, when the output of the specific sound is completed, fade-in control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. A game machine characterized by comprising means (VDP 253).

According to this game machine, when the output of the specific sound is finished, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the specific sound compared to the configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound is finished. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9A6. In the gaming machine 9A5, the fade-in control means adjusts the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine characterized by varying the time required until it becomes.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the reverberation different between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 9A7. In the gaming machine 9A6, a specific privilege granting means (main controller 101) that imparts a specific privilege (transition to the notification mode, addition of the number of games) is provided, and when the first specific sound is output and the second specific sound A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation for the specific privilege to be given is different between when is output and when is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation for the specific privilege differs between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if the user does not notice that the specific sound has been output or cannot grasp which specific sound has been output, the expectation for the provision of the specific privilege will be reduced. , there is concern that the interest in gaming may decline. However, when the specific sound is output from the specific channel, the volume of the predetermined sound is lowered from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume, and when the output of the specific sound is completed, the volume of the predetermined sound is decreased from the second predetermined volume. In the configuration of fading in to the first predetermined sound volume, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Game machine 9A8. In the gaming machine 9A7, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation that the specific privilege is given is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of the specific privilege being given is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for the provision of the specific privilege with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

Game machine 9A9. In any one of the game machines 9A5 to 9A8, a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game round, and the start operation means are operated. and volume return control means (VDP 253) for controlling the volume of the predetermined sound to return to the first predetermined volume when the volume is changed.

According to this game machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it is possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Game machine 9A10. A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines 9A1 to 9A9, a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel are provided. machine.

According to this game machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With such a configuration, for example, when there is an opportunity to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before change and the volume information related to the volume after change are stored in different volume information. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9A11. In the gaming machine 9A10, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the first When a second change condition (rare role winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been input.

According to this game machine, when the first change condition is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in the second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether the first change condition is satisfied and whether the second change condition is satisfied through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9A12. In the gaming machine 9A11, the comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) is provided for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the comparison and determination means compares and determines the minimum value and the volume information A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using a.

According to this game machine, the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and judged, and the sound is output from the predetermined channel using the volume information compared and judged with the minimum value. By comparing and judging the volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas and outputting the sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from the predetermined channel. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. In addition, by using the volume information compared with the minimum value to output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state, for example. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9A13. In any one of the game machines 9A10 to 9A12, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information (64 ), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Gaming machine 9A14. In the gaming machine 9A13, when the specific changing means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the volume information different from the specific volume information is used to make a sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. By adopting such a configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel is changed from the first predetermined volume while maintaining the processing configuration of changing the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform control such as reducing the volume to a second predetermined volume or not decreasing the volume of a predetermined channel.

Gaming machine 9B1. a specific determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not a specific condition (rare role winning) has been established;
a specific sound output control means (VDP 253) that performs control to output a specific sound (rare role winning sound) from a specific channel (CH2, CH3) when the specific condition is satisfied;
When the output of the specific sound ends in a situation where the predetermined sound (normal BGM, etc.) is output from the predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at the second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced to the above A gaming machine comprising fade-in control means (VDP253) for performing control to fade in from a second predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB).

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. Then, when the output of the specific sound ends in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. . By adopting such a configuration, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the specific sound compared to the configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound is finished. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Gaming machine 9B2. In the gaming machine 9B1, the fade-in control means adjusts the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine characterized by varying the time required until it becomes.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the reverberation different between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Gaming machine 9B3. In the gaming machine 9B2, a specific privilege imparting means (main controller 101) that imparts a specific privilege (transition to the notification mode, addition of the number of games) is provided, and when the first specific sound is output and the second specific sound A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation for the specific privilege to be given is different between when is output and when is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation for the specific privilege differs between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if the user does not notice that the specific sound has been output or cannot grasp which specific sound has been output, the expectation for the provision of the specific privilege will be reduced. , there is concern that the interest in gaming may decline. However, in the configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is faded in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound is finished, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns and improve the game interest. It becomes possible to plan

Gaming machine 9B4. In the gaming machine 9B3, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation to be given the specific privilege is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of the specific privilege being given is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for the provision of the specific privilege with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

Gaming machine 9B5. In any one of the game machines 9B1 to 9B4, a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game cycle, and the start operation means are operated. and volume return control means (VDP 253) for controlling the volume of the predetermined sound to return to the first predetermined volume when the volume is changed.

According to this game machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it is possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Gaming machine 9B6. In any one of the game machines 9B1 to 9B5, when the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is set to the first volume. A gaming machine comprising volume reduction control means (VDP 253) for performing control to reduce the volume from a predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is established in a situation where a predetermined sound is output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. done. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is established.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9B7. In the gaming machine 9B6, the volume reduction control means performs control to reduce the volume to a level smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined sound is output with a volume lower than that of the specific sound. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound output when the specific condition is established. Become.

Gaming machine 9B8. In the game machine 9B6 or the game machine 9B7, the specific sound output control means performs control to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is established. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is established, control is performed to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Gaming machine 9B9. In any one of the game machines 9B6 to 9B8, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (symbols), and a controller for individually stopping the cyclic display of the patterns A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for performing a lottery for a role, and a prize for a winning combination that has won the lottery for the role has been established. a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main controller 101) for granting a privilege to the player in the event that a special role (rare role) is won in the lottery result of the role. and determining that the specific condition has been established when a specific winning is established.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific prize is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, when the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since it is based on the operation of the plurality of stop operation means by the player whether or not the specific winning is established, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment by establishing the specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of the specific winning. It is possible to heighten the anticipation and the like of the event by outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9B10. A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines 9B1 to 9B9, a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel are provided. machine.

According to this game machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With such a configuration, for example, when there is an opportunity to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before change and the volume information related to the volume after change are stored in different volume information. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9B11. In the gaming machine 9B10, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage areas is changed, and the first When a second change condition (rare role winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been input.

According to this game machine, when the first change condition is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in the second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether the first change condition is satisfied and whether the second change condition is satisfied through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9B12. In the gaming machine 9B11, the comparison and determination means (the volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) is provided for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the comparison and determination means compares and determines the volume information with the minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using a.

According to this game machine, the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and judged, and the sound is output from the predetermined channel using the volume information compared and judged with the minimum value. By comparing and judging the volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas and outputting the sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from the predetermined channel. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. In addition, by using the volume information compared with the minimum value to output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state, for example. It becomes possible.

Gaming machine 9B13. In any one of the game machines 9B10 to 9B12, when the specific condition is established, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage areas is transferred to the specific volume information (64 ), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Gaming machine 9B14. In the gaming machine 9B13, when the specific changing means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the volume information different from the specific volume information is used to make the sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. By adopting such a configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel is changed from the first predetermined volume while maintaining the processing configuration of changing the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform control such as reducing the volume to a second predetermined volume or not decreasing the volume of a predetermined channel.

Game machine 9C1. Predetermined sound output control means (VDP 253) for controlling output of predetermined sounds (normal BGM, etc.) from predetermined channels (CH4, CH5);
A volume information storage area (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel,
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of volume information storage areas.

According to this game machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With such a configuration, for example, when there is an opportunity to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before change and the volume information related to the volume after change are stored in different volume information. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9C2. In the gaming machine 9C1, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage areas is changed, and the first When a second change condition (rare role winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been input.

According to this game machine, when the first change condition is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in the second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether the first change condition is satisfied and whether the second change condition is satisfied through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9C3. In the gaming machine 9C2, the comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) is provided for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the comparison and determination means compares and determines the volume information with the minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using a.

According to this game machine, the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and judged, and the sound is output from the predetermined channel using the volume information compared and judged with the minimum value. By comparing and judging the volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas and outputting the sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from the predetermined channel. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. In addition, by using the volume information compared with the minimum value to output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state, for example. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9C4. In any one of the gaming machines 9C1 to 9C3, a specific determining means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not a specific condition (rare role winning) is established; Specific sound output control means (VDP 253) for controlling output of a specific sound (rare role winning sound) from channels (CH2, CH3), and output of the predetermined sound from the predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB) Volume reduction control means (VDP 253) for controlling the volume of the predetermined sound to decrease from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB) when the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if a specific condition is met while a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is established.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9C5. In the game machine 9C4, when the specific condition is established, specific changing means for changing the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage areas to the specific volume information (64) (volume value change function of VDP 253), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9C6. In the gaming machine 9C5, when the specific changing means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the volume information different from the specific volume information is used to make a sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed to the specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. By adopting such a configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel is changed from the first predetermined volume while maintaining the processing configuration of changing the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform control such as reducing the volume to a second predetermined volume or not decreasing the volume of a predetermined channel.

Gaming machine 9C7. In any one of the game machines 9C4 to 9C6, the volume reduction control means performs control to reduce the volume to a level smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound. machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined sound is output with a volume lower than that of the specific sound. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound output when the specific condition is established. Become.

Game machine 9C8. In any one of the game machines 9C4 to 9C7, the specific sound output control means performs control to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is established. Characteristic game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is established, control is performed to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Gaming machine 9C9. In any one of the game machines 9C4 to 9C8, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (symbols), and a reel for individually stopping the cyclic display of the patterns. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for performing a lottery for a role, and a prize for a winning combination that has won the lottery for the role has been established. a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main controller 101) for granting a privilege to the player in the event that a special role (rare role) is won in the lottery result of the role. and determining that the specific condition has been established when a specific winning is established.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific prize is established, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, when the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since it is based on the operation of the plurality of stop operation means by the player whether or not the specific winning is established, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment by establishing the specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of the specific winning. It is possible to heighten the anticipation and the like of the event by outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Gaming machine 9C10. In any one of the gaming machines 9C4 to 9C9, fade-in control for performing control to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound is completed. A game machine characterized by comprising means (VDP 253).

According to this game machine, when the output of the specific sound is finished, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the specific sound compared to the configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound is finished. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Gaming machine 9C11. In the gaming machine 9C10, the fade-in control means adjusts the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine characterized by varying the time required until it becomes.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound is finished and when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the reverberation different between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 9C12. In the gaming machine 9C11, a specific privilege granting means (main controller 101) that imparts a specific privilege (transition to the notification mode, addition of the number of games) is provided, and when the first specific sound is output and the second specific sound A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation for the specific privilege to be given is different between when is output and when is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation for the specific privilege differs between when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if the user does not notice that the specific sound has been output or cannot grasp which specific sound has been output, the expectation for the provision of the specific privilege will be reduced. , there is concern that the interest in gaming may decline. However, when the specific sound is output from the specific channel, the volume of the predetermined sound is decreased from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume, and when the output of the specific sound is completed, the volume of the predetermined sound is decreased from the second predetermined volume. In the configuration of fading in to the first predetermined sound volume, it is possible to preferably solve the above-mentioned concerns, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 9C13. In the gaming machine 9C12, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation to be given the specific privilege is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of the specific privilege being given is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for the provision of the specific privilege with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

Gaming machine 9C14. In any one of the game machines 9C10 to 9C13, the start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) operated to start the game round, and the start operation means are operated. and volume return control means (VDP 253) for controlling the volume of the predetermined sound to return to the first predetermined volume when the volume is changed.

According to this game machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it is possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Gaming machine 9D1. Defined determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether a defined condition (execution of start operation) has been established;
When the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound (normal BGM, etc.) is output from predetermined channels (CH4, CH5) at a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is set to the second level. A gaming machine comprising fade-in control means (VDP 253) for controlling fade-in from a predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB).

According to this game machine, when a specified condition is established in a situation where a specified sound is output from a specified channel at a second specified volume, the volume of the specified sound is faded in from the second specified volume to the first specified volume. is done. By adopting such a configuration, compared with the configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the specified condition is established, the chances of the player being surprised by the output of the predetermined sound are reduced. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 9D2. In the gaming machine 9D1, second predetermined sound volume control means for performing control to reduce the sound volume for outputting the predetermined sound from the predetermined channel to the second predetermined sound volume when the predetermined time elapses without the game round being started. (VDP253).

According to this gaming machine, when the specified time has passed without the game round being started, control is performed to lower the volume of the predetermined sound output from the predetermined channel to the second predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound output from the predetermined channel when the gaming machine has not been operated for the predetermined time.

Gaming machine 9D3. The game machine 9D1 or the game machine 9D2 includes start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game round, and the regulation determination means A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined that the prescribed condition is established when the operation means is operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated to start a game round in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced to the second predetermined volume. control is performed to fade in from the volume to the first predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who is about to start a game round from being surprised by the output of the predetermined sound and losing the desire to play the game.

Game machine 9D4. In the gaming machine 9D3, the start operation means is divided into first start operation means (first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) operated to set the bet amount, and operated after the bet amount is set. and a second start operation means (start lever 41), and the defined determination means determines that the defined condition is satisfied when the first start operation means is operated. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the first start operation means is operated to set the number of bets in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced to the second predetermined volume. Control is performed to fade in from a predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume. With such a configuration, it is possible to start fade-in control before the start of the game cycle, and it is possible to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume before the start of the game cycle.

Game machine 9D5. In the game machine 9D3 or the game machine 9D4, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs) are operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the patterns. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44), a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for performing lottery for a role, and a game when a prize is won for a winning combination that wins the lottery for the role. and a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main controller 101) for granting a privilege to a player, and when the start operation means is operated, the game round is started and the plurality of cyclic display means are displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the game cycle is terminated when all of the patterns stop cyclically displaying or when the privilege giving means gives the privilege.

According to this game machine, it is possible to prevent a player who is about to start a new game from being surprised by the output of a predetermined sound and losing his or her desire to play in a game machine such as a so-called slot machine. .

Game machine 9D6. A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines 9D1 to 9D5, a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel are provided. machine.

According to this game machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With such a configuration, for example, when there is an opportunity to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before change and the volume information related to the volume after change are stored in different volume information. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9D7. In the gaming machine 9D6, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the first Volume stored in a second volume information storage area (second layer) different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas when a second change condition (power saving instruction) different from the change condition is established. A game machine characterized by comprising volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of VDP 253) for changing information.

According to this game machine, when the first change condition is established, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in the second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether the first change condition is satisfied and whether the second change condition is satisfied through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9D8. In the game machine 9D7, a comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) is provided for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the comparison and determination means compares and determines the minimum value of the volume information A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using a.

According to this game machine, the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and judged, and the sound is output from the predetermined channel using the volume information compared and judged with the minimum value. By comparing and judging the volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas and outputting the sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from the predetermined channel. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. In addition, by using the volume information compared with the minimum value to output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state, for example. It becomes possible.

Gaming machine 9D9. In any one of the gaming machines 9D6 to 9D8, predetermined changing means ( VDP 253 volume value changing function), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. .

According to this game machine, the volume information stored in the predetermined volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas may be changed to the predetermined volume information. Then, when sound is output from a predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize control for outputting the predetermined sound at the second predetermined volume with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9D10. In the gaming machine 9D9, when the prescribed condition is established in a situation where the prescribed volume information is stored in the prescribed volume information storage area, the prescribed volume information is kept until the volume of the prescribed channel reaches the first prescribed volume. A game machine characterized by comprising second predetermined changing means (volume value changing function of VDP 253) for changing volume information stored in a storage area.

According to this game machine, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined volume information is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area, the volume of the predetermined channel is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area until the volume reaches the first predetermined volume. volume information is changed. With such a configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

The game machines 9A to 9D may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Further, the game machine group A to the game machine group Y may be appropriately combined with the game machine group 9A to the game machine group 9D.

Game machine 10A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) that grants a privilege to a player when the winning combination won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination is established,
a specific effect start means (ending effect start function S100104 of the display control device 81) for starting a specific effect (ending effect) when a specific condition (finishing condition) is met;
Specific effect progression means (ED processing function of display control device 81) for advancing the specific effect so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds;
Interruption means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
A gaming machine comprising: specific effect resuming means (resume processing function S100307 of display control device 81) for starting the specific effect from the middle when the suspending means interrupts the display of the specific effect. .

According to this gaming machine, the specific effect is started when the specific condition is established. The specific effect progresses so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds. When the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect is started in the middle. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid starting the specific effect from the beginning when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to prevent the beginning of the specific effect from being repeatedly executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10A2. The gaming machine 10A1 includes progress information storage means (RAM of the display control device 81) for storing progress information (file number) relating to the degree of progress of the specific effect, and the specific effect restart means is the progress information storage means. A game machine characterized in that the specific performance is started from a position corresponding to the memory result of (1).

According to this game machine, the progress information storage means stores the progress information relating to the degree of progress of the specific effect. Then, when the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect, the specific effect is started from the position according to the storage result of the progress information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect can be resumed from the position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

Game machine 10A3. In the gaming machine 10A2, the data used when executing the specific effect is divided into a plurality of files and stored, and the progress information storage means stores information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be stored as the progress information.

According to this gaming machine, the data used when executing the specific effect are divided and stored in a plurality of files. Information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used is stored as progress information in the progress information storage means. With such a configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect can be resumed using the data of the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance can be resumed from the position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific performance.

Game machine 10A4. In the gaming machine 10A3, when all the data of the predetermined files (file numbers "1" to "7") are used, the specific effect progression means uses the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance is progressed by pressing the player.

According to this game machine, when all the data of the predetermined file are used, the specific effect is progressed using the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. With such a configuration, even when the data used for executing the specific performance are divided and stored in a plurality of files, the specific performance can be progressed independently of the progress of the game cycle. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 10A5. In the game machine 10A3 or 10A4, the specific effect resuming means causes the specific effect to start from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means.

According to this game machine, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect is restarted from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to re-execute a part of the specific effect that was executed before the interruption, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 10A6. In any one of the game machines 10A1 to 10A5, the specific effect resuming means starts the specific effect when the player performs a specific operation (resume operation).

According to this game machine, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect is started when the player performs the specific operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to determine the restart timing of the specific effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10A7. The game machine 10A6 described above is characterized by comprising specific operation notification means (auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the specific operation.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific operation is notified, it is possible to avoid the player from having a sense of incongruity when the specific effect is not started.

Game machine 10A8. In any one of the game machines 10A1 to 10A7, the interruption means interrupts the display of the specific effect when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific abnormality occurs in the game machine and the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect is restarted from the middle. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the specific performance has to be terminated in the middle of the specific performance as a result of the occurrence of the specific abnormality, for example, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 10A9. In any one of the gaming machines 10A1 to 10A8, when the difference number in a specific state (advantageous section) becomes a specific number (2400), a specific state ending means for ending the specific state, and the specific effect a specific performance ending means for ending the specific performance in the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the degree of progress of the specific performance, when the specific performance ends during execution. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, the specific state ends when the difference number in the specific state reaches the specific number. When the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round when the specific state ends regardless of the degree of progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, the number of games in which the specific effect can be executed changes depending on the lottery result of the combination, etc. Therefore, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted and the specific effect is restarted from the beginning, the specific effect is executed to the end. It may become impossible to do so. However, in this configuration, in which the display of the specific effect is started from the middle when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it is possible to preferably solve the above concern.

Game machine 10A10. In the gaming machine 10A9, the specific state includes a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (announcement mode) in which the expected value of giving game value per game round is higher than that in the first game mode. and, based on information related to the number of remaining games that can be played under the second game mode, it is determined whether the difference number in the specific state is the specific number under the second game mode. A game machine characterized in that the specific condition is established when the decision means determines that the difference number in the specific state in the second game mode is the specific number.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the difference number in the specific state under the second game mode is the specific number based on the information related to the number of remaining games that can be played under the second game mode. When it is determined that the number of coins is reached, the specific effect is started. In such a configuration, the number of games in which the specific effect can be executed changes depending on the lottery result of the combination, etc. Therefore, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted and the specific effect is restarted from the beginning, the specific effect is executed to the end. It may become impossible to do so. However, in this configuration, in which the display of the specific effect is started from the middle when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it is possible to preferably solve the above concern.

Game machine 10B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) that grants a privilege to a player when the winning combination won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination is established,
a specific effect start means (ending effect start function S100104 of the display control device 81) for starting a specific effect (ending effect) when a specific condition (finishing condition) is met;
Specific effect progression means (ED processing function of display control device 81) for advancing the specific effect so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds;
Interruption means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
a specific effect resuming means (resume processing function S100307 of the display control device 81) for resuming the specific effect when the suspending means suspends the display of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect resuming means is configured to be able to resume the specific effect by omitting part of the specific effect.

According to this gaming machine, the specific effect is started when the specific condition is established. The specific effect progresses so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds. When the display of the specific effect is interrupted, part of the specific effect may be omitted and resumed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Gaming machine 10B2. In the game machine 10B1, when a specific end condition (the difference in the number of sheets is 2400) is established, a specific state ending means for ending a specific state (advantageous section), and the specific state ends while the specific effect is being executed. When doing so, regardless of the degree of progress of the specific effect, when the specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect in the game round in which the specific state ends, and the specific effect restarting means restarts the specific effect, the specific effect a specific determination means for determining whether or not to omit part of the specific performance based on progress information relating to the degree of progress of the performance and a specific response condition corresponding to the specific end condition; A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, the specific state ends when the specific end condition is satisfied. When the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round when the specific state ends regardless of the degree of progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, there is a possibility that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end. However, when resuming the specific performance, it is determined whether or not to omit a part of the specific performance based on the progress information related to the degree of progress of the specific performance and the specific corresponding condition corresponding to the specific end condition. In the configuration, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine 10B3. In the game machine 10B1 or the game machine 10B2, when the differential number of sheets in a specific state (advantageous section) reaches a specific number (2400), a specific state ending means for ending the specific state and executing the specific effect. When the specific state ends while the player is playing, regardless of the degree of progress of the specific effect, the specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect in the game round in which the specific state ends, and the specific effect resuming means a specific determination means for determining whether or not to omit part of the specific effect based on progress information relating to the degree of progress of the specific effect and the difference in the number of sheets in the specific state when restarting the specific effect; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, the specific state ends when the difference number in the specific state reaches the specific number. When the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round when the specific state ends regardless of the degree of progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, since the number of games in which the specific effect can be executed changes depending on the lottery result of the combination, etc., when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, for example, when the specific effect is restarted from the beginning, the specific effect is continued until the end. It may become impossible to execute. However, when restarting the specific effect, in the configuration for determining whether or not to omit part of the specific effect based on the progress information related to the degree of progress of the specific effect and the difference in the number of sheets in the specific state, It is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine 10B4. In the gaming machine 10B2 or the gaming machine 10B3, when the number of times the interruption means interrupts the display of the specific effect exceeds a specified number of times, the specific effect restarting means omits a part of the specific effect and resumes it. A gaming machine characterized by allowing

According to this game machine, when the number of times that the display of the specific effect is interrupted exceeds the specified number of times, the specific effect is resumed with part of the specific effect omitted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end.

Gaming machine 10B5. Any one of the game machines 10B1 to 10B4 includes progress information storage means (RAM of the display control device 81) for storing progress information (file number) relating to the degree of progress of the specific effect, and the specific effect restart means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is started from a position corresponding to the result stored in the progress information storage means.

According to this game machine, the progress information storage means stores the progress information relating to the degree of progress of the specific effect. Then, when the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect, the specific effect is started from the position according to the storage result of the progress information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect can be resumed from the position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

Game machine 10B6. In the gaming machine 10B5, the data used when executing the specific effect is divided and stored in a plurality of files, and the progress information storage means stores information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be stored as the progress information.

According to this gaming machine, the data used when executing the specific effect are divided and stored in a plurality of files. Information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used is stored as progress information in the progress information storage means. With such a configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect can be resumed using the data of the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance can be resumed from the position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific performance.

Gaming machine 10B7. In the gaming machine 10B6, when all the data of the predetermined files (file numbers "1" to "7") are used, the specific effect progression means uses the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance is progressed by pressing the player.

According to this game machine, when all the data of the predetermined file are used, the specific effect is progressed using the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. With such a configuration, even when the data used for executing the specific performance are divided and stored in a plurality of files, the specific performance can be progressed independently of the progress of the game cycle. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 10B8. In the game machine 10B6 or 10B7, the specific effect resuming means omits a part of the specific effect by not using the data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, part of the specific effect is omitted by not using the data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect and, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, omit part of the specific effect and restart it. becomes.

Game machine 10B9. In any one of the game machines 10B6 to 10B8, the specific effect resuming means starts the specific effect from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means when the specific effect is not omitted. A gaming machine characterized by allowing

According to this game machine, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted and the specific performance is not omitted, the specific performance is restarted from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to re-execute a part of the specific effect that was executed before the interruption, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 10B10. In any one of the game machines 10B1 to 10B9, the specific effect resuming means starts the specific effect when the player performs a specific operation (resume operation).

According to this game machine, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect is started when the player performs the specific operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to determine the restart timing of the specific effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine 10B11. In any one of the game machines 10B1 to 10B10, the interruption means interrupts the display of the specific effect when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the display of the specific effect is interrupted, part of the specific effect may be omitted and restarted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the specific performance has to be terminated in the middle of the specific performance as a result of the occurrence of the specific abnormality, for example, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Gaming machine 10B12. In any one of the game machines 10B1 to 10B11, when the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect, the position after the position where the specific effect is interrupted (beginning of the next file) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to restart the game by omitting a part of the specific performance by restarting the game from .

According to this game machine, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it is possible to resume the specific effect by omitting part of the specific effect by restarting from the point after the point where the specific effect was interrupted. It has become. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

The group of gaming machines 10A and the group of gaming machines 10B may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. Further, the game machine group A to the game machine group Y, the game machine group 9A to the game machine group 9D may be appropriately combined with the game machine group 10A and the game machine group 10B. can also produce the above-described effects.

Game machine 11A1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
a winning/failing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control unit 101) for determining winning/failure with a winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine comprising privilege giving means (medal payout processing function S213 of main controller 101) that gives a privilege based on winning the winning judgment,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
A configuration capable of executing different notifications depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7) or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, different notifications can be executed depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It has become. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to perform a specific operation to prompt the user to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 11A2. The game machine 11A1 is provided with specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for executing specific notification, and the specific operation is a changeable state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed. a first specific operation (ON operation of the setting key) to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means (ON operation of the reset switch 72); 3 specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after the ON operation of the start lever 41), and the specific notification executing means is set to the third specific operation in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is to be changed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is changed to a changeable state by the first specific operation, and the second It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and end the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, when the third specifying operation is performed while the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specifying operation is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means by changing the specific value from the third specific operation to the second. It is possible to reduce the labor required to return to the 1 specific operation.

Game machine 11A3. In the gaming machine 11A2, the specific notification executing means does not execute the specific notification from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, the specific notification is not executed from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid executing the specific notification every time the specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it is possible to allow the operator who performs the work of changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the work without feeling annoyed.

Game machine 11A4. The game machine 11A2 or the game machine 11A3 is characterized in that means for executing the specific notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective.

According to this game machine, since the means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is inadequate, the fact that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means is detected through the specific notification. It is possible to notify.

Game machine 11A5. In any one of the game machines 11A2 to 11A4, the first state (front door 12 open state) in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and the second state (front door 12 open state) in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation A gaming machine characterized in that a switching member (front door 12) capable of switching between a closed state and a closed state is provided.

According to this game machine, a switching member is provided that can switch between the first state in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and the second state in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent alteration of the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Further, by applying this configuration to the configuration related to the game machine 11A2, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means in the stage before switching from the first state to the second state. Become. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, and the effort required for returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation can be reduced. It is possible to plan

Game machine 11A6. In the game machine 11A5, the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state, the specific notification is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the stage prior to performing the specific operation, and to check whether or not the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It is possible to easily perform confirmation.

Game machine 11A7. The game machine 11A5 or the game machine 11A6 is provided with a first state notification means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for notifying that it is in the first state, and the first state notification means corresponds to the numerical information storage means. different notification depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

According to this game machine, when the first state is notified, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value. Different notification is performed in the case of not. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing configuration associated with notifying that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and at the same time, the first state and the numerical information storage are suppressed. It is also possible to inform whether or not the numerical information stored in the means is a specific value.

Game machine 11A8. In any one of the game machines 11A5 to 10A7, when the first state is switched to the second state, confirmation means (setting of the display control device 81) for confirming numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means A gaming machine comprising a value confirmation function (S110606) and configured to perform processing according to the confirmation result of the confirmation means.

According to this game machine, when the state is switched from the first state to the second state, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is confirmed, and the processing according to the confirmation result is performed. With such a configuration, even after switching to the second state, it is possible to carry out processing for grasping the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 11A9. In the gaming machine 11A8, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification (lighting mode change ) is provided with predetermined notification executing means (display control device 81, upper lamp 63).

According to this game machine, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the predetermined notification is executed at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state.

Game machine 11A10. The game machine 11A8 or the game machine 11A9 is characterized in that means for executing the predetermined notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective.

According to this game machine, since the means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through the predetermined notification. It is possible to notify.

Game machine 11A11. In the gaming machine 11A9 or gaming machine 11A10, the predetermined notification executing means, as the predetermined notification, changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) visible from the front of the gaming machine under the second state to the first notification mode. A gaming machine characterized by changing from a notification mode (lighting state) to a second notification mode (lights out state).

According to this game machine, as the predetermined notification, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means visible from the front of the game machine under the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. With such a configuration, when a specific operation is performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the state is switched from the first state to the second state by the switching member, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It is possible to execute a predetermined notification as the final means of confirming whether or not the vehicle is present.

Game machine 11A12. In the gaming machine 11A11, when the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed from the second notification mode to the second notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. 1 notification mode.

According to this game machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed to the first notification mode after the predetermined time has elapsed. With such a configuration, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means can be returned from the second notification mode to the first notification mode without being operated by the manager of the game arcade where the game machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce labor when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Game machine 11A13. In any one of the game machines 11A2 to 11A12, the specific notification executing means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is executed by outputting predetermined sound data. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for a manager or the like of the game arcade where the game machine is installed to easily grasp that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the fact that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value is displayed at a predetermined position to execute the specific notification. However, in the case of such a configuration, it becomes necessary for the administrator or the like to move to a place where the predetermined position can be visually recognized and check the display contents, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. This is because the work of grasping whether there is or not becomes complicated.

Game machine 11B1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
a winning/failing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control unit 101) for determining winning/failure with a winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine comprising privilege giving means (medal payout processing function S213 of main controller 101) that gives a privilege based on winning the winning judgment,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
A switching member (front door 12) and
Confirmation means (set value confirmation function S110606 of display control device 81) for confirming numerical information stored in numerical information storage means when switching from the first state to the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform processing according to the confirmation result of the confirmation means.

According to this game machine, a switching member is provided that can switch between the first state in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and the second state in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent alteration of the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Further, when the state is switched from the first state to the second state, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is confirmed, and processing is performed according to the confirmation result. With such a configuration, even after switching to the second state, it is possible to carry out processing for grasping the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 11B2. In the gaming machine 11B1, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value (7) is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification (lighting A gaming machine characterized by comprising predetermined notification executing means (display control device 81, upper lamp 63) for executing a mode change).

According to this game machine, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the predetermined notification is executed at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, at a relatively early stage, it is possible to prompt the user to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means.

Game machine 11B3. In the above game machine 11B2, the game machine is characterized in that means for executing the predetermined notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is deficient.

According to this game machine, since the means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through the predetermined notification. It is possible to notify.

Game machine 11B4. In the game machine 11B2 or the game machine 11B3, the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) visible from the front of the game machine under the second state to the first notification mode as the predetermined notification. A gaming machine characterized by changing from a notification mode (lighting state) to a second notification mode (lights out state).

According to this game machine, as the predetermined notification, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means visible from the front of the game machine under the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. With such a configuration, when a specific operation is performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the state is switched from the first state to the second state by the switching member, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It is possible to execute a predetermined notification as the final means of confirming whether or not the vehicle is present.

Game machine 11B5. In the gaming machine 11B4, when the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed from the second notification mode to the second notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. 1 notification mode.

According to this game machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed to the first notification mode after the predetermined time has elapsed. With such a configuration, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means can be returned from the second notification mode to the first notification mode without being operated by the manager of the game arcade where the game machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce labor when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Game machine 11B6. In any one of the game machines 11B2 to 11B5, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. , and a game machine characterized by being configured to be able to execute different notifications.

According to this game machine, different notifications can be executed depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It has become. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to perform a specific operation to prompt the user to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine 11B7. The game machine 11B6 includes specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for executing specific notification, and the specific operation is a changeable state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed. a first specific operation (ON operation of the setting key) to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means (ON operation of the reset switch 72); 3 specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after the ON operation of the start lever 41), and the specific notification executing means is set to the third specific operation in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is to be changed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is changed to a changeable state by the first specific operation, and the second It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and end the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, when the third specifying operation is performed while the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specifying operation is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means by changing the specific value from the third specific operation to the second. It is possible to reduce the labor required to return to the 1 specific operation.

Moreover, in such a configuration, it is possible to inform that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means before switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, and the effort required for returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation can be reduced. It is possible to plan

Game machine 11B8. In the gaming machine 11B7, the specific notification executing means does not execute the specific notification from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, the specific notification is not executed from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid executing the specific notification every time the specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it is possible to allow the operator who performs the work of changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the work without feeling annoyed.

Game machine 11B9. In the game machine 11B7 or the game machine 11B8, the game machine is characterized in that means for executing the specific notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective.

According to this game machine, since the means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is inadequate, the fact that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means is detected through the specific notification. It is possible to notify.

Game machine 11B10. In any one of the game machines 11B7 to 11B9, when the specific notification executing means determines that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state, the specific notification is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state, the specific notification is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the stage prior to performing the specific operation, and to check whether or not the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It is possible to easily perform confirmation.

Game machine 11B11. In any one of the game machines 11B7 to 11B10, the specific notification executing means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is executed by outputting predetermined sound data. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for a manager or the like of the game arcade where the game machine is installed to easily grasp that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the fact that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value is displayed at a predetermined position to execute the specific notification. However, in the case of such a configuration, it becomes necessary for the administrator or the like to move to a place where the predetermined position can be visually recognized and check the display contents, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. This is because the work of grasping whether there is or not becomes complicated.

Game machine 11B12. In any one of the game machines 11B2 to 11B11, a first state reporting means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for reporting the first state is provided, and the first state reporting means has the numerical value A gaming machine characterized in that different notifications are executed depending on whether the numerical information stored in the information storage means is the specific value or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. .

According to this game machine, when the first state is notified, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value. Different notification is performed in the case of not. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing configuration associated with notifying that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and at the same time, the first state and the numerical information storage are suppressed. It is also possible to inform whether or not the numerical information stored in the means is a specific value.

Game machine 11C1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
a winning/failing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control unit 101) for determining winning/failure with a winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine comprising privilege giving means (medal payout processing function S213 of main controller 101) that gives a privilege based on winning the winning judgment,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
The specific operation is a first specific operation (ON operation of a setting key) that makes it possible to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, and the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means is selected. a second specific operation (ON operation of the reset switch 72), and a third specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after the ON operation of the start lever 41) to terminate the changeable state;
As a requirement that the third specific operation has been performed,
The signal from the first detection means (start detection sensor 41a) for detecting whether or not the first operation means (start lever 41) is operated is the first non-operation signal (OFF) indicating that the first operation means is not operated. signal) to a first operation signal (ON signal) indicating that the first operation means has been operated;
After detecting that the signal from the first detection means is switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal, second detection means (setting The signal from the key detection sensor 73a) changes from a second operation signal (ON signal) indicating that the second operating means has been operated to a second non-operating signal indicating that the second operating means has not been operated. A game machine characterized by comprising at least detecting switching to (OFF signal).

According to this gaming machine, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is to be changed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is changed to a changeable state by the first specific operation, and the second It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and end the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, the first non-operation signal indicating that the first operating means is not operated indicates that the first operating means has been operated. After that, the signal from the second detection means for detecting whether or not the second operation means has been operated is the second operation signal indicating that the second operation means has been operated. The third specific operation is performed based on detecting that the signal is switched to the second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not operated.

By adopting a configuration including at least the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means as a requirement for the third specific operation, it becomes possible to make fraudulent acts difficult and noise, etc. It is possible to reduce the chance of erroneously determining that the third specific operation has been performed. Further, the second operating means is configured to detect, for example, the second non-operating signal by detecting that the signal from the second detecting means is switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operating signal. , it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

As a result, it becomes possible to normally change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Game machine 11C2. The gaming machine 11C1 is characterized in that the requirement for performing the first specific operation includes detection of input of the second operation signal from the second detection means. game machine.

According to this game machine, the requirement for performing the first specific operation includes detection of input of the second operation signal. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform the first specific operation and the third specific operation by the second operation means, and it is possible to simplify the specific operation.

Further, when the second operation means is operated so as to input the second non-operation signal from the second detection means in the stage before operating the first operation means, that is, the stage before the third specific operation, the first After operating the operating means, the second operating means is operated again so that the second operation signal is input from the second detecting means, and the second operating means is operated so that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detecting means. will need to be manipulated. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

Game machine 11C3. In the gaming machine 11C2, the second operation means is configured to be able to hold the second operation signal in a state where the second detection means outputs the second operation means without operating the second operation means. A game machine characterized by

According to the game machine, the second operation means can hold the second operation signal in a state where the second detection means outputs without operating the second operation means. With this configuration, when the second operation means is operated when performing the first specific operation, the second non-operation signal is output from the second detection means as the third specific operation. All you have to do is operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the specific operation.

Game machine 11C4. In any one of the game machines 11C1 to 11C3, the signal from the second detection means is switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal as a requirement for performing the third specific operation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to include detection of the input of the second non-operation signal from the second detection means for a prescribed number of times (10 times) after detecting that the second non-operation signal has been input.

According to this game machine, as a requirement that the third specific operation is performed, after detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, the second detection It includes detection of a specified number of times that the second non-operation signal is input from the means. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of switching of the signal from the second detection means due to noise or the like.

Game machine 11C5. In the game machine 11C4, it is detected that the second operation signal is input from the second detection means before the predetermined number of times that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when detected, the switching of the signal from the second detection means from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal is detected again.

According to this gaming machine, when it is detected that the second operation signal is input from the second detection means before detecting that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means for the specified number of times, It is detected again that the signal from the second detection means is switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of switching of the signal from the second detection means due to noise or the like.

Game machine 11C6. In any one of the game machines 11C1 to 11C5, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the third specifying operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specifying operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without performing the third specifying operation.

Game machine 11C7. In the gaming machine 11C6, updating means (set value update function S110210 of the main control unit 101) for updating numerical information when the second specific operation is performed, and storage means (RAM 106) for storing the update result of the updating means display buffer), and display means (payout number display unit 62) for displaying the numerical information stored in the storage means, and when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical value stored in the storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the information is stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this game machine, the numerical information updated when the second specific operation is performed is stored in the storage means and displayed on the display means. Then, when the third specifying operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means. By configuring to display the updated numerical information when the second specifying operation is performed, the numerical information intended by the operator performing the specifying operation can be relatively easily selected by the second specifying operation. becomes. Further, the numerical information updated when the second specifying operation is performed is stored in the storing means different from the numerical information storing means, so that the numerical information is stored in the numerical information storing means without performing the third specifying operation. It is possible to avoid changing the numerical information that has been entered.

Game machine 11C8. In any one of the game machines 11C1 to 11C7, a periodical confirmation means (timer interrupt processing of the main control device 101) for periodically confirming signals from the first detection means and the second detection means; Waiting means (interrupt waiting processing S110206, S110501 of the main controller 101) for waiting until confirmation by the confirmation means is performed, and when determining whether or not the third specific operation is performed, the waiting means A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform standby by means.

According to this game machine, when it is determined whether or not the third specific operation has been performed, there is a process of waiting until signals from the first detection means and the second detection means are confirmed by the periodic confirmation means. done. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the third specific operation has been performed based on the latest status of the signals from the first detection means and the second detection means. As a result, for example, for one operation of the first operating means, it is possible to avoid detecting multiple times that the signal from the first detecting means is switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal. It becomes possible to

Game machine 11C9. In any one of the game machines 11C1 to 11C8, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7), and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute different notifications depending on whether it is not.

According to this game machine, different notifications can be executed depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value or when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It has become. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to perform a specific operation to prompt the user to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machines 11A to 11C may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. In addition, the game machine group A to the game machine group Y, the game machine group 9, and the game machine group 10 may be appropriately combined with the game machine group 11, and even if they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. can play.

10... A slot machine as a game machine, 32... A reel as a circulation display means and a revolving body, 41... A start operation means or a start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44... A stop switch as a stop operation means, 56... First credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57... Second credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58... Third credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means , 63 . Display control device constituting a sub control board or specific effect execution means, 101 Main control device as a main control board, 102 CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (5)

numerical information storage means for storing numerical information;
a success/fail determination means for determining success/failure with a winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine comprising privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on winning the winning judgment,
When a specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
a first specifying operation for setting the specifying operation to a changeable state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed; and a second specifying operation for selecting numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storing means; a third specific operation for terminating the changeable state;
As a requirement that the third specific operation has been performed,
The signal from the first detection means for detecting whether or not the first operation means is operated indicates that the first operation means has been operated from the first non-operation signal indicating that the first operation means is not operated. detecting switching to the first operation signal indicating
After detecting that the signal from the first detection means is switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal, the signal from the second detection means for detecting whether or not the second operation means is operated is At least detecting that the second operation signal indicating that the second operation means has been operated has been switched to the second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means has not been operated. A gaming machine characterized by: 2. A configuration according to claim 1, wherein the requirement for performing the first specific operation includes detection of input of the second operation signal from the second detection means. game machine. 3. The second operation means is configured to be able to hold the second operation signal in a state where the second detection means outputs the second operation signal without operating the second operation means. 2. The gaming machine described in 2. As a requirement that the third specific operation has been performed, after detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, 4. The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising detecting that the second non-operation signal is input a specified number of times. If it is detected that the second operation signal is input from the second detection means before detecting that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means for the specified number of times, the 5. The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the switching of the signal from the second detection means from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal is detected again.

Images